Canon XF205 9592B002 User Manual
PUB. DIM-1104-000A  
HD Camcorder  
Instruction manual  
Caméscope HD  
Manuel d'instruction  
Videocámera HD  
Manual de Instrucciones  
FCC NOTICE  
HD Camcorder, XF200 / XF205 Systems.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
3
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual.  
If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the  
equipment.  
Model ID0038 (including WLAN Module Model RF400, FCC ID: AZD400)  
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stanrd(s). Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, ad (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may cause undesired opiof the device.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in ction wany other antenna or transmitter.  
The available scientific evidence does not show that aproblemare associated with using low  
power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, thaow powewireless devices are absolutely  
safe. Low power wireless devices emit low adio quency energy (RF) in the microwave range  
while being used. Whereas high levels of Rce hlth effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-  
level RF that does not produce heg effeo knwn adverse health effects. Many studies of  
low-level RF exposures have nofound any bfects. Some studies have suggested that some  
biological effects might occur, bsuch findings ot been confirmed by additional research. This model  
has been tested and found to cply with CC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled  
equipment and meets the FCC rafreqncy (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio  
frequency (RF) Exposure rules.  
Compliance with FCC requirement 15.407(c) Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the  
passed down through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and finally to the RF chip. Several  
special packets are initiated by the MAC. These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on  
the RF transmitter, which it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore, the transmitter will be on only  
while one of the aforementioned packets is being transmitted. In other words, this device automatically  
discontinues transmission in case of either absence of information to transmit or operational failure.  
Frequency Tolerance: 25 ppm  
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, USA  
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)  
Important Safety Instructions  
In these safety instructions the word “apparatus”  
refers to the Canon HD Camcorder XF200 / XF205  
and all its accessories.  
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided  
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an  
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
4
9. Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the apparatus.  
1. Read these instructions.  
2. Keep these instructions.  
3. Heed all warnings.  
4. Follow all instructions.  
10. Only use attachments/accessories specified by  
the manufacturer.  
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6. Clean only with dry cloth.  
11. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
7. Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce  
heat.  
12. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has  
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply  
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled  
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the  
apparatuhas been exposed to rain or moisture,  
doenot perate normally, or has been dropped.  
8. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized  
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two  
blades with one wider than the other.  
A grounding type plug has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third  
CAN 3(B)/(B)  
REGIONS OF USE  
XF200 / XF205 are in compliance (as June 2014) with the radio signal regulations of the regions listed below. For  
details on other regions where they can e usedake inquiries with the contacts listed on the back cover of this  
instruction manual.  
REGIONS  
Canada, Hong Kong S.A.R., South Korea, Taiwan, USA  
Model  
ID0038: XF200 / XF205  
5
Trademark Acknowledgements  
• SD, SDHC and SDXC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.  
• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
• The CF Logo is a trademark of CompactFlash Assoc
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trks of Micsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
• Apple, App Store, Mac OS, Final Cut Pro aks opple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
• IOS is a trademark or registered ademark of Cthe U.S. and other countries and is used under license.  
• Google, Android, Google Play, arradems of Google Inc.  
• Avid, Media Composer and NewsCur e trademarks or registered trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc. or  
its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.  
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
• Wi-Fi Certified, WPA, WPA2, and the Wi-Fi Certified logo are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
• WPS as used on the camcorder's settings, onscreen displays and in this manual signifies Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup.  
• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
• JavaScript is a trademark or registered trademark of Oracle Corporation, its affiliates or subsidiaries in the  
United States and other countries.  
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.  
• Other names and products not mentioned above may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their  
respective companies.  
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.  
• ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT  
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED  
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2  
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,  
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206.  
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-  
4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and  
noncommercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4  
compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.  
Highlights of the XF200 / XF205  
The Canon HD Camcorder XF200 / XF205 is a compact-sized and highly portable camcorder that offers  
superior video quality. The camcorder features a 1/2.84-in. CMOS sensor and allows you to record in two  
formats (MXF on CF cards or MP4 on SD cards). The following are some of the many features that will help you  
turn your creative vision into reality.  
6
Improved displays  
HD Recording  
The camcorder features a 3.5-in. OLED display  
(equivalent to 1,230,000 dots) that excels in color  
reproduction, contrast and responsiveness and is  
easy to use even in bright outdoors. The viewfinder,  
on the other hand, offers a high-resolution LCD  
screen (also equivalent to 1,230,000 dots) with a  
wide angle of view of approx. 28.2°. The viewfinder  
can be tilted 68° vertically to ensure a comfortable fit  
in various shooting conditions.  
1/2.84-in. CMOS sensor and DIGIC DV 4 image  
processor  
The HD CMOS PRO sensor can capture video at an  
effective pixel count of 2,910,000 pixels. Combined  
with the advanced DIGIC DV 4 image processor and  
the 20x wide-angle lens, it can deliver a center  
resolution of 900 TV lines. Furthermore, thanks to  
Canon’s high-sensitivity and noise reduction  
technologies, you can get excellent video quality  
with minimal noise even when recording in low-light  
situations.  
Recording media  
The camcorder records MXF clips to CF cards and  
MP4 clips to D cards. It features two CF card slots  
that you an e to record continuously, one after  
the other, urelay recording (A 42), or  
eously ing double slot recording (A 42).  
even recd MP4 clips to the SD card while  
reing an MXF clip on one or both CF cards  
(A 23).  
MXF and MP4 formats  
You can choose the movie format according to your  
workflow needs. You can record in MXF format  
using the MPEG-2 Long GOP codec, in MP4 format  
using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec, or in both  
formats simultaneously. MXF clips are recorded
Material eXchange Format (MXF files), compatib
with all major non-linear (NLE) editing ftwre.  
Work with major NLE software  
The Canon XF Utility software and various XF  
plugins are available as free downloads from your  
local Canon Web site. Canon XF Utility allows you  
to easily save, manage and play back your MXF  
clips, while the XF plugins let you smoothly link them  
to major NLE software* to continue your editing  
workflow. For details, refer to Saving MXF Clips  
(A 168).  
Flexible video and audio configurati
For MXF clips, the camcorder offers 3 solution  
sizes (1920x1080, 1440x1080 or 1280x0), 4  
frame rate options and 3 bit rate options for a total  
of 16 video configurations (A 55). Audio is  
recorded as linear PCM audio using 2 or 4 channels  
(A 98).  
For MP4 clips, the camcorder offers 3 resolution  
sizes (1920x1080, 1280x720 or 640x360), 3 frame  
rate options and 5 bit rate options for a total of 8  
possible video configurations (A 55).  
The supplied software Data Import Utility allows  
you to save MP4 clips to a computer and even join  
split MP4 files into a single file for editing. For details,  
refer to Saving MP4 Clips (A 170).  
* Refer to Saving Clips to a Computer (A 168) for details  
on compatible software.  
Operability and Adaptability  
Pro-level remote operation  
Freely customizable compact design  
The camcorder can be used with the optional  
RC-V100 Remote Controller for remote operation of  
many advanced functions, including iris, gain and  
even custom picture settings.  
The camcorder offers maximum operability for a  
single camera operator. It features 3 separate rings  
for independent focus, zoom and iris operation. The  
camcorder’s side grip can be easily adjusted up to  
120 degrees to let you use whatever camera angle  
you need (A 35). Additionally, gain, shutter and iris  
controls can be adjusted manually or automatically  
giving you the freedom to decide to what extent you  
want to control every aspect of the image.  
operation. Save custom picture and menu settings  
to an SD card so that you can transfer your setting  
preferences to other XF200 / XF205 camcorders in  
order to use them in the same way.  
Versatile Artistic Expression  
Special recording modes  
The special recording modes (A 118) give you  
more creative control over your recordings. You can  
create a slow motion or fast motion effect in your  
recordings, record a certain number of frames at a  
set interval (ideal for nature shots and other subjects  
with little movement) or record a certain number of  
frames every time you press a button (ideal for stop  
motion animation).  
Other Functions  
7
• Direct setting mode (A 57)  
Change main camera functions while checking  
the image on the screen using only the joystick.  
Custom picture settings  
• Assistance functions  
With custom picture settings (A 132), you can  
enjoy unparalleled image control to deliver the “look”  
you want by adjusting parameters, such as gamma  
and sharpness.  
Peaking and magnification (A 84) can be helpful  
when you use manual focus, onscreen markers  
(A 88) can be very useful to help you frame your  
video, and zebra patterns (A 89) can give you a  
reference point to avoid overexposures.  
• Video scopes (A 108)  
Advanced Professional Features and  
Flexibility  
Check the brightness of the image using the  
waveform monitor, the color of the image using  
the vectorscope, or the focus using the edge  
monitor.  
Wired and Wi-Fi network functions (A 173)  
You can connect the camcorder to other devices via  
wired (Ethernet) connection or Wi-Fi to enjoy a  
variety of functions. For example, you can transfer  
recordings to an FTP server or use the Web browser  
on a connected device to remotely operate the  
camcorder (Browser Remote) or to play back the  
recordings on the camcorder (Playback via  
Browser).  
• IntelligeSystem  
When usg battery packs compatible with  
Intelliystem, the camcorder will display an  
timate, minutes, of the remaining recording/  
back tiusing the battery pack (A 25). You  
n also check the battery life indicator and other  
nformation on the [Battery/Hour Meter] status  
reen (A 213).  
Pro-level connectivity  
The camcorder offers two terminalor professi
level connectivity. Use the 3G/HD-I terminal to  
output the uncompressed HD video gnal alg  
with embedded audio and SMPTE timcodLTC)  
in a format that can be used for external recording.  
Meanwhile, the MON. terminal offers the best video  
output for an external monitor, including the option  
to overlay the camcorder’s onscreen displays.  
Genlock synchronization (A 94), the TIME CODE  
terminal (A 95, 96) and GENLOCK/SYNC OUT  
terminal allow the camcorder to be part of any multi-  
camera shooting setup.  
• Multiple audio recording options (A 98)  
The camcorder offers 2- or 4-channel linear PCM  
audio recording for MXF clips and 2-channel AAC  
audio recording for MP4 clips. You can use the  
camcorder’s built-in microphone, external  
microphones with a ∅ 3.5 mm mini-stereo plug  
(MIC terminal), or external audio input sources  
with an XLR plug (INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals with  
+48 V phantom power supply). The camcorder  
even has a convenient microphone holder with  
cable clamp for external microphones.  
• Metadata and GPS information (A 111, 114)  
You have the option to add various metadata  
fields to your MXF clips. Some of the information  
requires using Canon XF Utility or the Browser  
Remote application. Additionally, you can connect  
the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver to the  
camcorder to automatically add GPS information  
to your recordings. Using Canon XF Utility you  
can then organize or search MXF clips by GPS  
information.  
Infrared recording  
Record in darkness using infrared recording  
(A 126). With the built-in infrared light, you can  
record nocturnal animals in their natural environment  
or other such scenes.  
Customization  
The camcorder features several customization  
options. You can assign often-used functions to  
assignable buttons (A 129) so that you can call up  
those functions with the press of a single button.  
You can also register frequently-used menu settings  
in an easy-to-access personal menu (My Menu,  
A 30). Custom functions (A 141) and custom  
onscreen displays (A 142) give you even more  
freedom to control many aspects of the camcorder’s  
Table of Contents  
8
Remote Operation of the Camcorder 44  
Using the Supplied Wireless Controller 44  
Using the Optional RC-V100 Remote  
Controller 45  
1. Introduction 11  
About this Manual 11  
Conventions Used in this Manual 11  
Supplied Accessories 13  
Names of Parts 14  
WL-D6000 Wireless Controller 21  
3. Recording 47  
Recording Video 47  
Preparing to Record 47  
Recording 48  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote 50  
Onscreen Displays 51  
Power Save Mode 54  
Using the an 54  
2. Preparations 23  
Preparing the Power Supply 23  
Using a Battery Pack 23  
Using a Household Power Outlet 25  
Turning the Camcorder On and Off 26  
Date, Time and Language Settings 27  
Setting the Date and Time 27  
Changing the Time Zone 27  
Displaying the Date and Time while Recording 28  
Changing the Language 28  
Video onfration: Movie Format, Bit Rate,  
Retion and Frame Rate 55  
ing MaCamera Functions with the  
Joystic57  
sing the Direct Setting Mode 57  
Using the Menus 29  
Selecting an Option from the Menu 29  
Using the Customized Submenu y Menu) 3
Shter Speed 58  
Automatic Shutter 59  
Manual Shutter 60  
Flicker Reduction 61  
Preparing the Camcorder 32  
Attaching the Microphone Holder Ut 32  
Attaching the Lens Hood 32  
Using the Viewfinder 32  
Gain 62  
Selecting the Gain Level 62  
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 62  
Manual Gain 63  
Using the OLED Panel 33  
Adjusting the Viewfinder/OLED Screen 34  
Adjusting the Color Balance of the OLED  
Screen 34  
Setting the Screen to Black & White 35  
Adjusting the Grip Unit 35  
Attaching the Shoulder Strap 36  
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers 36  
Using a Tripod 37  
Aperture 65  
Automatic Aperture 65  
Manual Aperture 66  
ND Filter 67  
Exposure Compensation - AE Shift 67  
Light Metering Mode 68  
White Balance 69  
Auto White Balance (AWB) 70  
Preset White Balance/Color Temperature 71  
Custom White Balance 72  
Preparing Recording Media 38  
Inserting a CF Card 39  
Checking the Status of the CF Card Slots 39  
Removing a CF card 40  
Inserting and Removing an SD Card 40  
Initializing the Recording Media 41  
Switching Between the CF Card Slots 41  
Selecting the CF Card Recording Method 42  
Checking the Available Recording Time on a  
Recording Media 43  
Zooming 74  
Selecting the Zoom Mode 74  
Using the Zoom Ring 75  
Using the Zoom Rockers on the Camcorder 75  
Remote Operation 78  
Soft Zoom Control 79  
Using Optional Conversion Lenses 80  
Recovering Data on a Recording Media 43  
Adjusting the Focus 81  
Autofocus (AF) Mode 81  
Manual Focus (MF) 83  
Push AF 85  
Detecting and Focusing On Faces 85  
Focus Limit and Macro Shooting 86  
Special Recording Modes 118  
Interval Recording Mode 118  
Frame Recording Mode 119  
Slow & Fast Motion Mode 120  
Pre-recording Mode 121  
Simultaneous Recording of MXF and MP4  
Clips 123  
Recording in MP4 Backup Recording Mode 124  
Image Stabilizer 87  
9
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns 88  
Displaying Onscreen Markers 88  
Displaying Zebra Patterns 89  
Infrared Recording 126  
Activating Infrared Mode 126  
Using the Infrared Light 126  
Setting the Time Code 90  
Using the Focal Length Guide 128  
Selecting the Running Mode 90  
Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame 91  
Putting the Time Code Display on Hold 91  
4. Customization 129  
Assignable Buttons 129  
Setting the User Bit 93  
Changing the Assigned Function 129  
Using an Assignable Button 130  
Synchronizing with an External Device 94  
Connecting an External Device 94  
Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock  
Synchronization) 94  
Time Code Signal Input 95  
Reference Video Signal Output 96  
Time Code Signal Output 96  
Custom Picture Settings 132  
Selecting Custom Picture Files 132  
Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings 133  
Renaming Custom Picture Files 133  
ProtectinCustom Picture Files 133  
Tranrg Custom Picture Files 134  
beddiCustom Picture Settings in a  
Recorg 135  
Recording Audio 98  
Audio Settings and Recorded Audio Channels 98  
Selecting the Number of Recorded Audio  
Channels 100  
vailable Custom Picture Settings 135  
Cstomizing Functions and Onscreen  
Displays 141  
Customizing Functions 141  
Connecting an External Microphone or Exte
Audio Input Source to the Cacder
Using the Built-in Microphone or IC  
Terminal 101  
Customizing Onscreen Displays 142  
Saving and Loading Camera Settings 143  
Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card 143  
Loading Camera Settings from an SD Card 143  
Using the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 Termins 10
Adjusting the Audio Level 105  
Monitoring the Audio with Headphones 106  
Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal 107  
Recording Color Bars 107  
5. Playback 145  
Playback 145  
Recording an Audio Reference Signal 107  
MXF and MP4 Clip Index Screens 145  
Playing Back Clips 147  
Onscreen Displays 147  
Playback Controls 148  
Adjusting the Volume 149  
Video Scopes 108  
Displaying a Video Scope 108  
Configuring the Waveform Monitor 108  
Configuring the Vectorscope 109  
Configuring the Edge Monitor 109  
Adding Marks to MXF Clips while Recording 110  
Adding Shot Marks while Recording 110  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last Clip  
Recorded 110  
Using Metadata 111  
Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF  
Utility 111  
Setting a User Memo Using Browser  
Remote 112  
Recording GPS Information (Geotagging) 114  
Reviewing a Recording 116  
File Numbering 117  
Clip Operations 150  
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network 179  
Selecting a Network Connection 180  
Changing Network Settings 181  
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from  
a Network Device 182  
Setting Up Browser Remote 182  
Starting Browser Remote 183  
Using the Clip Menu 151  
Displaying Clip Information 151  
Adding $ Marks or % Marks 152  
Deleting $ Marks or % Marks 153  
Copying Clips 153  
Deleting Clips 154  
10  
Real-Time Proxy Transfer 188  
FTP File Transfer 189  
Preparations 189  
Deleting the User Memo and GPS  
Information 155  
Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a  
Clip 155  
Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks 155  
Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single  
Clip 156  
FTP Transfer in  
FTP Transfer in  
Mode 190  
Mode 191  
Playback via Browser 193  
8. Photos 195  
Adding Shot Marks 157  
Taking Photos 195  
Deleting Shot Marks 157  
Changing a Clip’s Thumbnail 158  
Taking Photos in  
Capturing Photos in  
Photo Playback 197  
Mode 195  
Mode 195  
6. External Connections 159  
Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen 197  
Viewing Photos 197  
Video Output Configuration 159  
Recording Video Signal Configuration and Video  
Output Configuration by Terminal 159  
Playback Video Configuration and Video Output  
Configuration by Terminal 160  
Deleting Phos 198  
dditioInformation 199  
Options 199  
aying the Status Screens 209  
Trubleshooting 218  
Connecting to an External Monitor 162  
Connection Diagram 162  
Using the 3G/HD-SDI Terminal 163  
Using the MON. Terminal 3  
Using the HDMI OUT Terminal 14  
Using the AV OUT Terminal 164  
SD Output 165  
Lit of Messages 223  
Handling Precautions 228  
Maintenance/Others 231  
Optional Accessories 232  
Specifications 235  
Superimposing Onscreen Displays to Appear on  
an External Monitor 165  
Index 241  
Audio Output 166  
Selecting the Audio Channel 166  
Synchronizing the Video with the Audio being  
Monitored 167  
Selecting the Output Level of the AV OUT  
Terminal 167  
Saving Clips to a Computer 168  
Saving MXF Clips 168  
Saving MP4 Clips 170  
Connecting the Camcorder to a Computer 171  
7. Network Functions 173  
About the Network Functions 173  
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network 174  
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) 174  
Searching for Access Points 175  
Manual Setup 177  
Camera Access Point 177  
Configuring the IP Address Settings 178  
Saving the Configuration 178  
Introduction  
1
11  
About this Manual  
Thank you for purchasing the Canon XF200 / XF205. Please read this manual carefully before you use the  
camcorder and retain it for future reference. Should the camcorder fail to operate correctly, refer to  
Troubleshooting (A 218).  
Conventions Used in this Manual  
•
•
IMPORTANT: Precautions related to the camcorder’s operation.  
NOTES: Additional topics that complement the basic operating procedures.  
• A: Reference page number.  
•
: Text that applies only to the model shown in the icon.  
• The following terms are used in this manual.  
“Screen” refers to the OLED screen and the viewfinder screen.  
“CF card” refers to a CompactFlash (CF) card.  
“SD card” refers to an SD, SDHC or SDXC memory c
“Recording media” refers to CF cards and SD s.  
When not specified, “access lamps” refers tboth f the CF card access lamps (CF2/CF3) and the  
SD card access lamp.  
“Press SET” refers to pressing dwn the joystA 29).  
• Photographs in the manual are sulated pictures taken with a still camera. Some screenshots have been  
altered to make them easier to rea
• Illustrations in the manual show the XF.  
     
About this Manual  
The arrow > is used to abbreviate menu  
selections. For a detailed explanation on how to  
use the menus, refer to Using the Menus  
(A 29). For a concise summary of all available  
menu options and settings, refer to the appendix  
Menu Options (A 199).  
Operating modes and Format  
A full icon (like  
) indicates that the function  
described can be used in the operating mode  
shown or for recordings made in the movie  
format shown in the icon; an empty icon (like  
) indicates that the function cannot be  
used. For details refer to Turning the Camcorder  
On and Off (A 26) or Selecting the Movie  
Format (A 55).  
12  
When a procedure requires selecting an option,  
the available options are listed within or after the  
procedure. Brackets [ ] are used to refer to menu  
options as they are displayed on screen.  
When a function requires the use of the menu,  
the quick reference shows the submenus and,  
when applicable, the default setting for the menu  
item. The example illustration indicates that you  
can find the function by selecting the  
[w Other Functions] menu and then the [Fan]  
menu item.  
Supplied Accessories  
Supplied Accessories  
The following accessories are supplied with the camcorder.  
13  
CA-930 Compact Power Adapter  
(incl. power cord)  
DC-930 DC Cable  
BP-955 Battery Pack  
(incl. terminal cover)  
Lens Hood with Lens Barrier  
ens Ca
Eye cup  
WL-D6000 Wireless Controller  
(incl. CR2025 Lithium Battery)  
Microphone Holder Unit  
SS-1200 Shoulder Strap  
Data Import Utility  
Software CD-ROM*  
* The Data Import Utility Software Guide (PDF file) is included in the CD-ROM. For details about the software, refer to this Software  
Guide.  
 
Names of Parts  
Names of Parts  
Operation panel  
(A 20)  
ቢ
1
8
14  
9
2 3 4  
10  
5
6
7
11  
12  
Operation panel  
(A 20)  
ባ
18 22 24 
15 16 17 19 1 225 27 28  
13 14  
1
2
3
4
Protective cover for audio controls (A 98)  
Strap mount (A 36)  
INFRARED switch (A 126)  
ZOOM SPEED (zoom speed of the handle's zoom  
rocker) switch (A 75)  
15 Focus ring (A 83)  
16 Zoom ring (A 75)  
17 Iris ring (A 66)  
18 PUSH AF (momentary autofocus) button (A 85)  
19 IRIS (ND) (aperture mode/ND filter) switch (A 65)  
20 FOCUS (focus mode) switch (A 81, 83)  
21 PEAKING button (A 84) /  
5
CF card slot covers for CF card slots A (left) and B  
(right)  
6
7
8
POWER SAVE button (A 54)  
Exhaust ventilation outlet (A 54)  
CF2 (CF card slot A) and CF3 (CF card slot B)  
access indicators (A 39)  
Assignable button 1 (A 129)  
22 ZEBRA button (A 89)/  
Assignable button 2 (A 129)  
23 FULL AUTO switch (A 49)  
9
CF card release buttons for CF card slots A (left)  
24 CF card slot cover switches for CF card slots A  
and B (right) (A 40)  
(left) and B (right) (A 39)  
10 CF card slots A (left) and B (right) (A 39)  
11 Q switch (A 26)  
25 SHUTTER switch (A 58)  
26 GAIN switch (A 62)  
12 Power indicator (A 26)  
13 Lens hood (A 32)  
27 WHITE BAL. (white balance) switch (A 69)  
28 Å (white balance adjustment) button (A 72)  
14 Lens barrier switch (A 47)  
 
Names of Parts  
33  
34  
35 36  
37  
15  
38  
29  
30  
31  
32  
40  
41 42  
29  
GENLOCK/SYNC OUT (syhrozation)  
terminal (A 94, 96)  
35 USB terminal (A 171)  
36 MIC (microphone) terminal (A 101)  
30  
31  
TIME CODE terminal (A 95, 96)  
MON. (monitor output) terminal (A 162,  
37 Attachment sockets for the microphone holder  
unit (A 32)  
163)  
38 INPUT 1 (right) and INPUT 2 (left) terminals (XLR)  
32  
3G/HD-SDI terminal (A 162, 163)  
(A 103)  
33 Strap mount (A 36)  
39 Air intake vent (A 54)  
34 REMOTE terminal (A 45)  
For connecting the optional RC-V100 Remote  
Controller or commercially available remote  
controllers.  
40 Grip belt (A 35)  
41 Adjustable grip unit (A 35)  
42 Lens hood lock screw (A 32)  
Names of Parts  
43  
16  
44  
45  
48  
49  
50  
51  
46  
52  
47  
43 Microphone lock screw (A 100)  
44 Microphone holder (A 100)  
45 Microphone cable clamp (A 10)  
46 Lens barrier (A 47)  
8 Blt-in stereo microphone (A 101)  
9 Front tally lamp (A 48)  
50 Remote sensor (A 44)  
51 Infrared light (A 126)  
47 Instant AF sensor (A 81)  
52 START/STOP button (A 48, 123)  
Names of Parts  
61  
62  
17  
53  
54  
63  
64  
65  
55  
56  
66  
67  
57  
58  
59  
60  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
53 MENU button (A 29)  
63 Dioptric adjustment lever (A 33)  
64 Viewfinder unit  
65 Battery compartment (A 24)  
66 START/STOP button (A 48, 123)  
67 UNLOCK (unlock the grip) switch (A 35)  
68 × (headphone) terminal (A 106)  
69 AV OUT terminal (A 162, 164)  
70 HDMI OUT terminal (A 162, 164)  
71 DC IN terminal (A 25)  
54 Joystick (A 29)/SET button (A 29)  
55 CANCEL button (A 29)  
56 POWERED IS button (A 87)/  
Assignable button 3 (A 129)  
57 OLED screen (A 33, 34)  
58 SD card slot cover (A 40)  
59 SD card access indicator (A 48, 123, 195)  
60 SD card slot (A 40)  
61 Viewfinder (A 32, 34)  
62 Eye cup (A 33)  
72 LAN access indicator (A 179)  
73 LAN terminal (Ethernet) (A 179)  
Names of Parts  
74  
75  
76 77  
78  
79  
80 81  
18  
82  
83 84 85  
74 Accessory shoe  
80 Strap mount (A 36)  
For attaching accessories such athe optial  
VL-10Li II Battery Video Light.  
75 Built-in speaker (A 149)  
76 START/STOP lock lever (A 48)  
77 START/STOP button (A 48, 123)  
78 Grip zoom rocker (A 75)  
81 BATTERY RELEASE lever (A 24)  
82 Front tally lamp (A 48)  
83 – dials for CH1 (left) and CH2 (right)  
(A 105)  
84 Rear tally lamp (A 48)  
85 Handle zoom rocker (A 77)  
86 Handle socket for 1/4" screws  
79 MAGN. (magnification) button (A 84)/  
Assignable button 4 (A 129)  
Names of Parts  
87  
19  
88  
9  
91  
87 Attachment sockets for the optioTA-1Tripod  
Adapter (A 37)  
89 Tripod base for tripods with 1/4" screws (A 37)  
90 Air intake vent (A 54)  
88 Tripod base screws (A 37)  
91 Tripod socket (A 37)  
Names of Parts  
Operation panels  
Operation panel ቢ  
Operation panel ባ  
1
2
4
5
20  
10  
11  
12  
6
7
8
13  
3
14  
15  
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Audio level switches for CH1 (left) and CH2 (right)  
(A 105)  
8
9
INDEX button (A 146)/  
u (review recording) button (A 116)  
HEADPHNE+ button (A 149)/  
Assiablbutton 11 (A 129)  
AUDIO IN (audio input) selection switches for CH1  
(left) and CH2 (right) (A 101, 103)  
INPUT 1 (left) / INPUT 2 (right) audio source  
selection switches (A 103)  
Ò (play/pause) button (A 147)/  
Assignable button 6 (A 129)  
Ø (fast reverse playback) button (A 14
Assignable button 5 (A 129)  
Ú (skip backward) button (A 148)/  
10 × (faayback) button (A 148)/  
gnable tton 7 (A 129)  
(skip foard) button (A 148)/  
signable button 10 (A 129)  
12 (stop) button (A 147)/  
Aignable button 9 (A 129)  
3 DISP. (display) button (A 51, 147)  
14 WFM (waveform monitor) button (A 108)/  
Assignable button 13 (A 129)  
Assignable button 8 (A 129)  
SLOT SELECT (CF card slot seleon) butn  
(A 41, 146)  
15 HEADPHONE- button (A 149)/  
Assignable button 12 (A 129)  
 
Names of Parts  
WL-D6000 Wireless Controller  
9
21  
1
2
3
10  
4
5
11  
12  
6
7
13  
14  
8
1
Record enable button: When you use the
STOP button or ZOOM buttons, you mus
this button simultaneously with e dsired
PHOTO button (A 195)  
SHOT1 (shot mark 1) button (A 157)  
CANCEL button (A 29)  
SET button (A 29)  
INDEX button (A 146)  
Ò (play/pause) button (A 148)  
8
9
Ñ (stop) button (A 148)  
TART/STOP button (A 48, 123)  
10 ZOOM buttons (A 78)  
11 Í/Î/Ï/Ð buttons  
12 MENU button (A 29)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
13 Ø/× (fast playback reverse/forward) buttons  
(A 148)  
14 Ô/Ó (frame reverse/frame forward) buttons  
(A 148)  
 
Names of Parts  
22  
Preparations  
2
23  
Preparing the Power Supply  
You can power the camcorder using a battery pack or directly using the compact power adapter. If you connect  
the compact power adapter to the camcorder while a battery pack is attached, the camcorder will draw power  
from the power outlet.  
Charge battery packs before use. For approximate charging times and recording/playback times with a fully  
charged battery pack, refer to Charging Times (A 233) and Recording and Playback Times (A 233).  
Using a Battery Pack  
You can power the camcorder using the supplied BP-955 or an optional BP-950G, BP-970G or BP-975 Battery  
Pack. The BP-955 and BP-975 are compatible with Intelligent System, meaning that you can check the  
remaining battery time.  
Charging the Battery Pack  
Charge battery packs using the supplied CA-930 Compr Adap.  
Before charging, remove the terminal cover of the battery
ብ
1 If the DC cable is connected to the compacdapdisconnect  
it.  
ባ
• If the DC cable is connected to he mpadapter, charging  
will not start.  
2 Connect the power cord to the cpact pwer adapter.  
ቢ
3 Plug the power cord into a power out.  
CHARGE indicator  
4 Attach the battery pack to the compact power adapter.  
ቤ
• Press lightly and slide the battery pack in the direction of the arrow until it  
clicks.  
• The CHARGE indicator starts flashing and also indicates the battery pack’s approximate charge. The  
indicator will stay on when charging has completed.  
0-34%: Flashes once per second  
35-69%: Flashes twice per second  
70-99%: Flashes 3 times per second  
5 When charging has completed, remove the battery pack from the compact power adapter.  
6 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect it from the compact power adapter.  
IMPORTANT  
• Do not connect to the compact power adapter any product that is not expressly recommended for use with this  
camcorder.  
NOTES  
• We recommend charging the battery pack in temperatures between 10 ºC and 30 ºC (50 ºF and 86 ºF).  
Outside the temperature range of 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF), charging will not start.  
• To charge the battery pack, disconnect the DC cable from the compact power adapter.  
         
Preparing the Power Supply  
• If there is a malfunction with the compact power adapter or battery pack, the charge indicator will go out and  
charging will stop.  
• For handling precautions regarding the battery pack, refer to Battery Pack (A 228).  
• Charged battery packs continue to discharge naturally. Therefore, charge them on the day of use, or the day  
before, to ensure a full charge.  
24  
• Repeatedly charging and discharging the battery pack will eventually shorten its battery life. You can check the  
battery life on the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 213). Fully charging the battery pack and then  
discharging it will give you a more accurate reading.  
• We recommend that you prepare battery packs to last 2 to 3 times longer than you think you might need.  
Attaching the Battery Pack  
ቢ
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Insert the battery pack all the way into the compartment and  
press gently down until it clicks.  
ባ
ቢ
Removing the Battery Pack  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Slide the BATTERY RELEASE lever ihe diction of the arrow.  
While holding it pressed down, slide the battery pack up and  
remove it from the battery compartment.  
ባ
   
Preparing the Power Supply  
Checking the Remaining Battery Charge  
With battery packs compatible with Intelligent System, you can check the estimated remaining usage time of the  
battery pack by looking at any recording/playback screen or the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 213).  
You can also check the approximate remaining battery charge on the battery pack itself.  
25  
Press the CHECK button on the battery pack. An indicator will light for  
approximately 3 seconds and show the approximate remaining battery  
charge.  
0-25%  
CHECK button  
26-50%  
51-75%  
76-100%  
0
100%  
Battery charge indicator  
NOTES  
• The first time you use a battery pack, charge it fully and then uthe amcorder until the battery pack is  
completely exhausted. Doing so will ensure that the remaining recg time will be displayed accurately.  
• USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer batpowers e product is recyclable.  
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how tthis batry.  
Using a Household Power utlet  
ቢ
You can also power the camcorder rectly from a power  
outlet using the supplied CA-930 Coact Pwer Adapter  
and DC-930 DC Cable. While the camcorder is powered  
from a household power outlet, you can safely replace the  
battery pack even when the camcorder is on.  
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.  
2 Connect the DC cable to the DC IN terminal on the  
camcorder.  
3 Connect the power cord to the compact power adapter  
and plug it into a power outlet.  
ቤ
4 Connect the DC cable to the compact power adapter.  
IMPORTANT  
• Turn off the camcorder before connecting or  
disconnecting the compact power adapter.  
ብ
ባ
DC IN  
terminal  
       
Preparing the Power Supply  
Turning the Camcorder On and Off  
The camcorder has two operating modes: CAMERA (  
) mode for making recordings and MEDIA (  
)
mode for playing back recordings. Select the operating mode using the Q switch.  
26  
To turn on the camcorder  
Hold down the button on the Q switch and slide the switch to  
CAMERA for  
mode or MEDIA for  
mode. The power indicator  
will illuminate in green.  
CAMERA mode  
MEDIA mode  
To turn off the camcorder  
Set the Q switch to OFF. The power indicator will turn off.  
NOTES  
• If you set the [w Other Functions] > [POWEsetti[Off], the power indicator will not illuminate.  
   
Date, Time and Language Settings  
Date, Time and Language Settings  
Setting the Date and Time  
You will need to set the date and time of the camcorder before you can start using it. When the camcorder’s  
clock is not set, the [Date/Time] screen will appear automatically with the month selected.  
27  
Operating modes:  
1 Push the joystick up/down to change the month then move (Ð) to the next field.  
• To move to the next field you can also press the joystick itself.  
2 Change the rest of the fields in the same way.  
3 Select (Ð) [Set] and then press the joystick to start the clk d close the screen.  
NOTES  
• You can change the date format and the clocat (1hours) with the [w Other Functions] >  
[Set Clock] > [Date Format] setting. You cnge he date and time later on (not during the initial  
setup) with the [w Other Functions] > [SeDateTime] setting. However, while the camcorder is  
being operated through the Brower Remote n, the [Set Clock] submenu is not available.  
• When the built-in rechargeable lium battery is eusted, the date and time setting may be lost. In such  
case, recharge the built-in lithium ttery (230) and set the time zone, date and time again.  
• Using the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiu can have the camcorder adjust settings automatically according  
to the UTC date/time information received from the GPS signal (A 114).  
Changing the Time Zone  
[w Other Functions]  
Change the time zone to match the time zone of your location. The default  
setting is [UTC-05:00 New York]. The time zones are based on  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).  
[Time Zone]  
[UTC-05:00 New York]  
Operating modes:  
1 Press the MENU button.  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select [w Other Functions].  
3 Select [Time Zone] in a similar fashion.  
4 Push the joystick up/down to change the time zone.  
5 Press the joystick to set the time zone and then press the MENU button to close the menu.  
NOTES  
• While the camcorder is being operated through the Browser Remote application, the [Time Zone] setting is not  
available.  
         
Date, Time and Language Settings  
Displaying the Date and Time while Recording  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
[Custom Display 2]  
[Date/Time]  
You can display the date and time on the screen.  
Operating modes:  
28  
1 Press the MENU button.  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select [£ OLED/VF Setup].  
[Off]  
3 Select [Custom Display 2] and then [Date/Time] in a similar  
fashion.  
4 Push the joystick up/down to select the information to display.  
• Select [Off] to record without displaying the date and time.  
5 Press the joystick and then press the MENU button to close the menu.  
• The selected date/time display will appear at the bottom of the screen.  
Changing the Language  
[w Other Functions]  
[Language !]  
[English]  
The default language of the camcorder is English. You can change to  
German, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Simpli
Chinese, Korean or Japanese. Please note that some se
screens will be displayed in English, regardless of the langting.  
Operating modes:  
1 Press the MENU button.  
2 Push the joystick up/down to sect [w ther Functions].  
3 Select [Language !] in a similar hi.  
4 Push the joystick up/down to select a language.  
5 Press the joystick to change the language and then press the MENU button to close the menu.  
       
Using the Menus  
Using the Menus  
In  
opens after pressing the MENU button. You can also register frequently used menu settings in a customized  
submenu (My Menu) for easy access. In mode, press the MENU button to open the menu for general  
mode, many of the camcorder’s functions can be adjusted from the menu for general settings, which  
29  
settings or press the joystick to open the clip menu for clip operations. For details about the available menu  
options and settings, refer to Menu Options (A 199).  
Operating modes:  
MENU button  
Joystick  
CANCEL button  
MENU button  
Press to open the menu and then press again to close thafter austing desired settings.  
Joystick  
Push the joystick to move the orange selectiothe enu. Then, press the joystick itself to select the  
menu item indicated by the orange selection f
CANCEL button  
Press to return to the previous menor to stosome operations that are in progress.  
NOTES  
• Although the button at the center of the joystick is not labeled as SET, in the manual, “press SET” will be used  
to mean pressing down the joystick itself.  
Selecting an Option from the Menu  
The following is a step-by-step explanation of how to select an option from the menu. In the procedures  
throughout the rest of this manual, opening and closing the menu is assumed and not included in the procedure.  
1 Press the MENU button.  
• The menu opens with the orange selection frame indicating the menu item that was selected the previous  
time the menu was closed (unless the camcorder was turned off).  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select the desired submenu.  
3 Push the joystick right or press SET.  
• The orange selection frame will appear on a menu item in the submenu.  
• Press the CANCEL button, push the joystick left, or select [L] to return to the previous submenu.  
4 Push the joystick up/down to select the desired menu item.  
• If a submenu contains many menu items, a scroll bar will appear on the right side of the submenu indicating  
that you must scroll up or down to see other menu items.  
• A Ð mark next to a menu item indicates another submenu. Repeat steps 3 and 4.  
     
Using the Menus  
5 Push the joystick right or press SET.  
• The orange selection frame will appear on a setting option.  
• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous submenu.  
6 Push the joystick up/down to select the desired setting option and then press SET.  
• Depending on the menu item, additional selections may be necessary.  
30  
7 Press the MENU button to close the menu.  
NOTES  
• Unavailable items may appear grayed out.  
• Pressing the MENU button at any time closes the menu.  
• On some screens, the following icons may be displayed as a guide:  
,
,
. They refer, respectively,  
to pressing the joystick (or SET button on a remote control), the MENU button or the CANCEL button.  
• When using the supplied wireless controller, use the á, â, à, ß and SET buttons in the same way as the  
camcorder’s joystick. Similarly, when using the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller, use the Up, Down, Left,  
Right and SET buttons. In either case, pressing the SET button is equivalent to pressing the joystick on the  
camcorder.  
• You can check some of the current settings on the status screens (A 209).  
Using the Customized Submenu (My Menu)  
You can register up to 14 frequently used menu sgs une My Menu submenu for easy access.  
Furthermore, if you set an assignable button to ] (A 129), you can press the button to access your  
registered menu settings even faster and more
Operating modes:  
Adding Menu Settings  
[¥ My Menu]  
1 Open the My Menu [Register] screen.  
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Register]  
• The menu will change to blue to indicate you are selecting menu  
[Edit]  
settings to add to the My Menu submenu.  
[Register]  
• Press the CANCEL button to cancel the operation and return to the  
regular menu.  
2 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to add and then press SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.  
• The menu setting you registered will now appear under the My Menu submenu.  
   
Using the Menus  
Rearranging Menu Settings  
[¥ My Menu]  
1 Open the My Menu [Move] screen.  
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Move]  
[Edit]  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select the setting you want to move and  
then press SET.  
31  
[Move]  
• An orange ] icon will appear next to the setting you selected to  
move.  
3 Push the joystick up/down to move the setting to the desired position and then press SET.  
Removing Menu Settings  
[¥ My Menu]  
1 Open the My Menu [Delete] screen.  
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Delete]  
[Edit]  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select the setting you want to remove and  
then press SET.  
[Delete]  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.  
Resetting the My Menu Submenu  
[¥ My Menu]  
[Edit]  
1 Reset all the menu settings registered to the My Menu submen
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Reset All]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.  
[Reset All]  
Preparing the Camcorder  
Preparing the Camcorder  
This section outlines the basic preparations for the camcorder, such as attaching the microphone holder and  
lens hood and adjusting the OLED screen, viewfinder and grip.  
32  
Attaching the Microphone Holder Unit  
Use the supplied screws to attach the microphone holder unit to the  
handle.  
Attaching the Lens Hood  
Attach the lens hood to protect the lens and reduce the amount of  
stray light that may hit the lens. Additionally, keeping the lens barrier  
closed can help avoid fingerprints and dirt on the lens.  
Always remove the lens hood and attach the lens cap when  
carrying the camcorder or storing it after use.  
ባ
1 Remove the lens cap.  
• The lens cap and lens hood cannot be usesamme.  
ቢ
2 Place the lens hood on the front of the leloc
screw side pointing down (ቢ) ad turn it 9
clockwise (ባ).  
• Be careful not to deform the lens ood.  
ቤ
• Make sure that the lens hood is aligd h the thread.  
3 Tighten the lock screw (ቤ).  
Using the Viewfinder  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Dioptric  
adjustment lever  
ቢ
1 Adjust the viewfinder’s angle as necessary.  
2 Turn on the camcorder and adjust the dioptric  
adjustment lever until the viewfinder’s image is sharp.  
ባ
                 
Preparing the Camcorder  
Attaching and Detaching the Eye Cup  
Attach the eye cup so that it covers the rubber  
portion of the viewfinder unit.  
• For left eye use, attach the eye cup so that the  
protruding portion faces the opposite side.  
33  
Eye cup  
Viewfinder  
unit  
Detach the eye cup as shown in the illustration.  
Using the OLED Panel  
Open the OLED panel 90 degrees.  
• You can rotate the panel 90 degrees downward or 180  
degrees toward the lens.  
NOTES  
• About the OLED and viewfinder screens: The screens are  
produced using extremely high-precision manufacturing  
techniques, with more than 99.99% of the pixels operating to  
specification. Less than 0.01% of the pixels may occasionally  
misfire. On the viewfinder screen only, pixels may also light up  
as white dots. This has no effect on the recorded image and  
does not constitute a malfunction.  
• When you use a commercially available lens adapter and the image on the screen is inverted, you can use the  
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Scan Reverse Rec] setting to return the image to the correct  
orientation.  
     
Preparing the Camcorder  
• If you are not interested in using the viewfinder while using the OLED screen, you can set [£ OLED/VF  
Setup] > [OLED/VF Simul.] to [Off] to conserve the camcorder’s power. Even when [OLED/VF Simul.] is set to  
[Off], closing the OLED panel will automatically activate the viewfinder.  
• While recording with the OLED panel facing toward the subject, you can set [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [OLED  
Mirror Image] to [On] to flip the image horizontally so subjects can see a mirror image of themselves.  
34  
Adjusting the Viewfinder/OLED Screen  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
You can adjust the brightness, contrast, color and sharpness of the  
viewfinder and OLED screen independently of each other. Additionally,  
[OLED Setup]  
[Viewfinder Setup]  
you can turn on the increased luminence of the OLED panel or adjust the  
backlight of the viewfinder. These adjustments will not affect your  
recordings.  
[Brightness: 0]  
[Contrast: 0]  
Operating modes:  
[Color: 0]  
[Sharpness: 2]  
[Luminence: Off]*  
[Backlight: Normal]**  
1 Open the setup menu for the viewfinder or OLED screen.  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [OLED Setup] or [Viewfinder Setup]  
2 Select [Brightness], [Contrast], [Color], [Sharpness], [Luminenceor  
[Backlight] and then press SET.  
* [OLED Setup] only  
**[Viewfinder Setup] only  
3 Adjust the setting and then press SET.  
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other settings as nece
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to LED Setuinder Setup] (A 129), you can press the button to  
open the respective submenu.  
• You can also press the DISP. buttoand hoit pressed for about 3 seconds to turn the OLED [Luminence]  
setting on and off.  
• The OLED screen will be dimmed if the camcorder is left unused for approx. 3 minutes (except while recording  
or during playback). Performing any operation on the camcorder will return the brightness to its previous level.  
Adjusting the Color Balance of the OLED Screen  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
As times passes, the color balance of the OLED screen may change  
gradually. You can adjust the color balance of the OLED screen to  
compensate for this change.  
[OLED Setup]  
1 Open the [Color Balance] submenu.  
[Color Balance]  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [OLED Setup] > [Color Balance]  
2 Select [R-B Simult. Adjust.] and then press SET.  
[R-B Simult. Adjust: 0]  
[R Fine Tuning: 0]  
[B Fine Tuning: 0]  
3 Change the setting to adjust the red and blue levels simultaneously and  
then press SET.  
4 If necessary, select [R Fine Tuning] or [B Fine Tuning] to further adjust  
only the red or blue level.  
5 Adjust the setting as necessary and then press SET.  
         
Preparing the Camcorder  
Setting the Screen to Black & White  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
[OLED/VF B&W]  
[Off]  
The viewfinder and OLED screen display in color by default but you can  
set them to black & white. Even when the screen is black & white,  
onscreen text and icons will still be displayed in color.  
35  
1 Open the [OLED/VF B&W] submenu.  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [OLED/VF B&W]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [OLED/VF B&W] (A 129), you can press the button to turn the black &  
white display on and off.  
Adjusting the Grip Unit  
The grip unit can be rotated 120º (at 15º intervals) to give  
you a convenient grip angle for high- and low-angle  
shooting.  
ባ
ቢ
1 Push the grip’s UNLOCK lever forward (toward the  
START/STOP button on the grip). While holding it  
pressed down, rotate the grip unit to the desired angle.  
2 At about the desired angle, release the UNLr  
and rotate the grip unit further until it clicks
Adjusting the Grip Belt  
Adjust the grip belt so that you can reach the grip zoom rocker  
with your index and middle fingers, and the START/STOP button  
with your thumb.  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful not to drop the camcorder when adjusting the grip belt.  
             
Preparing the Camcorder  
Attaching the Shoulder Strap  
Pass the ends through the strap mounts and adjust  
the length of the strap.  
36  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful not to drop the camcorder when attaching  
or adjusting the shoulder strap.  
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers  
You can remove the plastic terminal covers of all the camcorder's terminals to access them more readily.  
Removing the Terminal Covers  
1 Open the terminal cover and pull it out.  
2 Grasp the strip connecting the terminal cover to the camr  
and pull.  
• This step is not necessary for the covers for tREMO
terminal and USB terminal, which you only ll stght  
out.  
Attaching the Terminal Cover
Insert the connecting strip into the oping to tach the terminal cover.  
NOTES  
• If the connecting strip is difficult to grasp, use a pair of tweezers or similar tool.  
         
Preparing the Camcorder  
5.5 mm  
Using a Tripod  
You can mount the camcorder on any tripod with a 1/4" mounting screw, no longer than  
5.5 mm (0.2 in.). Using tripods with longer mounting screws may cause damage to the  
camcorder.  
37  
Using a Tripod with 3/8" Mounting Screws  
To use a tripod with 3/8" mounting screws, first attach the optional TB-1 Tripod Adapter Base to the camcorder  
and then attach the tripod to the adapter base.  
1 Remove the tripod base from the camcorder.  
• Remove the 4 screws and then remove the base.  
2 Attach the optional TB-1 Tripod Adapter Base.  
• Firmly screw in the 4 screws.  
3 Attach the tripod.  
• Firmly screw in the tripod screw.  
• If a tripod has both a 1/4" screw and a 3/8" mounting screw, firmly screw in both.  
   
Preparing Recording Media  
Preparing Recording Media  
The camcorder records movies in MXF format (MXF clips) to 1 CompactFlash (CF) cards and movies in MP4  
format (MP4 clips) and photos* to . SD, / SDHC and 0 SDXC memory cards. The camcorder is  
equipped with two CF card slots.  
38  
The recording media that will be used for recording (CF card, SD card, CF card and SD card, two CF cards)  
depends on the movie format (A 55) and CF card recording method (A 42) selected. Be sure to insert  
recording media to all the card slots necessary. Initialize recording media (A 41) when you use them with this  
camcorder for the first time.  
* The camcorder can record custom picture files and a camera settings file onto the SD card as well. The SD card serves also to  
store user memo files created with Canon XF Utility that you can then read and embed in the metadata of MXF clips (A 111).  
Compatible Recording Media  
For the latest information about recording media tested for use with this camcorder, visit your local Canon Web  
site.  
1
CF cards: UDMA-compatible Type I CF cards. Capacity: 512 MB or larger.  
1
The Ultra Direct Memory Access (UDMA) specification allows data to be transferred between the CF card and device at high  
transfer speeds (measured in MB/s). Depending on the CF card, you may not be able to record even when using a UDMA-  
compatible CF card.  
2
3
SD cards: SD / SDHC / SDXC cards. SD Speed Class : CLASS 4, 6 o0 .  
As of May 2014, the MP4 recording function has been tested usinemry cards made by Panasonic, Toshiba  
and SanDisk.  
2
3
SD Speed Class is a standard that indicates the minimum guarantnsfer of cards.  
To record MP4 clips with a bit rate of 35 Mbps, we recommend usins rated CSS 6 or 10.  
IMPORTANT  
• After repeatedly recording, deleting editinagmented memory), it will take longer to write data  
on recording media and recording may stop. Secordings and initialize the recording media with the  
camcorder.  
• About high capacity recording mia Yoan use CF cards with a capacity of 128 GB or larger and SDXC  
cards with this camcorder but such recng media are initialized using the exFAT file system.  
- When using exFAT-formatted recording media with other devices (digital recorders, card readers, etc.), make  
sure that the external device is compatible with exFAT. For more information on compatibility, contact the  
computer, operating system or memory card manufacturer.  
- If you use exFAT-formatted recording media with a computer OS that is not exFAT-compatible, you may be  
prompted to format the memory card. In such case, cancel the operation to prevent data loss.  
NOTES  
• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed for all recording media.  
     
Preparing Recording Media  
Inserting a CF Card  
ቢ
You can insert a CF card into CF card slot A or slot B. If you  
have two CF cards, you can use both slots.  
39  
1 Slide down the CF card slot cover switch and open  
the CF card slot cover.  
2 Insert the CF card straight, with the label facing away  
from the lens, all the way into the slot.  
3 Close the CF card slot cover.  
• Do not force the cover closed if the CF card is not  
correctly inserted.  
ባ
ቤ
Checking the Status of the CF Card
You can check the status of the CF rd slots immediately by  
looking at the CF2/CF3 access inator. fer to the  
following table.  
Access indicator color  
Red  
CF card slot status  
Accessing the CF card.  
Recording/playback is possible and the CF card  
slot is selected for recording/playback.  
Green  
A CF card is not inserted, the CF card slot is not  
currently selected, or the CF card is not being  
accessed.  
Indicator off  
If you set the [w Other Functions] > [Media Access LED] setting to [Off], the access indicators will not  
illuminate.  
       
Preparing Recording Media  
Removing a CF card  
1 Wait until the access indicator of the CF card slot with  
the CF card to be removed is off.  
ቤ
40  
2 Slide down the CF card slot cover switch and open the  
CF card slot cover.  
ብ
3 Push in the CF card release button to release the CF  
card.  
4 Pull the CF card all the way out and close the CF card  
slot cover.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed.  
Inserting and Removing an SD Card  
1 Make sure the SD card access indicator is off.  
2 Open the SD card slot cover.  
3 Insert the SD card, with the label facing uway to  
the SD card slot until it clicks.  
• To remove the SD card, push tSD card oase it.  
When the SD card springs out, ull it all the way .  
4 Close the SD card slot cover.  
• Do not force the cover closed if the SD card is not correctly  
ባ
inserted.  
ብ
SD card access indicator  
On or flashing  
SD card status  
Accessing the SD card.  
SD card access  
indicator  
An SD card is not inserted or the  
SD card is not being accessed.  
ቤ
Off  
If you set the [w Other Functions] > [Media Access LED] setting to [Off], the access indicator will not illuminate.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is on or flashing. Failure to do so may  
result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not remove the SD card.  
• SD cards have front and back sides that are not interchangeable. Inserting an SD card facing the wrong  
direction can cause a malfunction of the camcorder. Be sure to insert the SD card as described in the  
procedure above.  
         
Preparing Recording Media  
Initializing the Recording Media  
The first time you use any recording media with this camcorder, initialize it first. You can also initialize a recording  
media to permanently delete all the data it contains.  
When initializing an SD card, you can select quick initialization, which clears the file allocation table but does not  
physically erase the stored data, or complete initialization, which deletes all data completely.  
41  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Initialize Media] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Initialize Media]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 Select [CF A], [CF B] or [SD Card] and then press SET.  
[Initialize Media]  
To initialize a CF card  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
• The CF card is initialized and all the data it contains is erased.  
To initialize an SD card  
3 Select [Complete] (complete initialization) or [Quick] (quick initization) and then press SET.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• If you are using the [Complete] initialization option, pT twice cancel the operation while it is in  
progress. You can use the SD card but all data will b.  
5 When the confirmation message appearSE
• The SD card is initialized and all the data s eraed.  
IMPORTANT  
• Initializing a recording media will pmanenerase all data, including MXF clips with an $ mark and custom  
picture files. Lost data cannot be revereMake sure you save important recordings in advance.  
• Depending on the SD card, the complete initialization may take up to a few minutes.  
NOTES  
• While recording on a CF card, you can initialize another CF card in the other CF card slot.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Initialize Media] (A 129), you can press the button to open the initialization  
submenu.  
Switching Between the CF Card Slots  
The camcorder features two CF card slots, CF2 (CF card slot A)  
and CF3 (CF card slot B). If both slots contain a CF card, you can  
switch between them as necessary.  
Operating modes:  
Press the SLOT SELECT button.  
• The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in  
green. On the screen, the CF card selected is indicated with a Ð  
mark next to CF card icon.  
           
Preparing Recording Media  
NOTES  
• If both CF card slots contain a CF card and you open the cover of the selected  
slot, the camcorder will automatically switch to the other slot.  
42  
• You cannot use the SLOT SELECT button to switch between CF card slots  
while recording MXF clips.  
• While using the Browser Remote application, you can also switch between CF  
card slots remotely by pressing [SLOT SELECT] on the Browser Remote  
screen.  
Selecting the CF Card Recording Method  
The camcorder features two useful CF card recording methods, relay recording and double slot recording.  
Relay recording: This function allows you to continue recording MXF clips on another CF card without  
interruption if the CF card you are using becomes full. Relay recording is available from CF card slot A to CF card  
slot B, and vice versa.  
Double slot recording: This function records the same MXF clip simultanously to both CF cards, which is a  
convenient way to make a backup copy of your recordings while you rerd.  
Operating modes:  
To use relay recording  
[w Other Functions]  
By default, this function is activated. If it has beateollow the  
procedure below to activate it.  
[MXF]  
1 Open the [Relay Recording] submnu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > elay Recordin
[Relay Recording]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
[On]  
To use double slot recording  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Double Slot Recording] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Double Slot Recording]  
[MXF]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
[Double Slot Recording]  
NOTES  
• You can combine double slot recording and the MXF+MP4 movie  
[Off]  
format (A 123) to record the same video on three recording media and  
in two different movie formats.  
• When the bit rate is set to 50 Mbps (A 55), relay recording is not available during slow motion recording.  
• If a CF card becomes full during double slot recording, recording on both CF cards will stop. On the other  
hand, if an error occurs with one of the CF cards, recording will continue on the other CF card.  
• Double slot recording cannot be used with relay recording or slow & fast motion recording.  
         
Preparing Recording Media  
Checking the Available Recording Time on a Recording Media  
In  
mode, the upper left of the screen will show the icon of the recording media that is in use and next to it  
the approximate remaining recording time in minutes*. When the movie format (A 55) is set to MXF or  
MXF+MP4, the CF card currently selected will be indicated by a Ð mark next to the CF card icon.  
On the [Media] status screen (A 211), you can check the total space and used space of each recording media,  
as well as the available recording time* and the available number of photos (SD card only).  
* The approximate available recording time is based on the current bit rate (A 55).  
43  
Recovering Data on a Recording Media  
Some actions, such as suddenly turning off the camcorder or removing the recording media while data is being  
recorded, can cause data errors on the recording media. In such case, you may be able to recover the data if a  
message indicating you that data (CF card) or a clip (SD card) needs recovering. The message appears when  
you insert a corrupted CF card into the camcorder or when you try to play back a corrupted MP4 clip from the  
[MP4] index screen.  
Operating modes:  
1 When the camcorder prompts you to recover the data, select K] and then press SET.  
2 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
NOTES  
• This procedure will delete clips shorter than ds ingth. Additionally, up to 10 seconds will be  
deleted from the end of the clips.  
• In some cases, it may not be posble to recoa. This is more likely when the file system is corrupted  
or the recording media is physicy damaged.  
• While recording on a CF card, you an recor data from another CF card by inserting it into the other CF card  
slot.  
     
Remote Operation of the Camcorder  
Remote Operation of the Camcorder  
The camcorder can be operated remotely in a number of different ways with varying degrees of control. First, you  
can use the supplied wireless controller as described below. You can also connect an optional RC-V100 Remote  
Controller for maximum control of your recordings at a professional level.  
Finally, using the camcorder's network functions, you can connect any device with a Web browser either  
wirelessly (via Wi-Fi) or through a LAN cable and use the Browser Remote application to control the camcorder  
(A 182).  
44  
Operating modes:  
Using the Supplied Wireless Controller  
Inserting the Battery  
Insert the supplied CR2025 lithium button battery into the wireless  
controller before use.  
ቤ
1 Press the tab in the direction of the arrow (ቢ) and pull out the battery  
holder (ባ).  
ባ
ብ
2 Place the lithium button battery with the + side facing up (
ቢ
3 Insert the battery holder (ብ).  
Activating the Wireless Controller  
[w Other Functions]  
By default, the wireless controller is avd. If deactivated,  
follow the procedure below to active it.  
[Wireless Controller]  
1 Open the [Wireless Controller] subenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Wireless Corolle
[On]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Wireless Controller] (A 129), you can press the button to activate/  
deactivate the use of the supplied wireless controller.  
Using the Wireless Controller to Operate  
the Camcorder  
When using the wireless controller, point it at the  
camcorder’s remote sensor. When the wireless  
controller’s buttons are operated, the camcorder’s  
tally lamps will illuminate.  
NOTES  
• When you use the START/STOP button or ZOOM  
buttons on the supplied wireless controller, you  
must press the record enable button  
simultaneously with the desired button.  
• When the camcorder cannot be operated with the supplied wireless controller, or when it can only be operated  
at very close range, replace the battery.  
• The supplied wireless controller may not work properly when the remote sensor is located under strong light  
sources or direct sunlight.  
         
Remote Operation of the Camcorder  
Using the Optional RC-V100 Remote Controller  
You can attach the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller to control the camcorder (including advanced recording  
functions) from a distance. In addition to turning the camcorder on and off and navigating the menus, while  
recording you can control various camera functions, such as aperture, shutter and zoom, and custom picture  
settings, like knee and sharpness.  
45  
The connection cable supplied with the RC-V100 is required to connect the RC-V100 to the camcorder's  
REMOTE terminal.  
Connection cable  
(supplied with the RC-V100)  
1 Turn off the camcorder and connect the optional RC-V100 Remote  
Controller to the camcorder.  
[w Other Functions]  
[REMOTE Term.]  
[Standard]  
• For details, refer to the instruction manual of the RC-
2 Turn on the camcorder in  
submenu.  
mode and open the [Term.]  
[w Other Functions] > [REMOTE Term.]  
3 Select [RC-V100] and then press ET.  
Options  
[RC-V100]: Select this option to use e optiol RC-V100 Remote Controller.  
[Standard]: Select this option to use commercially available remote controls.  
NOTES  
• The camcorder’s ND filter cannot be changed using the ND button on the remote controller.  
• When the camcorder is set to full auto mode (A 49), settings related to the aperture, gain, shutter speed and  
white balance (except for [R Gain] and [B Gain] in the custom picture's [White Balance] settings) cannot be  
changed using the remote controller.  
• Custom picture settings can be changed using the remote controller only when an appropriate custom picture  
file is selected (A 132).  
       
Remote Operation of the Camcorder  
46  
Recording  
3
47  
Recording Video  
This section explains the recording basics. Before you begin recording, make a test recording first to check if the  
camcorder operates correctly. Record an MXF clip for approximately 6 minutes at 50 Mbps and an MP4 clip for  
approximately 20 minutes at 35 Mbps (A 55). Should the camcorder fail to operate correctly, refer to  
Troubleshooting (A 218).  
For details on recording audio, refer to Recording Audio (A 98).  
Operating modes:  
Preparing to Record  
1 Remove the lens cap and attach the lens hood  
(A 32).  
ቦ
2 Attach a charged battery pack to the camcorder  
(A 24).  
ባ
3 Insert recording media (one or two CF carSD  
card) as necessary (A 39, 40).  
• Insert a CF card to record MXF clips; insed  
to record MP4 clips.  
ቤ
ቤ
• Insert CF cards into both CF cd slots to use
recording (A 42) or double sloecordin(A 42).  
ብ
4 Slide down the lens barrier switch tPEN to open  
the lens barrier.  
5 Adjust the viewfinder.  
NOTES  
• The camcorder can add a user memo (A 111) to an MXF clip as you record. It can be used to store  
information such as the clip name, camera operator and filming location. However, you must set the user  
memo before recording.  
           
Recording Video  
Recording  
1 Hold down the button on the Q switch and slide the switch to CAMERA.  
• The camcorder turns on in  
mode and enters record pause mode.  
• The access indicators of card slots with recording media will illuminate momentarily in red. Then, the CF  
card access indicator of the CF card slot selected for recording MXF clips will change to green.  
48  
Tally lamps  
,
ባ ቤ  
ቢ
,
ባ ቤ  
SD card access indicator  
card acceindicators  
2 Press the START/STOP button to begin
• Recording starts. The front and rear tally late ad, depending on the movie format selected,  
[ÜREC], [ÜMP4] or both displs will appep of the screen.  
• You can use the START/STOP btton on the gripn the handle or at the front of the camcorder (next to the  
lens).  
• When you use the supplied wireless oller, press the START/STOP button and the record enable button  
simultaneously.  
• For details about recording when the movie format is set to MXF+MP4, refer to Simultaneous Recording of  
MXF and MP4 Clips (A 123).  
3 Press the START/STOP button to pause the recording.  
• The clip* is recorded on the recording media and the camcorder enters record pause mode. The tally lamps  
will also go out.  
* “Clip” refers to a single movie unit recorded with a single recording operation.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while any access indicators are illuminated or flashing in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not open the CF card slot cover or the SD card slot cover of the recording media being accessed and do  
not remove the recording media.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
• Be sure to save your recordings regularly (A 168), especially after making important recordings. Canon shall  
not be liable for any loss or corruption of data.  
NOTES  
• The START/STOP button on the handle has a lock lever to prevent accidental operation. Set the lock lever to  
C if you do not want a recording inadvertently paused or if you do not plan to use that START/STOP button.  
Return the lever to its previous position to enable use of the START/STOP button again.  
     
Recording Video  
• You can use [w Other Functions] > [Review Recording] (A 116) to review part or all of the last clip recorded.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 129), you can press the button to add  
an $ mark or % mark to the last MXF clip recorded.  
• You can use [w Other Functions] > [Delete Last Clip] to delete the last clip recorded. However, you cannot  
delete the last clip if double slot recording is activated or if the movie format is set to MXF+MP4.  
49  
• When you set [¢ Video Setup] > [Rec Command] to [On] and you connect the camcorder to another  
device using the 3G/HD-SDI terminal (  
only) or HDMI OUT terminal, if you start or stop recording with  
the camcorder, the other device will also start or stop recording.  
Recording in Full Auto Mode  
Move the FULL AUTO switch to ON to change the camcorder to  
full auto mode. In full auto mode, the camcorder automatically  
sets the aperture, gain, shutter speed, and white balance. The  
camcorder will continuously adjust the brightness and white  
balance automatically*. In full auto mode, however, the focus  
mode will not be set to autofocus.  
* The light metering mode (A 68) will be set to [Standard], AE shift (A 67)  
will be set to [ 0] and the AGC limit (A 63) will be set to [Off/27 dB].  
About MXF Clips  
When the camcorder records an MXF clip, it also assigaracter ip name consisting of a 2-character  
prefix (letters or numerals) and 4 numerals (for example, 1”). The t 4 numbers serve as a running  
counter that increases every time a clip is recou cset the initial clip name in advance using the  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Clips] > ] an[Number Setting] settings. You cannot change  
the clip name after the clip is recor
• MXF clips will be split in the folwing cases.  
- When relay recording (A 42activated and the selected CF card becomes full, the recording will  
continue as a separate relay clion the ther CF card.  
- The video (stream) file in a clip will be split approximately every 2 GB for clips with a long recording time  
(approximately every 1 GB during slow motion recording). Even in such case, playback will be  
continuous.  
• If you record using the custom picture and metadata settings, those settings will be recorded with the MXF  
clip. For more details, refer to Custom Picture Settings (A 132) and Using Metadata (A 111).  
About MP4 Clips  
• MP4 clips are assigned consecutive file numbers that consist of 7 digits, like “100-0001”. The first 3 digits  
indicate the folder where the file is saved and the last 4 digits are a unique identifier for each file. You can  
select how the files are numbered (A 117).  
• For scenes with a long recording time, the video (stream) file in a clip will be split in the following cases.  
Even in such case, playback will be continuous. Using Data Import Utility (A 170), you can join such split  
files and save them on a computer as a single clip.  
- When the file size reaches approximately 4 GB.  
- After recording a single clip continuously for approximately 29 minutes 50 seconds (frame rate set to  
59.94P) or for approximately 59 minutes 50 seconds (other frame rates).  
• A single MP4 recording operation can go on continuously for about 12 hours. Then the camcorder will stop  
automatically.  
           
Recording Video  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can start and stop recording from a connected  
device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press [LIVE VIEW ON/OFF] to show the camcorder’s live view image on the Browser Remote screen.  
2 Press [START/STOP] to begin recording.  
50  
• Depending on the movie format selected, the recording operation indicator changes to [ÜREC] (MXF clips),  
[ÜMP4] (MP4 clips) or both and the center of the START/STOP button lights up in red.  
• The time code displayed on the Browser Remote screen is the same as on the camcorder.  
• Press [START/STOP] again to pause the recording.  
Recording operation  
Time code  
NOTES  
• The Browser Remote application s a key locthat is limited only to the controls on the application’s  
screens (you will still be able to usthe controls on he camcorder). Press [D] to lock the application’s  
controls; press [C] to reactivate the.  
   
Recording Video  
Onscreen Displays  
Refer to this section for an explanation of the various screen displays that appear in  
mode. You can use  
the custom display function (A 142) to turn off individual onscreen displays if they are not required. The menu  
item that controls each display is given in the following table (1: indicates a menu item under [Custom Display 1]  
and 2: indicates a menu item under [Custom Display 2]).  
51  
13 14 15 16 17 18 19  
1
2
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
32  
34 36 38 40  
42 43  
31  
33  
35 37 39  
When displaying the date and time (A 28):  
44  
Number  
1
Icon/Display  
è ꢀ é ꢀ ê ꢀ Remaining battery charge  
Description  
Custom Display  
A
2:  
–
ë ꢀ ì (in red)  
000 min  
The icon shows an estimate of the remaining charge. When using a  
battery pack compatible with Intelligent System, the remaining  
recording time is displayed, in minutes, next to the icon.  
[Remaining Battery]  
• When ì is displayed, replace the battery pack with a fully  
charged one.  
• Depending on the conditions of use, the actual battery charge may  
not be indicated accurately.  
2
Recording media status and available recording time estimate  
2:  
–
[Remaining Rec Time]  
200 min, 300 min  
MXF recording: in green - can record; in white - reading the CF card.  
The CF card selected for recording is indicated with a Ð mark.  
4, 5 (in red)  
No CF card or cannot record on the CF card.  
00 min  
MP4 recording: in green - can record; in yellow - the SD card is almost  
full.  
(in red)  
No SD card or cannot record on the SD card.  
400 min  
Remaining recording time for double slot recording (A 42): in green -  
can record; in red - cannot record.  
• Displayed only when the movie format is set to MXF.  
3
Zoom indicator  
1: [Zoom Position]  
74,  
141  
00/00  
         
Recording Video  
Number  
Icon/Display  
000  
Infrared <,=  
b (in yellow/red), ` Temperature warning/Fan operation.  
• When the camcorder’s internal temperature is high, b will appear in  
Description  
Custom Display  
–
A
128  
126  
54  
4
5
6
Focal length guide  
Infrared mode and status of the infrared light  
1: [Infrared]  
2: [Temperature/Fan]  
52  
yellow. If the temperature rises further due to continued use, it will  
change to red and the fan may be activated atutomatically.  
7
A 0.0ft  
Focus mode  
1: [Focus Mode],  
81  
@ ? =  
1: [Object Distance]  
• While focusing in manual focus mode, the estimated distance to the  
subject will be displayed as well.  
,
Face AF  
85  
67  
8
ND 1/2, 1/4, 1/8  
°, ®  
/0, .0  
@
ND filter  
1: [ND Filter]  
9
Light metering mode  
Custom picture  
Full auto mode  
White balance  
1: [Light Metering]  
1: [Custom Picture]  
1: [Full Auto]  
68  
10  
11  
12  
132  
49  
0000 K  
1: [White Balance]  
69  
ÅA/ÅB 0000 K  
È0000 K, ¼, É  
13  
Network functions  
2:  
174,  
177,  
179  
[Network Functions]  
,
,
Network type (Wi-Fi, Camera Access Point, Ethetd connection  
status: in white - function ready to in yellow onnecting to or  
disconnecting from a network.  
0
FTP file transfer and f files : icon in white - login to the  
FTP server completloggin to the FTP server; in red -  
FTP transfer not po
189  
182  
BrowRemote: in wtions for connection completed; in  
yelloconnecting to or ecting from the control device; in red -  
BrowsRemote cot be used.  
14  
15  
1
Wireless colleisabled  
2:  
44  
–
[Wireless Controller]  
Recording operation  
STBY, ÜREC  
2: [Recording Mode]  
MXF recording: record pause, recording.  
MP4 recording: record pause, recording.  
MP4, ÜMP4  
INT STBY, ÜINT STBY,  
ÜINT REC  
Interval recording: record pause (before the sequence has started),  
recording standby (once the sequence has started), recording.  
118  
119  
• In record pause mode before the interval recording sequence has  
started, [INT] flashes.  
FRM STBY, ÜFRM STBY, Frame recording: record pause (before the sequence has started),  
ÜFRM REC  
recording standby (once the sequence has started), recording.  
• In record pause mode before the frame recording sequence has  
started, [FRM] flashes.  
S&F STBY, ÜS&F REC  
Slow & fast motion recording: record pause, recording.  
Pre-recording: record pause, recording.  
120  
121  
PRE REC STBY,  
ÜPRE REC  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
, ¸  
4
Movie format  
2: [Movie Format]  
2: [Recording Mode]  
2: [Genlock]  
55  
42  
Double slot recording  
U
Genlock (  
only)  
94  
S
Onscreen displays superimposed on the recording  
2: [OSD Recording]  
2: [Time Code]  
141  
90  
00:00:00.00, 00:00:00:00 Time code  
0000 Approximate number of photos that can be recorded on the SD card  
2: [Remaining Photos] 195  
 
Recording Video  
Number  
22  
Icon/Display  
1s - 10m00s  
Description  
Custom Display  
A
118  
55  
Interval recording counter  
2: [Interval Counter]  
23  
00 Mbps  
0000x0000  
Bit rate (Mbps) and resolution  
2: [Bit Rate/  
Resolution]  
53  
24  
00.00P, 00.00i  
Frame rate  
2: [Frame Rate]  
56  
• During slow & fast motion recording, the shooting frame rate is also  
displayed (00/00.00P).  
25  
26  
REC`, STBY`  
Output recording command  
2: [Rec Command]  
2: [GPS]  
49  
GPS signal: continuously on - satellite signal acquired; flashing -  
satellite signal not acquired.  
114  
• Displayed only when an optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected  
to the camcorder.  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Q
User memo  
2: [User Memo]  
2: [User Bit]  
111  
93  
00 00 00 00  
User bit  
4-channel audio recording  
Audio output channels  
Aperture value  
Conversion lens  
Gain  
2: [4-Channel Input]  
100  
CH0/CH0  
2: [Monitor Channels] 166  
/
F0.0  
1: [Iris]  
65  
80  
62  
67  
À, Á  
1: [Conversion Lens]  
1: [Gain]  
L/M/H  
/
00.0dB  
Exposure bar  
1: [Exposure]  
• Only displayed when the gautter are set to manual  
adjustment.  
35  
/
/
/
1/0000,  
000.00Hz,  
000.00°  
Shutter speed  
1: [Shutter]  
58  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
AE 0.00  
J, K  
b, c, d  
^
AE ft  
1: [Exposure]  
67  
84  
74  
84  
87  
Peak
1: [Peaking]  
Digital t-conver  
Magnification  
1: [Tele-converter]  
1: [Magnification]  
1: [OIS Functions]  
OIS functions  
Å, Ä  
È
Image stabilizer  
Powered IS  
41  
42  
43  
T
Output onscreen displays  
Audio peak limiter  
Audio level meter  
2: [Output Display]  
2: [Audio Level]  
165  
106  
105  
æ
44  
Date/time  
–
28  
NOTES  
• You can press the DISP. button to switch the onscreen displays in the following sequence.  
Show all onscreen displays ꢀ show only onscreen markers* ꢀ hide all onscreen displays.  
* Only when [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Markers] > [Enable] is set to [On].  
 
Recording Video  
Power Save Mode  
Activate the power save mode to turn off the screen and reduce  
battery consumption. At the press of a button, the camcorder will  
immediately return to record pause mode.  
54  
1 Hold the POWER SAVE button pressed down for at least  
1 second.  
• The screen will turn off and the power indicator will illuminate  
in orange.  
• During power save mode, the tally lamps will flash twice  
approximately every 3 seconds. The camcorder retains  
previous time code and camcorder settings.  
2 Press the POWER SAVE button to return the camcorder to record pause mode.  
Using the Fan  
During  
mode, the camcorder uses an internal cooling fan to reduce the camcorder’s internal heat.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Fan] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Fan]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 Select the desired option and then press
[Fan]  
[On]  
Options  
[On]:  
The fan runs at a slow speet almes (except when the camcorder is in power save mode, then it is  
turned off). Use this default setting in most cases.  
[Automatic]: The fan runs at a high speed while the camcorder is not recording (including during power save mode)  
and it is automatically turned off while the camcorder is recording. However, if the internal temperature of  
the camcorder is too high (b appears in red), the fan will be activated automatically (in that case, `  
will appear next to the b icon). When the camcorder’s temperature has decreased sufficiently, the fan  
will be turned off. Use this setting when you do not want the camcorder to pick up the operating sound  
of the cooling fan.  
NOTES  
• Be careful not to cover with tape or otherwise obstruct the cooling fan’s air intake and exhaust vents (marked  
as AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST VENT).  
Exhaust vents  
Intake vents  
             
Video Configuration: Movie Format, Bit Rate, Resolution and Frame Rate  
Video Configuration: Movie Format, Bit Rate, Resolution and  
Frame Rate  
Before you record, select the movie format, bit rate, resolution (frame size) and frame rate that best match your  
creative needs.  
55  
Operating modes:  
Selecting the Movie Format  
[w Other Functions]  
You can record video in MXF format, MP4 format or simultaneously in  
both formats. MXF clips are recorded on a CF card while MP4 clips are  
[Movie Format]  
[MXF (CF)]  
recorded on an SD card, so be sure to insert the appropriate recording  
media according the movie format you want to use. If you can combine  
the MXF+MP4 movie format with double slot recording (A 42), you can  
record the same video on three recording media and in two different  
formats.  
1 Open the [Movie Format] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Movie Format]  
2 Select [MXF (CF)] to record only MXF clips, [MP4 ] to record ly 4 clips, or [MXF (CF)+MP4 ] to  
record simultaneously in both formats.  
Selecting the Bit Rate and Resolution  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Depending on the movie format selected, orresnding [Bit  
Rate/Resolution] submenu to set the bit rattion.  
[MXF]  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Bit Rate/R(MXF clips)  
[w Other Functions] > [MP4] > Bit Rate/Resoluon] (MP4 clips)  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
2 Select the desired option and then ress ST.  
• The selected bit rate and resolution will appear on the upper right of  
the screen. However, when the movie format is set to MXF+MP4,only  
[50 Mbps 1920x1080]  
the bit rate and resolution of the MXF clips will appear on the screen.  
[w Other Functions]  
[MP4]  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[24 Mbps 1920x1080]* or  
[Linked to MXF]**  
*
When the movie format is set to  
MP4.  
** When the movie format is set to  
MXF+MP4.  
           
Video Configuration: Movie Format, Bit Rate, Resolution and Frame Rate  
Selecting the Frame Rate  
[w Other Functions]  
[MXF]  
When [Bit Rate/Resolution] is set to [35 Mbps 1440x1080] (MXF clips) or  
[35 Mbps 1920x1080] or [17 Mbps 1280x720] (MP4 clips), the frame rate  
is set automatically and cannot be changed.  
56  
1 Depending on the movie format selected, open the corresponding  
[Frame Rate] submenu to set the frame rate.  
[Frame Rate]  
[59.94i]  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Frame Rate] (MXF clips)  
[w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Frame Rate] (MP4 clips)  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• The selected frame rate will appear on the upper right of the screen.  
When the movie format is set to MXF+MP4, only the bit rate/  
resolution of MXF clips will appear on the screen.  
[w Other Functions]  
[MP4]  
NOTES  
[Frame Rate]  
[29.97P]  
• For details about the video configuration of MP4 clips recorded when  
the movie format is set to MXF+MP4, refer to Simultaneous Recording  
of MXF and MP4 Clips (A 123).  
• For details on the signal output from each terminal, refer to Video  
Output Configuration (A 159).  
MXF clips: Available bit rate, resolution and frame rate
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[Frame ate]  
Bit rate*  
Resolution  
59
–
59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
Ü
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
1920 x 1080  
1440 x 1080  
1280 x 720  
–
Ü
–
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
50 Mbps  
(CBR 4:2:2)  
Ü
Ü
–
Ü
35 Mbps  
(VBR 4:2:0)  
–
–
Ü
Ü
Ü
25 Mbps  
(CBR 4:2:0)  
1440 x 1080  
Ü
–
Ü
Ü
* The first line indicates the bit rate (in Mbps); the second line indicates in parentheses whether the bit rate is constant (CBR) or  
variable (VBR), and the color sampling.  
MP4 clips: Available bit rate, resolution and frame rate settings  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[Frame Rate]  
Audio bit rate  
256 kbps  
Bit rate  
Resolution  
59.94P  
29.97P  
–
23.98P  
–
35 Mbps  
24 Mbps  
17 Mbps  
9 Mbps  
Ü
–
1920 x 1080  
Ü
–
Ü
–
Ü
–
1280 x 720  
640x360  
128 kbps  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
3 Mbps**  
–
** Only when the movie format is set to MXF+MP4 (A 123).  
 
Changing Main Camera Functions with the Joystick  
Changing Main Camera Functions with the Joystick  
You can adjust three main camera functions –shutter speed, white balance and gain– using only the joystick  
(direct setting mode). This section will explain the basic operation of the direct setting mode. For specific details  
about the functions please refer to the each function’s section: shutter speed (A 58), white balance (A 69),  
gain (A 62).  
57  
Operating modes:  
Using the Direct Setting Mode  
1 Press SET.  
• The onscreen display of the function to be  
adjusted will be highlighted in orange.  
• Push the joystick left/right to change the function  
to be adjusted. Pushing the joystick to the right  
will cycle through the options in the following  
order: White balance ꢀ White balance preset  
1
fine tuning/color temperature setting ꢀ Gain  
2
3
mode ꢀ Gain value ꢀ Shutter speed mode ꢀ  
2, 3  
Shutter value  
ꢀ White balance  
Only when the white balance mode is set to preset white  
balance or color temperature.  
Only during manual adjustment mode.  
Only when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.  
1
2
3
2 Push the joystick up/down to ane thmode or select the desired value and then press  
SET.  
• The selected mode/value will bset and e camcorder will exit the direct setting mode.  
• Depending on the function select, adional adjustment may be possible or necessary before pressing  
SET.  
NOTES  
• The direct setting mode will end automatically if no operation is performed for about 6 seconds or if you open  
the menu or a status screen.  
     
Shutter Speed  
Shutter Speed  
Set the shutter speed based on the recording conditions. For example, you may want to set slower shutter  
speeds in darker environments. The camcorder offers the following 6 modes.  
58  
Operating modes:  
OFF: The camcorder uses a standard shutter speed based on  
the frame rate. To turn off the shutter adjustment and use the  
standard shutter speed, set the SHUTTER switch to OFF.  
[Automatic]: The camcorder automatically adjusts the shutter  
speed based on the picture’s brightness. This mode is not  
available during slow & fast motion recording mode.  
[Speed]: Allows you to set the shutter speed (in fractions of a  
second). You can select the shutter speed increment between  
normal and fine.  
[Angle]: You can set the shutter angle to determine the shutter  
speed.  
[Clear Scan]: Set the frequency in order to record CRT computer  
monitors without displaying black bands or flicker on the screen.  
[Slow]: You can set slower shutter speeds to obtain brigh
recordings in places with insufficient lighting. This mode is
available during slow & fast motion recording m
Available shutter speeds  
The available shutter speeds vary deending on ate.  
Frame rate  
Shutter speed mode  
59.94i 9.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
OFF  
1/60  
1/30  
1/24  
1
[Automatic]  
1/60 to 1/500  
1/60 to 1/100  
1/30 to 1/500  
1/30 to 1/100  
1/24 to 1/500  
1/24 to 1/100  
During  
infrared  
mode  
During  
1/30 to 1/100  
1/15 to 1/100  
1/12 to 1/100  
infrared  
mode with  
slow shutter  
2
3
[Speed]  
1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/30, 1/34, 1/40, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/75, 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/34, 1/40, 1/48, 1/50,  
1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/300, 1/360,  
1/420, 1/500, 1/600, 1/720, 1/840,  
1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1700,  
1/2000  
1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150,  
1/250, 1/300, 1/360, 1/420, 1/500,  
1/600, 1/720, 1/840, 1/1000, 1/1200,  
1/1400, 1/1700, 1/2000  
1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/300, 1/360,  
1/420, 1/500, 1/600, 1/720,1/840,  
1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1700, 1/2000  
360°, 345.6°, 288°, 240°, 180°,  
172.8°, 144°, 120°, 90°, 86.4°, 72°,  
60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°  
23.98 Hz to 250.51 Hz  
4
[Angle]  
360°, 240°, 216°, 180°, 120°, 90°, 360°, 240°, 216°, 180°, 120°,  
60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°  
108°, 90°, 60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°,  
15°, 11.25°  
4
[Clear Scan]  
59.94 Hz to 250.51 Hz  
1/4, 1/8, 1/15, 1/30  
29.97 Hz to 250.51 Hz  
1/4, 1/8, 1/15  
1
[Slow]  
1/3, 1/6, 1/12  
1
2
3
Not available during slow & fast motion recording mode.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Infrared] > [Slow Shutter] set to [On].  
When [~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Shutter Increment] is set to [Normal]. When [Shutter Increment] is set to [Fine], you  
can adjust the shutter speed in increments of up to 1/256 stop.  
During slow & fast motion recording mode, available values will vary depending on the selected shooting frame rate.  
4
   
Shutter Speed  
Automatic Shutter  
Using the Joystick  
1 Set the SHUTTER switch to ON.  
59  
2 Press SET and push the joystick left/right until the  
shutter speed mode icon is highlighted in orange.  
3 Push the joystick up/down to select the icon and  
then press SET.  
• The shutter speed will be set automatically.  
NOTES  
• You can also set [~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] >  
[Mode] to [Automatic]. Additionally, if you set an assignable  
button to [Shutter Mode] (A 129), you can press the  
button to change the shutter speed mode between manual  
and automatic.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can chae e shutter speed mode remotely from a  
connected device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the shutter speed mode button on the Browmote scren.  
2 Select [Auto].  
ቢ
ባ
 
Shutter Speed  
Manual Shutter  
When the shutter speed mode is set to manual, you can select to adjust the shutter as a shutter speed, angle  
value, clear scan frequency or slow shutter speed according to your shooting needs.  
60  
Changing the Shutter Speed Mode and Value  
1 Set the SHUTTER switch to ON.  
2 Open the shutter [Manual] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Manual]  
3 Select the desired mode and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Speed] (the default value), you can  
select the increment scale to use when adjusting the  
shutter speed; otherwise, skip to step 6.  
4 Open the [Shutter Increment] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Shutter Increment]  
5 Select [Normal] or [Fine] and then press SET.  
• If you select [Fine], you can adjust the shutter speed in  
increments of up to 1/256 step.  
6 Close the menu and change the shutter speed  
mode to manual using the direct setting mode.  
• Press SET and push the joystick left/right untishutted mode  
icon is highlighted in orange, select the resET. For  
details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mo
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Shutter]  
[Manual]  
7 Adjust the shutter speed, anglvalue or clrequency  
using the direct setting mode.  
[Speed]  
• Press SET and push the joystick t/right til the shutter value is  
highlighted in orange, select the deslue and then press SET. For  
details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
• If in step 3 you selected [Clear Scan], adjust the frequency so that  
black bands do not appear on the screen.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Shutter]  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Shutter Increment] (A 129), you can  
press the button to change the shutter increment (steps 4-5).  
Additionally, if you set an assignable button to [Shutter Mode], you can  
press the button to change the shutter speed mode between manual  
and automatic (step 6).  
[Shutter Increment]  
[Normal]  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can adjust the shutter speed remotely from a  
connected device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the shutter speed mode button on the Browser Remote screen.  
2 Select the desired mode.  
3 Press the current shutter speed, angle value or clear scan frequency and select the desired value  
from the list.  
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Browser Remote screen and will be applied on the camcorder.  
 
Shutter Speed  
ባ
ቢ
ቤ
61  
Using Slow Shutter Mode  
When recording in dark surroundings, you can obtain a brighter picture by using slow shutter mode. You can  
also use this mode when you wish to add certain effects to your recordings, such as blurring the background  
during panning shots or recording a moving subject with an afterimage trail.  
• Image quality may not be as good as when using faster shutter speeds in brighter surroundings.  
• Autofocus may not work well.  
NOTES  
• Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditis mcause the picture to appear soft or out  
of focus. To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction, use a fashutter speed or open up the aperture  
(A 65).  
• When the gain and aperture are set to manual and the speed me is not set to [Automatic], the  
exposure bar will appear on the screen (A
• When you set the camcorder to infrared mo), thshutter speed mode will be set to automatic. If  
you set the camcorder to slow & fst mtion nd infrared mode at the same time, the shutter speed  
mode will be set to OFF.  
• When an optional RC-V100 Reme Controer is connected to the camcorder, you can change the shutter  
speed mode with the remote contrer’s SUTTER SELECT button, regardless of the position of the  
camcorder's SHUTTER switch.  
Flicker Reduction  
[~ Camera Setup]  
You can perform the following procedure to have the camcorder  
automatically detect and reduce flicker.  
[Flicker Reduction]  
1 Open the [Flicker Reduction] submenu.  
[Off]  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Flicker Reduction]  
2 Select [Automatic] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
• When recording under artificial light sources such as fluorescent, mercury or halogen lamps, the screen may  
flicker depending on the shutter speed. You may be able to avoid flicker by setting the shutter speed mode to  
[Speed] and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system: 1/50* or 1/100  
for 50 Hz systems, 1/60 or 1/120 for 60 Hz systems.  
* May not be available depending on the frame rate.  
   
Gain  
Gain  
Depending on the shooting conditions you may want to adjust the brightness of the image. You can do so by  
changing the gain value to adjust the sensitivity of the sensor. The camcorder offers 3 independently adjustable  
gain levels (L/M/H), for each of which you can select automatic gain (including the option to limit the maximum  
gain value) or manual gain control.  
62  
Operating modes:  
Available gain settings  
Increment  
Gain  
3 dB  
0.5 dB (when [Fine Tuning] is selected)  
-6 dB*, -3 dB*, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB, 21 dB, 24 dB, 27 dB, 33 dB*  
-6 dB to -0.5 dB*, 0 dB to 27 dB  
* These values cannot be selected when the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file (A 135) is set to [Wide DR].  
Selecting the Gain Level  
You can set beforehand 3 gain levels (including automatic gain control) d then select quickly which one to  
apply simply by changing the position of the GAIN switch.  
Set the GAIN switch to the position you want to adj
(L, M or H).  
• L, M or H and the gain value currently assign
position will be displayed on the screen.  
Automatic Gain Control (AGC
Using the Joystick  
1 Press SET and push the joystick left/right until the  
gain mode icon is highlighted in orange.  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select the icon and  
then press SET.  
• The current position of the GAIN switch will be set to automatic gain control.  
NOTES  
• You can also set the respective [Mode] setting ([~ Camera Setup] > [Gain] > [L], [M] or [H] > [Mode]) to  
[Automatic]. Additionally, if you set an assignable button to [Gain Mode] (A 129), you can press the button to  
change the gain mode of the currently selected gain position between manual and automatic.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can change the gain mode of the currently selected  
gain position remotely from a connected device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the gain mode button on the Browser Remote screen.  
2 Select [Auto].  
         
Gain  
ባ
ቢ
63  
Setting the Gain Limit (AGC Limit)  
For each gain position, you can activate the gain limit to prevent the camcorder from setting a level higher than a  
preset limit between 0 dB and 27 dB. When you set the camcorder to full auto mode (A 49) or infrared mode  
(A 126), [AGC Limit] will be set to [Off/27 dB].  
1 Open the [AGC Limit] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Gain] > [L], [M] or [H] > [AGC Limit]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
[Gain]  
[L], [M] or [H]  
[AGC Limit]  
[Off/27 dB]  
Manual Gain  
Using the Joystick  
1 Change the gain mode to manal uing etting mode.  
• Press SET and push the joystileft/right untin mode icon is highlighted in orange, select the icon  
and press SET. For details refeo Using te Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
• The current position of the GAIN itch ll be set to manual gain.  
2 Adjust the gain value using the direct setting mode.  
• Press SET and push the joystick left/right until the gain value is highlighted in orange, select the desired  
value and then press SET. For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode (A 57).  
NOTES  
• You can also select the gain value from the respective [Manual] setting ([~ Camera Setup] > [Gain] > [L],  
[M] or [H] > [Manual]). Using the menu, you can also select [Fine Tuning] and then select a gain level between  
-6.0 dB and 24.0 dB in 0.5 dB increments. Once you have selected [Fine Tuning] in the menu, you can then  
adjust the gain value in 0.5-dB increments also using the direct setting mode.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can adjust the gain value of the currently selected  
gain position remotely from a connected device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the gain mode button on the Browser Remote screen and then select [Manual].  
2 Press the current gain value and select the desired value from the list.  
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Browser Remote screen and will be applied on the camcorder.  
       
Gain  
ባ
ቢ
64  
NOTES  
• When the gain and aperture are set to manual and the shutter speed mode is not set to [Automatic], the  
exposure bar will appear on the screen (A 67).  
• When high gain levels are set, the picture may flicker slightly. Additionally, uneven color, noise (white dots) and  
vertical stripes and other artifacts are more likely to appear.  
• When you set the camcorder to infrared mode (A 126), the gain mode will be set to automatic gain control.  
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Shockless Gain] setting (A 141) for a  
smooth transition when changing the position of the GAIN switch.  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the gain value  
corresponding to the current position of the GAIN switch (L, M or H) with the remote controller’s ISO/GAIN  
Í/Î buttons.  
Aperture  
Aperture  
You can affect the brightness of your recordings or change the depth of field by adjusting the aperture. For  
example, use a small aperture value for a shallow depth of field that isolates the subject in focus and nicely blurs  
the background. You can have the camcorder adjust the aperture automatically or you can adjust it manually to  
have more control over your recording.  
65  
Operating modes:  
Available aperture values  
Aperture Value  
Aperture Mode  
(IRIS (ND) switch)  
Only when [Iris Limit]* is set to [Off]  
–
A (automatic)  
M (manual)  
F1.8 to F16  
F1.8, F2.0, F2.2, F2.4, F2.6, F2.8, F3.2, F3.4, F3.7, F4.0, F8.7, F9.5, F10, F11, F12, F14, F15, F16, CLOSE  
F4.4, F4.8, F5.2, F5.6, F6.2, F6.7, F7.3, F8.0  
* [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Iris Limit].  
Automatic Aperture  
Set the IRIS (ND) switch to A.  
•
will appear on the screen next to the aperture  
value.  
NOTES  
• You can use the [w Other Functns] > [Cus
Function] > [AE Response] sett(A 141) to  
change how quickly the aperture cnges ring  
automatic aperture mode.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can change the aperture mode remotely from a  
connected device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the aperture mode button on the Browser Remote screen.  
2 Select [Auto].  
ባ
ቢ
       
Aperture  
Manual Aperture  
Using the Iris Ring  
1 Set the IRIS (ND) switch to M.  
66  
•
will appear on the screen next to the aperture  
value.  
2 Turn the iris ring to adjust the aperture.  
• The aperture value displayed on the screen will  
change in 1/4-stop increments.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182),  
you can adjust the aperture value remotely from a  
connected device using the Browser Remote  
application.  
1 Press the aperture mode button on the Browser  
Remote screen and then select [Manual].  
2 Press the current aperture value on the Browser Remote screeand select the desired aperture  
value from the list.  
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available vues.  
• Alternatively, you can press [IRIS (ND) +] to open the or [IRIS D) -] to close the aperture in 1/16-  
stop increments. (Onscreen displays will show the clo-stop apeure value.)  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Reme screen and will be applied on the lens.  
ባ
ቢ
ባ
NOTES  
• When the gain and aperture are set to manual and the shutter speed mode is not set to [Automatic], the  
exposure bar will appear on the screen (A 67).  
• The aperture value set manually will not be retained when you switch to automatic aperture (with the exception  
of full auto mode). Instead, the aperture value set automatically by the camcorder will be used when you  
switch back to manual aperture control.  
• If the ND filter is activated, the picture may become dark when you set a high aperture value. In such case, set  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ND Filter] to [Off] and readjust the aperture.  
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Iris Ring Direction] setting (A 141) to change  
the direction of the adjustment when you turn the iris ring.  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the aperture  
with the remote controller’s IRIS dial. At default settings, turn the dial right to open up the aperture (smaller F  
value) and left to close the aperture (larger F value).  
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Iris Limit] setting (A 141) to prevent the  
aperture from closing below the diffraction limit of the lens (F8.0). When it is on, the maximum aperture value is  
[F8.0]. When it is off, you can fully close the aperture but aperture values that exceed the diffraction limit will  
appear in gray. Using aperture values displayed in gray will cause diffraction blur.  
   
Aperture  
ND Filter  
At default settings, the camcorder’s ND filter is activated automatically depending on the aperture value. The ND  
filter is first activated when you close down the aperture to F4.0 ([ND 1/2] will appear on the screen). As you  
close down the aperture further, the ND filter will change to [ND 1/4] and then to [ND 1/8] for aperture values  
above F4.4.  
67  
If you prefer not to use the ND filter, you can turn it off with the following procedure.  
1 Open the [ND Filter] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ND Filter]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
2 Select [Off] and then press SET.  
[ND Filter]  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
[Automatic]  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can change  
the ND filter mode remotely from a connected device using the Browser  
Remote application.  
1 Press [ND Off] on the Browser Remote screen to turn off the ND  
filter.  
2 Press [ND Auto] to return the camcorder to automatic ND filter mode.  
Exposure Compensation - AE Shift  
Use AE shift to compensate the exposure that sing tomatic aperture, in order to darken or lighten the  
image. You can select from 17 available AE s
AE shift is not available when the cacer is uto mode (A 49).  
1 Open the [AE Shift] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [AE Shift]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
2 Select an AE shift level and then prSET.  
[AE Shift]  
• The selected AE shift level will be displayed above the exposure bar  
and the camcorder will attempt to adjust the exposure accordingly.  
[ 0]  
Available AE Shift Levels  
+2.0 +1.75 +1.5 +1.25 +1.0 +0.75 +0.5 +0.25  
-0.25 -0.5 -0.75 -1.0 -1.25 -1.5 -1.75 -2.0  
0
The Exposure Bar  
Optimal exposure AE 0  
Current exposure  
When the gain and aperture are both set to manual mode and the shutter speed  
is set to a mode other than auto, the exposure bar will appear, giving you an  
indication of the current exposure. The Î on top of the exposure bar indicates  
optimal exposure without any shift (AE 0) and the indicator inside the exposure  
bar represents the current exposure.  
When the difference between current and optimal exposure is larger than 2 EV,  
the indicator will flash at the edge of the exposure bar.  
                   
Aperture  
Light Metering Mode  
Select the light metering mode to match the recording conditions. Using the appropriate setting will ensure that  
the camcorder obtains the most suitable exposure level when either the aperture, shutter speed or gain is set  
automatically by the camcorder.  
68  
1 Open the [Light Metering] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Light Metering]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
[Light Metering]  
• The icon of the selected mode appears on the left of the screen.  
[Standard]  
Options  
[Backlight] °: Suitable when recording backlit scenes.  
[Standard]: Averages the light metered from the entire screen, giving  
more weight to the subject in the center.  
[Spotlight] ®: Use this option when recording a scene in which only a  
certain part of the picture is lit, for example, when the subject  
is lit by a spotlight.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Backlight] or [Spotlight] (A 19), ycan press the button to change the  
light metering mode.  
     
White Balance  
White Balance  
The camcorder uses an electronic white balance process to  
calibrate the picture and ensure accurate colors under different  
lighting conditions. There are 4 methods of setting the white  
balance.  
69  
Auto white balance (AWB): The camcorder automatically adjusts  
the white balance to the optimal level. This method can be  
assigned to any of the three positions of the WHITE BAL.  
switch.  
Preset white balance: Set the white balance to ¼ (daylight) or  
É (incandescent lamp). Preset white balance settings can be  
further fine-tuned within a range of -9 to 9. This method can  
only be used when the WHITE BAL. switch is set to PRESET.  
Set color temperature: Allows you to set the color temperature  
between 2,000 K and 15,000 K. This method can only be used  
when the WHITE BAL. switch is set to PRESET.  
Custom white balance: You can use a white object to establish the whitbalance and set it to one of two custom  
white balance positions, ÅA or ÅB. These correspond, respectivelyo positions A and B of the WHITE BAL.  
switch.  
When recording under fluorescent lights, we recommenuto whibalance or setting the custom white  
balance.  
Operating modes:  
NOTES  
• The [Color Matrix] and [White Balce] settgs in the custom picture file (A 139) take precedence over the  
white balance settings.  
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Shockless WB] setting (A 141) to make the  
transition look smoother when you change the white balance settings.  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the white  
balance with the remote controller’s AWB button, A button, B button, PRESET button and Å button.  
   
White Balance  
Auto White Balance (AWB)  
The camcorder constantly adjusts the white balance automatically to achieve an optimal level. The camcorder  
will adjust the white balance if the light source changes.  
70  
Using the Joystick  
1 Set the WHITE BAL. switch to the position you want  
to use for auto white balance (A, B or PRESET).  
2 Press SET and push the joystick left/right until the  
white balance icon is highlighted in orange.  
3 Push the joystick up/down to select the  
and then press SET.  
icon  
• The white balance will be adjusted automatically. The  
current color temperature will be displayed next to the  
icon.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A you hange the white balance mode of the currently  
selected WHITE BAL. switch position remotely nnecd device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the white balance mode utton on ter Remote screen.  
2 Select [Auto].  
ቢ
ባ
NOTES  
• Custom white balance may provide better results in the following cases:  
- Changing lighting conditions  
- Close-ups  
- Subjects in a single color (sky, sea or forest)  
- Under mercury lamps and certain types of fluorescent/LED lights  
• You can also set the respective setting ([~ Camera Setup] > [White Balance] > [A], [B] or [~ Camera  
Setup] > [White Balance] > [PRESET] > [Mode]) to [AWB]. Additionally, if you set an assignable button to  
[WB Mode] (A 129), you can press the button to change the white balance mode of the currently selected  
position of the WHITE BAL. switch.  
   
White Balance  
Preset White Balance/Color Temperature  
The camcorder features two preset white balance settings for recording outdoors (daylight) and indoors  
(incandescent light). These preset settings can be fine-tuned between -9 and +9. Alternatively, you can specify  
the desired color temperature between 2,000 K and 15,000 K in 100 K increments.  
71  
Using the Joystick  
1 Open the PRESET's [Mode] submenu to select the  
white balance adjustment mode.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [White Balance] > [PRESET] >  
[Mode]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[White Balance]  
[PRESET]  
2 Select [Preset] and then press SET.  
3 Back in the [PRESET] submenu, select [Preset] and  
then press SET to select the white balance mode  
assigned to the PRESET position.  
[Mode]  
4 Select [Daylight], [Tungsten] or [Kelvin], press SET and  
then press MENU to close the menu.  
[Preset]  
5 Set the WHITE BAL. switch to PRESET.  
• The icon of the selected white balance mode will appear  
on the screen.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[White Balance]  
[PRESET]  
6 Press SET and push the joystick left/right until th
white balance icon is highlighted in orange
7 While the selected icon is highlighted in ush  
the joystick to the right.  
• If you selected [Daylight] or [Tugsten], the t  
value [ 0] will appear next to ticon, highlightein  
orange.  
[Preset]  
[Daylight]  
• If you selected [Kelvin], the color teature value  
[5500 K] will appear next to the È icon, highlighted in  
orange.  
8 Push the joystick up/down to fine tune the preset  
setting or set the desired color temperature and then  
press SET.  
• The selected adjustment value/color temperature will be  
set and the camcorder will exit the direct setting mode.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you  
can adjust the white balance remotely from a connected  
device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the white balance mode button on the Browser  
Remote screen.  
2 Select [¼], [É] or [È].  
3 Press the adjustment value [Ê 0] (¼, É) or color temperature [5500K] (È) and then select the  
desired value from the list.  
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.  
• The selected value will be displayed on the Browser Remote screen and will be applied on the camcorder.  
 
White Balance  
ቤ
ባ
ቢ
72  
White balance fine-tuning  
ቤ
Color temperature  
Custom White Balance  
You can store two custom white balance settings in the camcorder for recording under more difficult lighting  
conditions.  
Using the Joystick  
1 Set the WHITE BAL. switch to A or B.  
2 Press SET and push the joystick left/right until the  
white balance icon is highlighted in orange.  
3 Push the joystick up/down to select [ÅA] or [ÅB]
depending on the position of the WHITE tch.  
• To apply the stored custom white balance s,  
press SET. The rest of the proceure is not
• If a custom white balance has nyet been stoe  
white balance icon (ÅA or ÅBand deflt value  
(5,500 K) will flash slowly. To estabh the ustom white  
balance, continue the procedure.  
4 Point the camcorder at a white object so that it fills  
the whole screen.  
• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when  
recording.  
5 Press the Å button.  
• The white balance icon (ÅA or ÅB) will flash quickly.  
• Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed.  
• After the white balance icon stops flashing, the procedure is completed. The setting is retained even if you  
turn off the camcorder.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can set the custom white balance remotely from a  
connected device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 Press the white balance mode button on the Browser Remote screen.  
2 Select [ÅA] or [ÅB].  
3 Point the camcorder at a white object so that it fills the whole screen.  
• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording.  
• Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed.  
   
White Balance  
4 Press [Å].  
• If a custom white balance has not yet been stored, [Å] will flash slowly.  
• During the procedure, [Å] will flash quickly. When it stops flashing, the procedure is completed and the  
setting will be applied on the camcorder.  
73  
ቢ
ብ
ባ
NOTES  
• Using the custom white balance setting:  
- Set [~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Mode] to [Normal].  
- Readjust the custom white balance if the light source changes.  
- Very rarely and depending on the light source, Å may keep ashi(it will change to a slow flashing). The  
result will still be better than with the auto white balance.  
Zooming  
Zooming  
You can operate the zoom (optical zoom 20x) using the zoom rocker on the side grip or the one on the handle.  
You can also use the zoom ring on the lens or the zoom buttons on the supplied wireless controller.  
In addition to the optical zoom, you can use the digital zoom* to extend the zoom range to 120x, or digital tele-  
converter** function to increase the focal length by a factor of approximately 1.5, 3 or 6.  
74  
*
In the range beyond the optical zoom (20x to 120x), the image is processed digitally affecting image quality.  
** The image is processed digitally throughout the zoom range affecting image quality.  
Operating modes:  
Selecting the Zoom Mode  
1 Open the zoom’s [Mode] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Mode]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
[Mode]  
[Tele-converter 6.0x], [Tele-converter 3.0x], [Tele-converter 1.5x]:  
The camcorder processes the image digitally to mly the  
focal length by a factor of 6, 3 or 1.5, respecti
[Normal]  
[Digital Zoom]: The camcorder uses the optical zoom up to 20
processes the image digitally after tha mafication  
ratio of 120x.  
[Normal]:  
The camcorder uses only he tica20x.  
When you operate the zoom, a zoom ndicatorwill appear on the screen that  
shows the approximate zoom position. he wte area of the zoom bar indicates  
the optical zoom range and the blue area** indicates the digital zoom range.  
*
You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Zoom Indicator] setting (A 141)  
to set the zoom indicator to a numerical display.  
** Only when [~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Mode] is set to [Digital Zoom].  
NOTES  
• You can set [~ Camera Setup] > [Wide-End Angle] to [Wider] to make the focal length at the wide-angle  
end of the zoom range even shorter (approximately 26.8 mm, 35mm-equivalent) and enjoy a wider angle of  
view. If you set an assignable button to [Wide-End Angle] (A 129), you can press the button to switch  
between the [Normal] and [Wider] settings.  
• You can attach the TL-H58 Tele-converter or WA-H58 Wide Attachment (both optional) to the camcorder  
(A 80). You can even use the TL-H58 in combination with the digital zoom and digital tele-converter  
functions.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Tele-converter] (A 129), you can press the button to activate the digital  
tele-converter and select the magnification factor. If you set an assignable button to [Digital Zoom] (A 129),  
you can press the button to turn the digital zoom on/off.  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, if the zoom mode is set to one  
of the [Tele-converter] options, the remote controller’s EXTENDER indicator will light up.  
• When [~ Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set to [WA-H58], the digital zoom and digital tele-  
converter options are not available.  
           
Zooming  
Using the Zoom Ring  
Zoom in and out on a subject by turning the zoom ring. The zoom speed depends on how fast  
you turn the zoom ring.  
75  
NOTES  
• You can change the direction of the adjustment and the sensitivity of the response of the  
zoom ring using the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Zoom Ring Direction] and  
[Zoom Ring Control] settings (A 141).  
Using the Zoom Rockers on the Camcorder  
Using the Grip Zoom Rocker  
Use the settings in the [~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] submenu to set  
the zoom speed. When you select a constant zoom speed, set one of  
16 constant speeds (1 is the slowest, 16 the fastest). With a variable  
zoom speed, press gently for a slow zoom; press harder for faster  
zooms.  
Move the zoom rocker toward T to zoom out (wide-angle) a
toward S to zoom in (telephoto).  
       
Zooming  
Setting the Zoom Speed  
Refer to the following table for approximate zoom speeds of the entire  
zoom range (end to end).  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
1 Open the zoom [Speed Level] submenu.  
76  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Speed Level]  
[Speed Level]  
[Normal]  
2 Select [Fast], [Normal] or [Slow] and then press SET.  
3 Open the grip rocker [Select] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Grip Rocker] > [Select]  
4 Select [Constant] or [Variable] and then press SET.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
[Grip Rocker]  
[Select]  
[Variable]  
To set the speed level for [Constant]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
5 Open the grip rocker [Constant Speed] subu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Grip Roonsnt Speed]  
6 Select the desired level and theprs S
[Grip Rocker]  
[Constant Speed 8]  
Grip zoom rocker: Approximate zoom speeds (time required to zoom end-to-end)  
[Grip Rocker] settings  
[Constant Speed]  
[Speed Level] setting  
[Select]  
[Constant]  
[Variable]  
[Slow]  
4 min. 45 sec.  
[Normal]  
3 min.  
[Fast]  
1 min.  
[1] (slowest)  
[16] (fastest)  
–
4.0 sec.  
2.5 sec.  
1.7 sec.*  
4.0 sec. to 4 min. 45 sec.  
2.5 sec. to 3 min.  
1.7 sec.* to 1 min.  
* When the zoom speed is too fast (approx. 1.7 seconds end-to-end), the camcorder will have more trouble focusing automatically  
while zooming.  
NOTES  
• When [~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [High-Speed Zoom] is set to [On] and the grip rocker's zoom speed  
is set to [Variable], when you operate the zoom in record pause mode, the actual zoom speed will be as if  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Speed Level] were set to [Fast]. While recording, the zoom speed level will  
follow the speed level setting set in the menu.  
Zooming  
Using the Handle Zoom Rocker  
Use the ZOOM SPEED switch and the settings in the  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] submenu to set the  
zoom speed.  
77  
Move the zoom rocker toward T to zoom out  
(wide-angle) and toward S to zoom in  
(telephoto).  
Setting the Zoom Speed  
Refer to the following table for approximate zoom speeds of the entire  
zoom range (end to end).  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
[Speed Level]  
[Normal]  
1 Open the zoom [Speed Level] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Speed Level]  
2 Select [Fast], [Normal] or [Slow] and then press SET.  
3 Open the zoom [Handle Rocker] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Handle Roer H] odle  
Rocker L].  
[~ Camera Setup]  
• You can set the zoom speed independenof thpositions  
of the ZOOM SPEED switch.  
[Zoom]  
4 Select the desired level and thn press SET.  
5 Set the ZOOM SPEED switch to or L
• You can set the ZOOM SPEED switch to OFF to deactivate the zoom  
rocker on the handle.  
[Handle Rocker H 16]  
[Handle Rocker L 8]  
Handle zoom rocker: Approximate zoom speeds (time required to zoom end-to-end)  
[Speed Level] setting  
[Normal]  
[Handle Rocker H]/[Handle Rocker L]  
setting  
[Slow]  
4 min. 45 sec.  
4.0 sec.  
[Fast]  
1 min.  
[1] (slowest)  
[16] (fastest)  
3 min.  
2.5 sec.  
1.7 sec.*  
* When the zoom speed is too fast (approx. 1.7 seconds end-to-end), the camcorder will have more trouble focusing automatically  
while zooming.  
 
Zooming  
Remote Operation  
Using the Supplied Wireless Controller or an Optional Remote Controller  
The zoom speeds when using the supplied wireless controller, the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or a  
commercially available remote control connected to the REMOTE terminal are different. When using the supplied  
wireless controller, you must press the record enable button and desired zoom button simultaneously to zoom.  
78  
Zoom speeds  
Accessory  
Zoom speed  
Wireless controller (supplied)  
Constant zoom speed. See the table at the end of the procedure.  
Variable speed: The greater the angle at which the RC-V100’s ZOOM dial is rotated from the center,  
the faster the zoom.  
RC-V100 Remote Controller (optional)  
If the remote control does not support variable zoom: Constant zoom speed.  
If the remote control supports variable zoom: Variable zoom according to the remote control's  
settings.  
Commercially available remote controls  
Setting the Zoom Speed of the Supplied Wireless Controller  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
1 Open the zoom [Speed Level] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Speed Level]  
2 Select [Fast], [Normal] or [Slow] and then press SET.  
3 Open the zoom [Wireless Controller] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Wireless Coroller]  
[Speed Level]  
[Normal]  
4 Select the desired level and then press S
Supplied wireless controller: Appromate zoom me required to  
zoom end-to-end)  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
[Zm Speed vel] setting  
[Wireless Controller]  
setting  
[Slow]  
4 min. 45 sec.  
4.0 sec.  
mal]  
3 min.  
[Fast]  
1 min.  
[1] (slowest)  
[16] (fastest)  
[Wireless Controller]  
[8]  
2.5 sec.  
1.7 sec.*  
* When the zoom speed is too fast (approx. 1.7 seconds end-to-end), the camcorder will  
have more trouble focusing automatically while zooming.  
NOTES  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can zoom with the remote  
controller’s ZOOM dial. At default settings, turn the dial right to zoom in (T) and left to zoom out (W).  
   
Zooming  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can operate the zoom remotely from a connected  
device using the Browser Remote application.  
79  
Press one of the [ZOOM] controls on the Browser Remote screen to zoom as necessary.  
• Press one of the controls on the [WIDE] (wide angle) side to zoom out or one of the controls on the [TELE]  
(telephoto) side to zoom in.  
• There are three levels of constant zoom speed - [ ]/[ ] is the slowest and [ ]/[ ] the fastest.  
Soft Zoom Control  
Using the soft zoom control function you can make the zoom start egradually when you operate the zoom  
using one of the rockers on the camcorder, a remote conor the Bwser Remote application.  
1 Open the [Soft Zoom Control] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Soft Zorol]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
2 Select [Start] (soft control only at the bethe om),  
[Zoom]  
[Stop] (soft control only at the nd of the Both], and  
then press SET.  
[Soft Zoom Control]  
[Off]  
     
Using Optional Conversion Lenses  
Using Optional Conversion Lenses  
You can use the following optional conversion lenses with this camcorder. Before you attach a conversion lens,  
perform the procedure below to optimize the autofocus and minimum object distance for the particular  
accessory.  
80  
Operating modes:  
Optional Conversion Lens  
TL-H58 Tele-converter  
Focal Length Factor  
Approx. 1.5x  
Approx. 0.75x  
Minimum Focusing Distance  
Approx. 130 cm (4.3 ft.) throughout the zoom range  
Approx. 60 cm (2.0 ft.) throughout the zoom range  
WA-H58 Wide Attachment  
1 Open the [Conversion Lens] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Conversion Lens]  
[Off]  
2 Select [TL-H58] or [WA-H58] and then press SET.  
• The image stabilization method, minimum focusing distance and the  
approximate distance to the subject displayed on the screen will  
change depending on the conversion lens selected.  
• Select [Off] if you do not intend to use a conversion lens.  
NOTES  
• Even if [~ Camera Setup] > [AF Mode] > [Speed] [High] [Medium], it will change  
automatically to [Normal] when using a converns.  
• Vignetting may occur when taking wide anglh thoptional TL-H58 Tele-converter.  
• When [Conversion Lens] is set to [W58], o enwill be more limited than the wide-angle end.  
• If you set an assignable button to L-H58] or [(A 129), you can press the button to turn on/off the  
optimized settings for the selected onversion lens.  
     
Adjusting the Focus  
Adjusting the Focus  
The camcorder offers 3 ways to focus. When you use manual focus, you can use focus assistance functions,  
such as peaking and magnification, to help you focus more accurately.  
81  
Autofocus (AF): The camcorder continuously adjusts the focus automatically. When using autofocus, you can  
one of three levels of AF speed. You can also use the focus ring (with no physical stops).  
Manual focus (MF): Adjust the focus manually using the focus ring, or remotely, using the Browser Remote  
application.  
Push AF: While using MF, Normal AF or Medium AF, you can have the camcorder switch temporarily to Instant  
AF mode as long as you hold the PUSH AF button pressed down.  
Operating modes:  
Autofocus (AF) Mode  
The camcorder uses the TTL autofocus system and continuously adjusts the focus on the subject in the center  
of the screen. The focusing range is 1 cm (0.39 in.; at full wide-angle, asured from the front of the lens barrel)  
to G.  
Even during autofocus mode, you can turn the focus ring to focus mly. When you stop turning the ring, the  
camcorder returns to autofocus mode. This is useful in ssuch awhen focusing on a subject on the  
other side of a window.  
Set the FOCUS switch to A.  
• = appears on the left of the scr
Remote Operation Using Broser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparions A 182), you can change  
the focus mode remotely from a connected device using the Browser  
Remote application.  
Press [MF] on the Browser Remote screen.  
• The orange line in the button will turn gray and the camcorder will  
change to autofocus mode.  
• Press [MF] again to return the camcorder to manual focus mode.  
         
Adjusting the Focus  
Setting the Autofocus Mode  
You can select how fast the camcorder focuses using autofocus.  
1 Open the AF mode’s [Speed] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [AF Mode] > [Speed]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[AF Mode]  
[Speed]  
82  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
[High]:  
Sets the autofocus mode to Instant AF. The focus is adjusted at  
the highest speed. This mode is useful even when recording in  
very bright or low-light surroundings. This mode uses both the  
TTL system and external sensor for focusing.  
[High]  
[Medium]:  
[Normal]:  
Sets the autofocus mode to Medium AF. The camcorder  
focuses more smoothly on the subject than when using the  
[High] setting.  
Sets the autofocus mode to Normal AF. The autofocus  
adjustment is made at a stable speed.  
NOTES  
• When recording in bright surroundings, the camcorder closes down taperture. This may cause the picture  
to appear blurred and is more noticeable toward the wide-angle ehe zoom range. In such case, set  
[~ Camera Setup] > [ND Filter] to [Automatic].  
• When [~ Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set g other an [Off] and when the camcorder is  
in infrared mode, the [High] and [Medium] settire noable. Also, Push AF will operate at Normal AF  
speed.  
• Autofocus takes longer to focus when the fraet to 9.97P or 23.98P than when it is set to 59.94i.  
During slow & fast motion recordimode, the ue for all shooting frame rates other than 60.  
• When recording under dark condins, the focusinange narrows and the picture may appear blurred.  
• Autofocus (including Push AF) may t worwell on the following subjects or in the following cases. In such  
case, focus manually.  
- Reflective surfaces  
- Subjects with low contrast or without vertical lines  
- Fast moving subjects  
- Through dirty or wet windows  
- Night scenes  
 
Adjusting the Focus  
Manual Focus (MF)  
Using the Focus Ring  
1 Set the FOCUS switch to M.  
83  
• A appears on the left of the screen.  
2 Turn the focus ring on the lens to adjust the focus.  
• Focusing speed will depend on how you operate the focus ring.  
NOTES  
• You can use the focus ring to adjust the focus while you are operating  
the zoom. If the camcorder was initially in autofocus mode, it will  
return to autofocus mode after you adjust the focus manually.  
• You can change the direction of the adjustment and the sensitivity of  
the response of the focus ring using the [w Other Functions] >  
[Custom Function] > [Focus Ring Direction] and [Focus Ring Control]  
settings (A 141).  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can adjust e focus remotely from a connected  
device using the Browser Remote application.  
1 If the camcorder is set to AF mode, touch [MF] owser Rmote screen.  
• The gray line in the button will turn orange ahe caer will change to manual focus mode.  
2 Press one of the [FOCUS] controls to acus necessary.  
• Press one of the controls on the ER] sicloser or one of the controls on the [FAR] side to focus  
farther away.  
• There are three levels of adjustent - [ ][ ] is the smallest and [ ]/[ ] the largest.  
ቢ
ባ
NOTES  
• Using the subject distance display on the screen:  
- When the camcorder switches out of autofocus mode or while you adjust the focus with the focus ring, the  
approximate subject distance is displayed on the screen for approximately 5 seconds.  
- Use the subject distance display as an estimate. When the distance reading is not considered very precise  
for a particular zoom range, it will be displayed in gray.  
- [G] indicates infinity focus and [G–] indicates over infinity focus.  
- You can change the units of distance between meters and feet using the [w Other Functions] > [Custom  
Function] > [Distance Units] setting (A 141).  
       
Adjusting the Focus  
- The correct subject distance will not be displayed when an optional conversion lens is attached.  
• If you operate the zoom after focusing, the focus on the subject may be lost.  
• If you focus manually and then leave the camcorder with the power turned on, the focus on the subject may  
be lost after a while. This possible slight shift in focus is a result of the internal temperature rising in the  
camcorder and lens. Check the focus before resuming shooting.  
84  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the focus with  
the remote controller’s FOCUS dial. At default settings, turn the dial right to focus farther and left to focus  
nearer.  
Using the Focus Assistance Functions  
In order to focus more accurately, you can use two focus assistance functions – peaking, which creates a clearer  
contrast by emphasizing the outlines of the subject, and magnification, which enlarges the image on the screen.  
You can use both functions simultaneously for greater effect.  
You can also use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Focus Assistance B&W] setting (A 141) to  
switch the screen to black & white while using the focus assistance functions.  
Peaking  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
[Peaking]  
The camcorder offers two peaking levels.  
1 Press the PEAKING button.  
• The peaking icon (J or K) appears at the lower center the  
screen and the outlines in the image will be emphasized, dependi
on the focus.  
[Select]  
• Press the button again to turn off peaking.  
[Peaking 1]  
• Alternatively, you can use [£ OLED/VF SPeag] >  
[Setting] to turn peaking on and off.  
2 Open the peaking [Select] submeto select
peaking level.  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Peaking> [Sele]  
3 Select the desired level and then presE
Magnification  
1 Press the MAGN. button.  
• ^ appears at the lower center of the screen and the center of the screen is magnified approximately  
2 times*.  
• A white frame representing the whole screen area is displayed on the top right of the screen. The orange  
frame within it represents the approximate part of the image shown magnified.  
2 If necessary, use the joystick (ÝÞ) to move the orange frame around and check other parts of the image.  
• You can move the orange frame 5 steps vertically or horizontally. Press the CANCEL button to return the  
magnification frame to the center position.  
3 Press the MAGN. button again to cancel the magnification.  
* The magnification that appears on the OLED screen and on the viewfinder screen is different. The magnification also differs  
based on the video configuration.  
             
Adjusting the Focus  
NOTES  
• Peaking/Magnification appears only on the camcorder screen. It will not appear on an external monitor  
connected to the camcorder and will not affect your recordings.  
• You can use the [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Peaking] > [Peaking 1] and [Peaking 2] settings to set the color,  
gain and frequency of the two peaking levels independently of each other.  
85  
• When using the camcorder’s screen to focus:  
- The camcorder features professional video scopes (A 108). You can display the edge monitor to help you  
focus even more accurately.  
- You can use peaking together with the edge monitor. In such case, the gain and frequency of the peaking  
effect will be adjusted automatically according to the gain settings of the edge monitor.  
Push AF  
While using manual focus (MF, A 83) or autofocus at a [Normal]  
or [Medium] speed (Normal AF, Medium AF, A 81), press the  
PUSH AF button and hold it pressed down.  
• Autofocus is temporarily activated at the highest speed (Instant AF) a
long as you hold the PUSH AF button pressed down.  
NOTES  
• All the NOTES for the autofocus section (A 82), apply Push  
AF.  
• Push AF is not available when [~ Camera [AF ode] >  
[Face AF] is set to [Face Only] and fahas etected in the  
picture.  
Detecting and Focusing On Faces  
[~ Camera Setup]  
The camcorder can detect a person’s face during autofocus mode,  
automatically focus on it, and even track it if the person moves. When  
there are a number of people in the picture, one person (with the white  
[AF Mode]  
face detection frame) will be determined to be the main subject and the  
camcorder will focus on that person’s face. You can also change the  
[Face AF]  
person selected as main subject.  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Face AF] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [AF Mode] > [Face AF]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
•
or  
will appear on the left of the screen.  
3 Point the camcorder at the subject.  
• If there is more than one person in the picture, the camcorder will automatically select one person it  
determines is the main subject. The camcorder will indicate the main subject with a white face detection  
frame and other faces with gray frames.  
• If necessary, push the joystick left/right to change the main subject when there is more than one person.  
           
Adjusting the Focus  
Options  
[Face Priority]  
: When there is no face detected, the camcorder focuses automatically on the subject at the center of  
the screen.  
[Face Only]  
[Off]:  
: When there is no face detected, the camcorder is set to manual focus.  
Standard autofocus operation with no face detection.  
86  
NOTES  
• The camcorder may mistakenly detect the faces of non-human subjects. In such case, turn face detection off.  
• In certain cases, faces may not be detected correctly. Typical examples include:  
- Faces extremely small, large, dark or bright in relation to the overall picture.  
- Faces that are turned to the side, at a diagonal or partially hidden.  
• Face detection cannot be used in the following cases:  
- When the shutter speed used is slower than 1/30 (1/24 if the frame rate is set to 23.98P).  
- When using slow & fast motion recording mode and the shooting frame rate is set to less than 24.  
- In manual focus mode while you hold the PUSH AF button pressed down.  
- During real-time proxy transfer mode or infrared mode.  
• When a subject’s face is detected, the camcorder adds an event mark to the frame (MXF clips only). You can  
then use Canon XF Utility to search for event marks in the MXF clip.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Face AF] (A 129), you can press e button to toggle between the face  
detection options.  
Focus Limit and Macro Shooting  
[~ Camera Setup]  
By default, the camcorder’s focus rane ows ting. You can  
activate the focus limit to restrict the ocus ranges range 1 cm  
(0.39 in.; at full wide-angle) to G is mited to 60 cm (2 ft.) to G  
[Focus Limit]  
(throughout the entire zoom range).  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Focus Limit] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Focus Limit]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
• Select [Off] to enable macro shooting.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Focus Limit] (A 129), you can press the button to turn the focus limit on/  
off.  
       
Image Stabilizer  
Image Stabilizer  
Use the image stabilizer to compensate for camcorder shake in order to achieve steadier shots. There are 3  
methods of image stabilization; select the method that best suits your needs.  
87  
Dynamic IS Ä: Dynamic IS compensates for a higher degree of camcorder shake, such as when shooting  
while walking, and is more effective as the zoom approaches full wide angle.  
Standard IS Å: Standard IS compensates for a lower degree of camcorder shake, such as when shooting  
while remaining stationary, and is suitable for shooting natural-looking scenes.  
Powered IS Ç: Powered IS is most effective when you are stationary and zooming in on far subjects using high  
zoom ratios (the more you approach the telephoto end). This mode is not suitable for tilting and panning shots.  
Operating modes:  
To activate Dynamic IS or Standard IS  
1 Open the OIS functions [Select] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [OIS Functions] > [Select]  
[~ Camera Setup]  
2 Select [Img Stab.] and then press SET.  
• Select [Off] instead to turn off the image stabilization, for example,  
when recording with the camcorder mounted on a tripod.  
[OIS Functions]  
[Select]  
3 Open the [Image Stabilizer] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [OIS Functions] > [Image Sta
[Img Stab.]  
4 Select [Dynamic] or [Standard] and then ET.  
• The icon of the selected mode appears om of e screen.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[OIS Functions]  
[Image Stabilizer]  
[Standard]  
To activate Powered IS  
Press the POWERED IS button to ctivatPowered IS.  
• The Powered IS icon (Ç) appears on bottom of the screen.  
• Press the POWERED IS button again to return the camcorder to the  
image stabilization method set in the menu.  
• Powered IS can be used even when [~ Camera Setup] > [OIS  
Functions] > [Select] is set to [Off].  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Img Stab.] (A 129), you  
can press the button to turn the selected image stabilization  
method on or off.  
• If the degree of camcorder shake is too high, the image  
stabilizer may not be able to compensate fully.  
• When using Dynamic IS, the edges of the picture may be  
adversely affected (ghosting, artifacts and/or dark areas  
may appear) when compensating for a high degree of  
camcorder shake.  
• When [~ Camera Setup] > [Wide-End Angle] is set to  
[Wider], [Image Stabilizer] will change automatically to  
[Standard] and it cannot be changed.  
         
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns  
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns  
Using onscreen markers allows you to make sure your subject is correctly framed and is within the appropriate  
safe area. The zebra patterns help you identify areas that are overexposed. The onscreen markers and zebra  
pattern will not affect your recordings.  
88  
Operating modes:  
Displaying Onscreen Markers  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
The camcorder offers 5 types of onscreen markers. You can display  
multiple onscreen markers simultaneously.  
[Markers]  
1 Open the [Markers] submenu.  
[Center]  
[Horizontal]  
[Grid]  
[Safe Area]  
[Aspect Marker]  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Markers]  
2 Select a marker you wish to display, select [Black] or [Gray] and  
then press SET.  
• Select [Off] to turn off the selected marker.  
• You can display multiple markers simultaneously. Repeat this sa
necessary.  
[Off]  
• If you selected [Safe Area] or [Aspect Marker], contin3.  
Otherwise, you can skip to step 4.  
3 Select [Safe Area Setting] or [Aspect Ratthe esired option and then press SET.  
4 Select [Enable], select [On] and hen presnable the onscreen markers.  
• All of the selected onscreen maers will be di.  
• Select [Off] to turn off all onscreemarker
Options  
[Center]:  
[Horizontal]: Displays a horizontal line to help you compose level shots.  
[Grid]: Displays a grid that allows you to frame your shots correctly (horizontally and vertically).  
Displays a small marker that indicates the center of the screen.  
[Safe Area]: Displays indicators that show various safe areas, such as the action safe area and text safe area.  
Available options for [Safe Area Setting] are [80%], [90%], [92.5%] and [95%].  
[Aspect Marker]: Displays markers that indicate various aspect ratios to help you keep your shot within that area.  
Available options for [Aspect Ratio] are [4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [1.66:1], [1.75:1], [1.85:1] and [2.35:1].  
Safe area 80%  
Level marker  
Aspect ratio 4:3  
     
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns  
Grid  
Center marker  
89  
NOTES  
• You can turn off all other onscreen displays, leaving only the onscreen markers (A 53).  
• If you set an assignable button to [Markers] (A 129), you can press the button to turn the onscreen markers  
on/off.  
Displaying Zebra Patterns  
The camcorder has a zebra pattern feature that shows black and  
white diagonal stripes over areas that are overexposed. This is  
displayed only on the screen and will not affect your recordings.  
There are two types of zebra patterns and you can disp
simultaneously. Zebra 1 lets you identify areas within a ce
range ( 5% of a specified level) while zebra 2 liden
areas that are over a specified level. When yooth  
simultaneously and they overlap, only bra 1 yed
those areas.  
1 Open the zebra pattern [Selectsubme.  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Zebra] > ele]  
2 Select [Zebra 1], [Zebra 2] or [Zebra 1&2] and then press  
SET.  
3 Open the zebra level submenu.  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Zebra] > [Zebra 1 Level] or [Zebra  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
2 Level]  
[Zebra]  
4 Select a zebra level, press SET and then press MENU to  
close the menu.  
[Select]  
[Zebra 1]  
5 Press the ZEBRA button to turn the selected zebra  
pattern on/off.  
• Alternatively, you can use the [£ OLED/VF Setup] >  
[Zebra] > [Setting] setting to turn the zebra pattern on/off.  
NOTES  
• You can use the [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Zebra] > [HD Output] setting to display the zebra pattern on an  
external monitor connected to the MON. terminal (  
only).  
, HD output only) or HDMI OUT terminal (HD output  
   
Setting the Time Code  
Setting the Time Code  
In  
mode, the camcorder can generate a time code signal and embed it in MXF clips. You can have the  
camcorder output the time code signal from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal*, MON. terminal* or TIME CODE terminal*  
(A 96). In  
mode, you can output the time code of the MXF clip being played back through the same  
90  
terminals. Additionally, you can superimpose the time code on video output from the MON. terminal*, HDMI OUT  
terminal or AV OUT terminal. When using a frame rate other than 23.98P, you can also select between a drop  
frame and non-drop frame time code.  
To synchronize the camcorder’s time code to an external time code generator, refer to Synchronizing  
with an External Device (A 94).  
*
only.  
Selecting the Running Mode  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[Time Code]  
[Mode]  
You can select the running mode of the camcorder’s time code.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the time code [Mode] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Mode]  
[Preset]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Regen.], you do not need to perform tof this  
procedure. If you selected [Preset] and woset time  
code’s initial value, see the following sectioe Tie Code’s  
Initial Value.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[Time Code]  
[Run]  
3 After you select [Preset], open e time code submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Co] > [R]  
4 Select the desired option and then s SET.  
[Rec Run]  
Options  
[Preset]:  
[Regen.]:  
The time code starts from an initial value you can select in  
advance. The default initial time code is 00:00:00.00. The time code’s running mode depends on the  
[Run] setting.  
[Rec Run]: The time code runs only while recording so MXF clips recorded consecutively on the same  
CF card will have continuous time codes.  
[Free Run]: The time code starts running the moment you press SET to select this option and keeps  
running regardless of the camcorder’s operation.  
The camcorder will read the selected CF card and the time code will continue from the last recorded time  
code on the CF card. The time code runs only while recording so MXF clips recorded consecutively on  
the same CF card will have continuous time codes.  
Setting the Time Code’s Initial Value  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[Time Code]  
If you set the time code mode to [Preset], you can set the initial value of  
the time code.  
1 Open the time code [Setting] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Setting]  
2 Select [Set] and then press SET.  
[Setting]  
• The time code setting screen appears with an orange selection frame indicating the hours.  
         
Setting the Time Code  
• To reset the time code to [00:00:00.00], select [Reset] instead. If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the  
time code will be reset the moment you press SET and keep running continuously from 00:00:00.00.  
3 Push the joystick up/down to set the hours and then press SET to move to the minutes.  
4 Change the rest of the fields (minutes, seconds, frame) in the same way.  
• Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the time code.  
5 Select [Set] and then press SET to close the screen.  
91  
• If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the time code will start running from the selected time code the  
moment you press SET.  
Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
You can select between a drop frame (DF) or non-drop frame (NDF) time  
code, depending on how you plan to use your recordings. However, when  
the frame rate is set to 23.98P, the time code is set to non-drop frame  
[Time Code]  
(NDF) and cannot be changed.  
[DF/NDF]  
[DF]  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [DF/NDF] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [DF/NDF]  
2 Select [DF] or [NDF] and then press SET.  
• The time code display will differ dependinettinWhen you select [DF], the time code will appear  
as [00:00:00.00]; when you select [NDF], r as 0:00:00:00].  
Putting the Time Code Disply on old  
If you set an assignable button to [Time Code Hold] (A 129), you can press the button to freeze the display of  
the time code*. While the time code display is put on hold, [H] will appear on the screen next to the time code.  
The time code continues to run normally while the time code display is on hold. When you resume the time code  
display, the current time code will be displayed.  
* The time code signal output from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal (both  
only) will not be put on hold. The  
time code superimposed on the video signal output from MON. terminal (  
will be put on hold.  
only), HDMI OUT terminal and AV OUT terminal  
Operating modes:  
About the Time Code Display  
An icon may appear next to the time code depending on the operation. Refer to the following table.  
Icon  
R
Description  
The time code is set to [Regen.].  
P
The time code is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Rec Run].  
The time code is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Free Run].  
Time code signal is coming from an external source.  
Time code display is on hold.  
F
E
H
No icon Time code during clip playback.  
       
Setting the Time Code  
NOTES  
• The frames value of the time code runs from 0 to 23 (frame rate set to 23.98P) or from 0 to 29 (all other frame  
rates).  
•
However, when [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [XF Legacy Sync] is set to [On], even when  
the frame rate is set to 23.98P, the frames value of the time code output from the TIME CODE terminal will run  
from 0 to 29.  
92  
• When you are using interval recording, frame recording or slow & fast motion recording mode, you cannot  
select the [Free Run] running mode. Conversely, when you are using pre-recording mode and when the movie  
format is set to MXF+MP4, [Free Run] is set automatically and cannot be changed.  
• When you mix drop frame and non-drop frame time codes, there might be a discontinuity in the time code at  
the point where the recording starts.  
• When you are using the [Free Run] running mode, the time code will continue running as long as the built-in  
rechargeable lithium battery is charged, even if you disconnect all other power sources. However, this is less  
accurate than when the camcorder is on.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Time Code] (A 129), you can press the button to open the  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] submenu.  
Setting the User Bit  
Setting the User Bit  
The user bit display can be selected from the date or the time of  
recording, or an identification code consisting of 8 characters in the  
hexadecimal system. There are sixteen possible characters: the numbers  
0 to 9 and the letters A to F.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
93  
[User Bit]  
[Type]  
In addition to being recorded with MXF clips, the user bit information can  
be output along with the video signal output from the 3G/HD-SDI  
terminal*, MON. terminal*, TIME CODE terminal* or HDMI OUT terminal.  
Conversely, if user bit information is being received along with an external  
time code, you can also record the external user bit on the recording  
media.  
[Setting]  
*
only.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the user bit [Type] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Type]  
2 Select the desired user bit type and then press SET.  
• Select [Setting] to set your own identification code, [Time] to use ttime as user bit, or [Date] to use the  
date as the user bit.  
• If you selected [Time] or [Date], you do not need to pthe resf the procedure. If you selected  
[Setting], continue the procedure to set the identifice.  
3 Select [Set] and then press SET.  
• The user bit setting screen appears with elecon frame on the leftmost character.  
• To reset the user bit to [00 00 000selestead.  
4 Push the joystick up/down to elect the firsacter and then press SET to move to the next  
character.  
• Change the rest of the characters the ame way.  
• Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the user bit.  
5 Select [Set] and then press SET to close the screen.  
   
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Using Genlock synchronization, you can synchronize this camcorder’s video signal to that of an external video  
device. Similarly, using an external time code signal, you can synchronize this camcorder’s time code to the  
external signal. Using the external time code signal with multiple cameras allows you to set up a multi-camera  
recording. You can also output the time code signal from this camcorder to achieve the same result. If you  
output the time code from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal to an editing device, the editor can create video with the  
same time code.  
94  
Connecting an External Device  
When synchronizing the camcorder to an external signal*, use the GENLOCK/SYNC OUT terminal. When  
synchronizing a time code signal, use the TIME CODE terminal. Be sure to set either terminal to input or output  
in advance.  
Connect the external device to the camcorder as shown in the following diagram.  
* As reference video signal (input signal) for Genlock synchronization, you can use an analog blackburst or tri-level signal.  
Connection Diagram  
GENLOCK/SYNC OUT terminal  
TIME DE rminal  
Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock Synchronization)  
When a reference sync signal (analog blackburst or tri-level signal) is input through the GENLOCK/SYNC OUT  
terminal, the phases of the camcorder’s V and H sync will automatically be synchronized to it. The phase  
difference between the external Genlock signal and the camcorder is initially set to 0. The H phase can be  
adjusted within the range of approximately 0.4 H.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [GENLOCK/SYNC OUT] submenu.  
• [¢ Video Setup] > [GENLOCK/SYNC OUT]  
[¢ Video Setup]  
2 Select [Genlock] and then press SET.  
[GENLOCK/SYNC OUT]  
[Genlock]  
3 Open the [Genlock Adjustment] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Genlock Adjustment]  
4 Adjust the H phase to the desired level (-1023 to 1023), select  
[Set] and then press SET.  
• Push the joystick up/down to select the value for each field and then  
press SET to move to the next field.  
[w Other Functions]  
[Genlock Adjustment]  
             
Synchronizing with an External Device  
NOTES  
• When [¢ Video Setup] > [3G/HD-SDI] is set to [Direct], the camcorder will synchronize with a Genlock  
signal that has the same frequency as that used for recording. However, when in addition to that, the frame  
rate is set to 23.98P, you can synchronize instead to an external 29.97 Hz or 59.94 Hz signal by setting  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [XF Legacy Sync] to [On].  
95  
• When a suitable Genlock signal is input, the Genlock synchronization stabilizes after approximately  
10 seconds.  
• When a suitable Genlock signal is detected, the U icon will flash on the upper right of the screen. When the  
camcorder locks on the external Genlock signal, the icon will stay on.  
• If the external Genlock signal is incorrect, the synchronization may not be stable. In such case, the recorded  
time code may be incorrect.  
Time Code Signal Input  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
An external SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal received from the TIME  
CODE terminal will be recorded as the time code. The user bit of the  
external timing signal can also be recorded with MXF clips. Before  
[Time Code]  
connecting the device, set the TIME CODE terminal to input. Also, you  
must set the running mode of the time code to [Free Run] (A 90)
[TC In/Out]  
[In]  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [TC In/Out] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [T
2 Select [In] and then press SE
Recording the User Bit of an EernaSignal  
[¤ TC/UB Setup]  
[User Bit]  
The user bit of an external time code signal can also be recorded with  
MXF clips along with the time code itself.  
1 Open the user bit [Recording Mode] submenu.  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Recording Mode]  
2 Select [External] and then press SET.  
[Recording Mode]  
[Internal]  
NOTES  
• The camcorder will synchronize with an external time code that has the  
same frequency as that used for recording. However, when the frame rate is set to 23.98P, you can  
synchronize instead to a 30-frame time code signal by setting [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [XF  
Legacy Sync] to [On].  
• When a suitable time code signal is received, the camcorder’s own time code will be synchronized to it and the  
synchronization will be maintained even if you disconnect the cable from the TIME CODE terminal. However,  
performing any of the following actions while the cable is not connected will cause the synchronization to be  
disrupted; the correct time code will be restored once you reconnect the cable.  
- Turning the camcorder off/on  
- Changing the operating mode to  
- Changing the video configuration  
mode  
• If the external time code signal is incorrect or there is no input signal, the internal time code set in the  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] submenu will be recorded instead.  
• While a time code signal is being received, the external time code’s drop-frame bit will be used.  
       
Synchronizing with an External Device  
Reference Video Signal Output  
After changing the GENLOCK/SYNC OUT terminal’s function to [SYNC Output], you can output the camcorder’s  
video signal as a reference sync signal (HD tri-level signal) to synchronize an external device to this camcorder.  
The reference video signal output will have the same frequency as the signal output from the 3G/HD-SDI  
terminal.  
96  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [GENLOCK/SYNC OUT] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [GENLOCK/SYNC OUT]  
[¢ Video Setup]  
2 Select [SYNC Output] and then press SET.  
[GENLOCK/SYNC OUT]  
• If necessary, change the scan mode (P or PsF) with the [¢ Video  
Setup] > [SYNC Scan Mode] setting.  
[Genlock]  
• If necessary to synchronize with older XF camcorders, you can  
change the reference output signal with the [¤ TC/UB Setup] >  
[Time Code] > [XF Legacy Sync] setting.  
Synchronization signals  
Signal output frohe GENLOCK/SYNC OUT terminal  
Video output from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal  
1
mode  
[XF Legacy S
[XF Lcy Sync] set to  
Resolution  
Frame rate  
[Off]  
[On]  
59.94i / 59.94P  
29.97 (P/PsF)  
23.98P  
59.94
1920x1080  
P/Ps
1080/59.94i  
1080/59.94i  
2
/PsF)  
59.94
94P  
720/29.97P  
720/23.98P  
1280x720  
29.97P  
720/59.94P  
720/59.94P  
23.98P  
1
2
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [XF Legacy Sync].  
You can select P or PsF output with the [¢ Video Setup] > [SYNC Scan Mode] setting.  
Time Code Signal Output  
The time code will be output from the TIME CODE terminal as an SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal. The user  
bit will also be output. Before connecting the device, set [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [TC In/Out] to  
[Out] to change the TIME CODE terminal to output (A 95).  
The embedded time code will be output also from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal and the MON. terminal. Additionally,  
you can set [¢ Video setup] > [HDMI Time Code] to [On], to output the embedded time code also from the  
HDMI OUT terminal.  
Operating modes:  
NOTES  
• The camcorder will output a time code that has the same frequency as that used for recording. When the  
frame rate is set to 23.98P, you can output instead a 30-frame time code signal by setting [¤ TC/UB  
Setup] > [Time Code] > [XF Legacy Sync] to [On].  
           
Synchronizing with an External Device  
• The user bit of the time code signal is output while the camcorder is recording MXF clips in  
mode or  
during playback of MXF clips in  
mode. When the frame rate is set to 23.98P and [¤ TC/UB Setup]  
> [User Bit] > [Output Mode] is set to [Pulldown], the signal is converted to 59.94i / 59.94P using the 2:3  
pulldown method. An external device can receive the data used in this conversion (2:3 pulldown data) to  
convert the signal to the original 1080/23.98P specifications.  
97  
Recording Audio  
Recording Audio  
The camcorder features 4-channel or 2-channel linear PCM audio recording and playback for MXF clips and  
2-channel AAC audio recording and playback for MP4 clips. The sampling frequency is 48 kHz for all audio  
recording modes. You can record audio using commercially available microphones (INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminal,  
MIC terminal), line input (INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminal) or the built-in microphone.  
98  
The same audio channels that are being recorded in the camcorder can also be output with the video signal from  
the 3G/HD-SDI terminal* or MON. terminal*. You can record this audio signal on an external recorder.  
*
only.  
Operating modes:  
Audio Settings and Recorded Audio Channels  
Which audio inputs are recorded to which audio channels is determined by a combination of menu settings,  
audio-related controls on the camcorder and whether an external microphone is connected to the MIC terminal.  
The following table gives an overview of the possible combinations.  
For MXF clips, all the combinations listed are available. For MP4 clips, when the movie format is set to MP4 or to  
MXF+MP4 using 2-channel audio recording, only the combinations mard as A are available. When the movie  
format is set to MXF+MP4 using 4-channel audio recording, with t[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] >  
[MP4 Channels] setting you can select which two channels e four or C) to record with the MP4 clip.  
2-channel audio recording  
orded audio channels/  
Menu settings  
[4-Channel  
AUDIO IN selection switches  
audio sources  
2
[CH2 Input]  
CH1  
CH2  
CH1  
CH2  
1
Input]  
INPUT 2  
terminal  
(XLR)  
[INPUT 2]  
[INPUT 1]  
–
–
INPUT 2  
INPUT 1  
terminal  
(XLR)  
INPUT 1  
terminal  
(XLR)  
INPUT 1  
Built-in  
No  
Yes  
No  
microphone  
(monaural)  
INT.MIC/MIC  
INPUT 2  
MIC terminal  
(monaural)  
A
[Off] (2)  
Built-in  
microphone  
(monaural)  
INPUT 2  
terminal  
(XLR)  
–
MIC terminal  
(monaural)  
Yes  
No  
INT.MIC/MIC  
Built-in  
Built-in  
microphone microphone  
(L) (R)  
MIC terminal MIC terminal  
(L) (R)  
INT.MIC/MIC  
Yes  
         
Recording Audio  
4-channel audio recording  
Menu settings AUDIO IN selection switches  
[4-Channel  
Recorded audio channels/audio sources  
MIC terminal  
used  
2
[CH2 Input]  
CH1  
CH2  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
1
Input]  
99  
Built-in  
Built-in  
No  
Yes  
No  
microphone microphone  
(L) (R)  
MIC terminal MIC terminal  
INPUT 2  
terminal  
(XLR)  
[INPUT 2]  
[INPUT 1]  
INPUT 1  
terminal  
(XLR)  
(L)  
(R)  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
Built-in  
Built-in  
microphone microphone  
(L) (R)  
MIC terminal MIC terminal  
INPUT 1  
terminal  
(XLR)  
Yes  
No  
(L)  
(R)  
Built-in  
Built-in  
Built-in  
microphone microphone microphone  
(monaural) (L) (R)  
MIC terminal MIC terminal MIC terminal  
INPUT 1  
terminal  
(XLR)  
[On] (4)  
INPUT 1  
INT.MIC/MIC  
INPUT 2  
Yes  
No  
(monaural)  
(L)  
(R)  
Buin  
micropho
aural)  
Built-in  
Built-in  
microphone microphone  
(L) (R)  
MIC terminal MIC terminal  
INPUT 2  
erminal  
LR)  
–
minal  
naural)  
Yes  
(L)  
(R)  
INT.MIC/MIC  
uilt-in  
Built-in  
miophone microphone  
(L) (R)  
MIC terminal MIC terminal  
(L) (R)  
Built-in  
Built-in  
INT.MIC/MIC  
microphone microphone  
(L) (R)  
Yes  
B
C
1
2
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [4-Channel Input]. The number in parentheses indicates the number of audio channels  
recorded.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [CH2 Input].  
NOTES  
• On the [Audio] status screen (A 211), you can check the audio level adjustment mode and input source for  
each of the audio channels.  
Recording Audio  
Selecting the Number of Recorded Audio Channels  
You can select how many audio channels (2 or 4) will be recorded with MXF clips. Since MP4 clips can only  
record 2 audio channels, when the movie format is set to MXF+MP4 using 4-channel audio recording, you can  
select which 2 audio channels will be recorded with the MP4 clip.  
100  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [4-Channel Input] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [4-Channel Input]  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
2 Select [On] for 4-channel audio recording or [Off] for 2-channel  
[Audio Input]  
audio recording and then press SET.  
• During 4-channel audio recording,  
screen.  
will appear on the right of the  
[4-Channel Input]  
[Off]  
Selecting the Audio Channels for MP4 Clips  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [MP4 Channels] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MP4 Channels]  
2 Select [CH1/CH2] or [CH3/CH4] and the T.  
[MP4 Channels]  
[CH1/CH2]  
Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Input Source to the Camcorder  
To each of the INPUT terminals you can attach commercially available microphones or analog line in sources with  
an XLR connector. To the MIC terminal you can attach commercially available condenser microphones with their  
own power supply, and a ∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini plug. When using an external microphone, you can use the  
camcorder’s microphone holder.  
Follow the procedure below to attach a microphone (refer also to the following illustration). To connect an  
external device to the camcorder, plug the device’s cable into the camcorder’s XLR terminal (ብ).  
1 Loosen the microphone lock screw (ቢ), open the microphone holder and insert the microphone (ባ).  
2 Tighten the lock screw and put the microphone cable through the microphone cable clamp under  
the microphone holder (ቤ).  
3 Plug the microphone cable into the desired INPUT terminal (ብ) or the MIC terminal (ቦ).  
             
Recording Audio  
ቢ
101  
ባ
Microphone  
lock screw  
INPUT 1/INPUT 2  
terminals  
ብ
ቦ
ቤ
MIC terminal  
Cable clamp  
Using the Built-in Microphone or MIC Terminal  
Set the AUDIO IN selection switch of the desired channel  
to INT.MIC/MIC.  
• If you connect a microphone to the MIC terminal while the  
AUDIO IN switch is set to INT.MIC/MIC, the camcorder will  
switch automatically from the built-in microphone to the  
external microphone.  
     
Recording Audio  
Selecting the Microphone’s Low-Cut Filter  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
The setting is separate for the built-in microphone and for an external  
microphone connected to the MIC terminal.  
[Audio Input]  
1 Open the [Int. Mic Low Cut] or [MIC Low Cut] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [Int. Mic Low Cut] or  
[MIC Low Cut]  
102  
[Int. Mic Low Cut]  
[MIC Low Cut]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
[Off]  
Options  
[Off]:  
For recording audio under usual conditions.  
For recording mainly people’s voices.  
[LC1]*:  
[LC2]*, [On]**: For reducing the background sound of wind when recording outdoors in windy surroundings (for  
example, on a beach or close to buildings). Note that when you use this setting some low-frequency  
sounds may be suppressed along with the sound of wind.  
*
Only for [Int. Mic Low Cut].  
** Only for [MIC Low Cut].  
Selecting the Built-in Microphone’s Sensitivity  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
1 Open the [Int. Mic Sensitivity] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [Int. Mic Sensitivity]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
[Int. Mic Sensitivity]  
[Normal]  
Options  
[Normal]:  
[High]:  
For recording audio under usual co
For recording audio at a igher volum
Activating the Microphone Atteuator  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
If the audio level is too high and the sound sounds distorted when  
recording with the built-in microphone or an external microphone  
connected to the MIC terminal, activate the microphone attenuator (12 dB  
for the built-in microphone, 20 dB for an external microphone).  
[Audio Input]  
[Int. Mic Att.]  
[MIC Att.]  
1 Open the [Int. Mic Att.] or [MIC Att.] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [Int. Mic Att.] or [MIC Att.]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
[Off]  
 
Recording Audio  
Using the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 Terminals  
Using the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals, you can record audio independently to two audio channels from a  
microphone or analog audio input source.  
1
Set the AUDIO IN selection switch for CH1 to INPUT 1  
and the AUDIO IN selection switch for CH2 to INPUT 2.  
103  
CH1/CH2  
– dials  
2 To select the audio source, set the INPUT 1 or INPUT 2  
switch to LINE or MIC as necessary.  
CH1/CH2 audio  
level switches  
• To supply a microphone with phantom power, set the  
switch to MIC+48V instead. Make sure to connect the  
microphone first, before turning the phantom power on.  
Keep the microphone connected when turning off the  
phantom power.  
INPUT 1/INPUT 2  
audio source  
IMPORTANT  
selection switches  
• When connecting a microphone or device that does not  
support phantom power, make sure to set the INPUT 1/  
INPUT 2 switch to MIC or LINE, respectively. If you set the  
switch to MIC+48V, the microphone or device may be  
damaged.  
AUDIO IN selection  
switches  
Recording a Single Audio Input TwAudio  
Channels  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
By default, each XLR audio input is recorded to a separate audio channel  
(INPUT 1 to CH1 and INPUT 2 to CH2). If necessary (for example, as an  
audio backup recording), you can the audio input into the INPUT 1  
terminal to both audio channels, CH1 and CH2. In that case, you can  
adjust the audio recording levels of each channel independently of each  
other.  
[Audio Input]  
[CH2 Input]  
[INPUT 2]  
1 Open the [CH2 Input] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [CH2 Input]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
[INPUT 2]:  
Records audio to each channel separately. Audio input into INPUT 1 is recorded to CH1, while audio  
input into INPUT 2 is recorded to CH2.  
[INPUT 1]:  
Audio input into INPUT 1 is recorded to both channels. Audio input into INPUT 2 will not be recorded.  
         
Recording Audio  
Selecting the Microphone’s Sensitivity  
When the AUDIO IN selection switch is set to INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 and the corresponding INPUT 1/INPUT 2  
switch is set to MIC or MIC+48V, you can select the microphone sensitivity of the external microphone.  
104  
1 Open the desired INPUT terminal’s sensitivity submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [INPUT 1 Mic Trimming] or [INPUT 2 Mic Trimming]  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
Available Sensitivity Levels  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
+12 dB  
+6 dB  
0 dB  
-6 dB  
-12 dB  
[Audio Input]  
[INPUT 1 Mic Trimming]  
[INPUT 2 Mic Trimming]  
[0 dB]  
Activating the Microphone’s Attenuator  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
When the AUDIO IN selection switch is set to INPUT 1 or Iand the  
corresponding INPUT 1/INPUT 2 switch is set to MIC or Myou  
can activate the external microphone's attenuatB).  
[Audio Input]  
1 Open the desired INPUT terminal’s micronuar  
submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Inpu> [INPUT 1 Mtt.] or [INPUT  
[INPUT 1 Mic Att.]  
[INPUT 2 Mic Att.]  
2 Mic Att.]  
[Off]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
   
Recording Audio  
Adjusting the Audio Level  
For CH1 and CH2, you can set the audio recording level to automatic or manual adjustment separately for each  
channel. However, when the AUDIO IN selection switches for CH1 and CH2 are both set to INT.MIC/MIC (built-in  
microphone or external microphone connected to the MIC terminal), the audio recording level settings for CH1  
are applied also to CH2.  
105  
CH1/CH2: Automatic Audio Level Adjustment  
Set the audio level switch of the desired channel to A  
(automatic) to let the camcorder automatically adjust that  
channel’s audio level.  
NOTES  
• When both CH1 and CH2 are set to record audio input from  
the INPUT 1/INPUT terminals and both INPUT 1 and INPUT 2  
switches are set to the same audio source (external  
microphone or external line input), if the audio level for both  
channels is set to automatic, you can use the [¡ Audio  
Setup] > [Audio Input] > [INPUT 1&2 ALC Link] setting to  
link the audio level adjustment of both channels.  
CH1/CH2: Manual Audio Level Adjustment  
You can set the audio level for each channel manually fro
to 18 dB.  
1 Set the audio level switch of the desired ch
2 Turn the corresponding – al to adjust evel.  
• For reference, 0 corresponds t-G, 5 correspnds to  
0 dB, and 10 corresponds to +dB.  
• As a guideline, adjust the audio recg level so that the  
audio level meter on the screen will go to the right of the  
-18 dB mark (one mark right of the -20 dB mark) only  
occasionally.  
• Closing the protective cover will prevent the audio controls  
from being changed inadvertently.  
     
Recording Audio  
CH3/CH4: Audio Level Adjustment  
The audio level for CH3 and CH4 can only be adjusted when [¡ Audio  
Setup] > [Audio Input] > [4-Channel Input] is set to [On] (4-channel  
audio recording). The audio recording level settings are common to both  
CH3 and CH4.  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
106  
1 Open the [CH3/CH4 Mode] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [CH3/CH4 Mode]  
[CH3/CH4 Mode]  
[Automatic]  
2 Select [Automatic] or [Manual] and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Automatic], you do not need to perform the rest of the  
procedure. If you selected [Manual], continue the procedure to set the  
audio recording level.  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Input]  
[CH3/CH4 Level]  
[50]  
3 Open the [CH3/CH4 Level] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [CH3/CH4 Level]  
4 Push the joystick up/down to set the audio recording level and  
then press SET.  
• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level  
meter on the screen will go to the right of the -18 dB mark (one mark  
right of the -20 dB mark) only occasionally.  
NOTES  
• When recording audio input from the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 , if eitheCH1 or CH2 is set to manual audio  
level adjustment, you can also activate the audk limprevent audio distortions. When activated, the  
audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of aignwhen they exceed -6 dBFS. Use the [¡ Audio  
Setup] > [Audio Input] > [INPUT 1&2 Limi
• We recommend using headphonewhen adjuudio level. If the input level is too high, audio may  
become distorted even if the audievel indicator s an appropriate level.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Adio Lev(A 129), you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio  
level indicator on and off.  
Monitoring the Audio with Headphones  
You can connect to the × (headphone) terminal any pair of  
headphones with a ∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini plug to monitor  
the recorded audio. Press the HEADPHONE +/- buttons to  
adjust the volume.  
NOTES  
× (headphone)  
• You can also adjust the headphone volume with the  
terminal  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Headphone  
Volume] setting.  
• When you are monitoring the audio, you can choose to  
synchronize the audio signal with the video signal or  
monitor the audio in real time. Use the [¡ Audio Setup]  
> [Audio Output] > [Monitor Delay] setting to select the  
method.  
           
Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal  
Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal  
You can have the camcorder generate and record color bars and a 1 kHz audio reference signal and output  
1
1
them from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal , MON. terminal , HDMI OUT terminal, AV OUT terminal and × (headphone)  
2
terminal .  
107  
1
2
only.  
Outputs audio reference signal only.  
Operating modes:  
Recording Color Bars  
[~ Camera Setup]  
You can choose between SMPTE standard-definition color bars and ARIB  
multi-format HDTV color bars.  
[Color Bars]  
1 Open the color bars [Type] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Bars] > [Type]  
[Type]  
2 Select the type of color bars and then press SET.  
[SMPTE]  
3 Open the [Enable] submenu to activate the color bars.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Bars] > [Enable]  
4 Select [On] and then press SET.  
• The selected color bars appear on the screen and wiorded  
when you press the START/STOP button.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Color Bars]  
[Enable]  
• Turning the camcorder off or changing thmodto  
mode will deactivate the color brs.  
NOTES  
[Off]  
• When you want to display the color rs, t the custom picture file to  
[Off] (A 132) or set the [Other Functions] > [Over 100%] setting in the  
custom picture file to [Through] (A 140).  
• If you set an assignable button to [Color Bars] (A 129), you can press the button turn the color bars on/off.  
Recording an Audio Reference Signal  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
The camcorder can output a 1 kHz audio reference signal with the color  
bars.  
[Audio Input]  
1 Open the [1 kHz Tone] submenu.  
[1 kHz Tone]  
[Off]  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [1 kHz Tone]  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
• Available levels are -12 dB, -18 dB and -20 dB.  
• Select [Off] to turn off the signal.  
• The signal is output at the selected level and will be recorded when you press the START/STOP button.  
         
Video Scopes  
Video Scopes  
The camcorder can display a simplified waveform monitor or vectorscope. It can also display an edge monitor*  
to help you focus. The video scopes appear only on the OLED screen. They do not appear in the viewfinder or  
on an external monitor.  
108  
* The edge monitor looks at the focus of the entire picture and displays the results as a waveform. The edge monitor is available  
only in  
mode.  
Displaying a Video Scope  
Operating modes:  
Press the WFM button.  
• The waveform monitor will appear in a window on the lower  
right of the screen.  
• You can repeatedly press the WFM button to activate the  
video scopes in the following sequence.  
Waveform monitor ꢀ Vectorscope ꢀ Edge monitor ꢀ Off  
• Alternatively, you can display the video scopes using  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Setting]. Se
[WFM] for the waveform monitor, [VS] for the vectorscope
[Edge Mon.] for the edge monitor.  
Configuring the Waveform Mnitor  
[w Other Functions]  
[WFM (OLED)]  
[Waveform Monitor]  
[Type]  
The camcorder’s waveform monitor functioffers 5 modes. You can also  
change the gain.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the waveform monitor [Type] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Waveform Monitor] >  
[Type]  
[Line]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform  
steps 3 and 4.  
3 Open the waveform monitor [Gain] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Waveform Monitor] > [Gain]  
4 Select [1x] or [2x] and then press SET.  
Options  
[Line]:  
Sets the waveform monitor to line display mode.  
[Line+Spot]: The waveform of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Line] mode waveform.  
[Field]:  
Sets the waveform monitor to field display mode.  
Functions like an RGB parade scope.  
[RGB]:  
[YPbPr]:  
Functions like a YPbPr parade scope.  
             
Video Scopes  
Configuring the Vectorscope  
[w Other Functions]  
The camcorder’s vectorscope function offers 2 modes. You can also  
change the gain.  
[WFM (OLED)]  
[Vectorscope]  
[Type]  
109  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the vectorscope [Type] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Vectorscope] > [Type]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform  
steps 3 and 4.  
[Normal]  
3 Open the vectorscope [Gain] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Vectorscope] > [Gain]  
4 Select [1x] or [5x] and then press SET.  
Options  
[Spot]:  
The color signal of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Normal] mode waveform.  
Displays the vectorscope.  
[Normal]:  
Configuring the Edge Monitor  
[w Other Functions]  
[WFM (OLED)]  
[Edge Monitor]  
[Type]  
Using this video scope allows you to focus wcisi. You can  
use the edge monitor along with the r foce futions  
(A 84). The edge monitor feature2 modes.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the edge monitor [Type] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Edge Monitor] > [Type]  
[Type 1]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform  
steps 3 and 4.  
3 Open the edge monitor [Gain] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (OLED)] > [Edge Monitor] > [Gain]  
4 Select the desired gain value and then press SET.  
Options  
[Type 1]:  
The waveform that represents the focus of the entire picture is displayed in green. In addition, the  
waveform of the area in the three red frames is displayed in red on top of the previous waveform.  
[Type 2]:  
This mode displays the edge monitor with the waveform monitor in [Line+Spot] mode. The waveform  
monitor appears on the left in green while the edge monitor appears on the right in blue. The waveform of  
the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the edge monitor waveform.  
       
Adding Marks to MXF Clips while Recording  
Adding Marks to MXF Clips while Recording  
When recording MXF clips, you can flag an important shot in a clip by adding a “shot mark” (!). There are two  
types of shot marks, shot mark 1 (") and shot mark 2 (#), and you can add either or both types to a single MXF  
clip. You can also add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the entire clip to flag clips you want to set apart.  
110  
When the camcorder is in  
mode, you can add or delete shot marks (A 157). You can also display an  
index screen of all the shot marks (A 155), allowing you to find a particular scene in a clip more quickly.  
Operating modes:  
Adding Shot Marks while Recording  
To add a shot mark to a clip while recording, you must first set in advance an assignable button to [Add Shot  
Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2].  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] (A 129).  
• To add both shot marks, set one assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] and another assignable button to  
[Add Shot Mark 2].  
2 While you are recording, press the assignable button at thbegning of the shot you wish to mark.  
• A message indicating the shot mark will appear and the ected mark will be added to the current  
frame of the clip.  
NOTES  
• Up to 100 shot marks (" and # marks combe aded to a single MXF clip.  
• There may be up to a 0.5 second lay from wess the button to when the camcorder adds the shot  
mark.  
• When you are using interval recordg or frae recording mode, you cannot add shot marks to a clip.  
• When an MXF clip contains either shoa! will appear next to the clip’s thumbnail in the playback index  
screen.  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last Clip Recorded  
After recording an important MXF clip, you can add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the clip to flag it and  
set it apart. When the camcorder is in  
mode, you can display an index screen that contains only clips with  
an $ mark or only clips with a % mark (A 146). Furthermore, you can use the $ mark to protect important  
clips, as MXF clips with an $ mark cannot be deleted.  
To add an $ mark or % mark to the last clip recorded in  
mode, you must first set in advance an  
assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark].  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 129).  
• To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another  
assignable button to [Add % Mark].  
2 After recording a clip, press the assignable button.  
• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip.  
NOTES  
• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and a % mark at the same time.  
           
Using Metadata  
Using Metadata  
The camcorder automatically adds metadata to MXF clips while they are being recorded. You can use Canon XF  
Utility to check and search for specific metadata. You can also create and transfer a user memo remotely using  
the Browser Remote application (A 182).  
111  
Metadata components  
Entering content  
Canon XF Utility  
Checking content  
Metadata  
Camcorder  
–
Browser Remote  
Canon XF Utility  
1
User Memo: clip title, creator, location and description.  
GPS information: altitude, latitude and longitude.  
Recording data: Shutter speed, gain value, etc.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
Ü
Ü
Ü
2
3
Ü
Ü
4
–
–
Unique Material Identifiers (UMID): country, organization  
and user codes based on the SMPTE standard.  
Ü
(A 208)  
–
–
–
1
2
User memo files need to be created using the software and saved on the SD card in advance.  
Only when an optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder. While recording, GPS information is recorded  
automatically by the camcorder (A 114).  
GPS information can only be added to clips already recorded.  
Recording data is logged automatically by the camcorder.  
3
4
Operating modes:  
Setting a User Memo Created with XF ility  
Before you can add a user memo, you must finon F Utility (A 168). Next, create the user memo  
and save it to an SD card. Once yoinsert the the camcorder and select the user memo, it will be  
added to MXF clips you record.  
For details on using the software, reto the struction manual that is installed with Canon XF Utility (A 170).  
1 Use Canon XF Utility to save a user memo to an SD card.  
• For details, refer to Managing User Memo Profiles in the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual.  
2 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the camcorder.  
3 Open the metadata [Setting] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Set Metadata] > [Setting]  
[w Other Functions]  
4 Select [SD Card] and then press SET.  
[MXF]  
5 Open the [User Memo] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Set Metadata] > [User Memo]  
[Set Metadata]  
6 Select the file name of the desired user memo and then press SET.  
[Setting]  
• The Q icon appears on the right of the screen.  
• Select [Off] to record clips without a user memo.  
[SD Card]  
       
Using Metadata  
[w Other Functions]  
[MXF]  
NOTES  
• After you set a user memo, do not remove the SD card while you are  
recording. If the SD card is removed, the user memo will not be added  
to MXF clips.  
112  
• You must set the user memo before you start recording for it to be added to  
MXF clips. You cannot change the user memo already added to an MXF clip  
[Set Metadata]  
[User Memo]  
using the camcorder but you can do so with Canon XF Utility  
.
Setting a User Memo Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can create a user memo profile and transfer it to the  
camcorder from a connected device using the Browser Remote application. Using the Browser Remote  
application you have two additional advantages over user memos created with Canon XF Utility: you can  
change the user memo of the last clip recorded, even if you did not specify a user memo in advance; and you  
can enter manually the GPS information of your shooting location as long as the optional GP-E2 GPS receiver is  
not connected to the camcorder.  
1 Press the [Metadata Input] tab on the Browser Remote screen.  
2 Press [  
Activate].  
• Alternatively, on the camcorder, you can set [w Other Fns] > XF] > [Set Metadata] > [Setting] to  
[Remote].  
3 Fill the necessary user memo and GPS infion f.  
• You can press [Clear] to clear the informatinto ach field.  
4 Press one of the transfer optionto ansadata to the camcorder.  
• [Metadata correctly transferredill be displayhe Browser Remote screen and the metadata will be  
transferred and applied to the cls on the amcorder.  
5 Press ^ to close the message.  
Options  
[Apply from Next]: Adds the metadata you set in Browser Remote to all MXF clips recorded after the transfer.  
[Overwrite Prev.]: Only available after recording an MXF clip. Adds the metadata you set in Browser Remote to all MXF  
clips recorded after the transfer and also to the last MXF clip recorded (overwriting any user memo that  
may have been recorded previously with the clip).  
[Overwrite]: Only available while recording an MXF clip. Adds the metadata you set in Browser Remote to the MXF  
clip that is being recorded (overwriting any previous user memo). It will also add this metadata to all MXF  
clips recorded after the transfer.  
 
Using Metadata  
113  
NOTES  
• The metadata sent to the camcorder from Browser Remote will be lin the following cases.  
- If the camcorder was turned off.  
- If the [w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Set MetadaSetting] tting was changed.  
• Using Browser Remote ([  
Activate] button) you can rity to madata sent through the application.  
However, you cannot return the priority back SD cTo use a user memo file saved on the SD card  
you will need to set [w Other Functions] > [Set etadata] > [Setting] to [SD Card] on the  
camcorder itself.  
• Metadata sent to the camcorder om Browsewill not be added to relay clips recorded before the  
switch to the current CF card.  
Recording GPS Information (Geotagging)  
Recording GPS Information (Geotagging)  
When the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder’s USB terminal, the camcorder will  
automatically record the GPS information (longitude, latitude and altitude) to every recording you make (MXF  
clips, MP4 clips and photos). For MP4 clips and photos, the UTC (coordinated universal time) date and time will  
be recorded as well. For MXF clips, the GPS information is recorded as part of the clip's metadata and can be  
used to organize and search recordings using Canon XF Utility (A 168).  
114  
In  
mode, you can check whether a recording contains GPS information or not (A 145, 151).  
Connecting the GPS Receiver  
Turn off the camcorder and the receiver. Connect the receiver to the camcorder's USB terminal using the USB  
cable*. While recording, place the receiver in the carrying case* and attach it to the camcorder's grip belt or carry  
it on your person. For details about connecting and using the receiver, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.  
* Supplied with the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver.  
Activating the GPS Receiver  
Operating modes:  
Turn on the camcorder and receiver.  
• The  
icon appears on the right of the screen and will blink as the receiver tries to acquire satellite signals.  
• When satellite signals are correctly acquired, the  
icon will stay continuously on. GPS functions will be  
activated and clips and photos recorded thereafter will be geotagged.  
Adjusting the Date/Time Automatically According to GPS Position  
Setting [w Other Functions] > [GPS Auto Time] to [On], you can have the camcorder automatically adjust its  
date and time settings according to the information received from the GPS signal while an optional GP-E2  
GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder.  
• When [w Other Functions] > [GPS Auto Time] is set to [On], [w Other Functions] > [Time Zone] and  
settings in the [w Other Functions] > [Set Clock] submenu will not be available.  
• While the Browser Remote application is in use, the automatic adjustment of the date/time will be  
deactivated.  
     
Recording GPS Information (Geotagging)  
IMPORTANT  
• In certain countries/regions, the use of GPS may be restricted. Be sure to use the GPS receiver in accordance  
with local laws and regulations of the country/region where the receiver is used. Be particularly careful when  
traveling outside of your home country.  
115  
• Be careful about using the GPS receiver in places where the use of electronic devices is restricted.  
• The GPS information recorded with clips and photos may contain data that can lead others to locate or  
identify you. Be careful when sharing geotagged recordings with others or when uploading them to the Web.  
• Do not leave the GPS receiver near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors.  
NOTES  
• On the [GPS Information Display] status screen (A 217), you can check the current GPS information and  
satellite signal strength.  
• GPS signal reception may take some time after replacing the battery pack or when first turning on the  
camcorder after a long period without use.  
• The camcorder is not compatible with the GPS receiver’s digital compass and positioning interval functions.  
Also, the [Set now] option is not available for the [w Other Functions] > [GPS Auto Time] setting.  
• GPS information will not be recorded with photos captured from a clip.  
Reviewing a Recording  
Reviewing a Recording  
When the camcorder is in  
was recorded.  
mode, you can review the last clip that  
[w Other Functions]  
[Review Recording]  
[Entire Clip]  
116  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Review Recording] submenu to set the review length.  
[w Other Functions] > [Review Recording]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
3 After you finish recording, press the u button.  
• The last clip that was recorded is played back without  
audio for the selected duration. [Ð REVIEW] appears at  
the top of the screen.  
• Press the CANCEL button to stop reviewing the clip and  
change the camcorder back to record pause mode.  
• After the clip finishes playing back, the camcorder returns  
to record pause mode.  
Options  
[Entire Clip]: Allows you to review the entire clip.  
[Last 4 sec]: Allows you to review just the last 4 seconds of
clip.  
NOTES  
• Clips cannot be reviewed when ung a speciamode (A 118) or when the movie format is set to  
MXF+MP4 (A 55).  
• If the camcorder switched CF cards uring recording of an MXF clip, the camcorder will play back the clip  
on the CF card most recently recorded
   
File Numbering  
File Numbering  
MP4 clips and photos are automatically assigned consecutive numbers from 0001 to 9999, and stored on the  
SD card in folders containing up to 500 recordings. Folders are numbered from 100 to 999 and the last 4 digits  
of the folder name indicate the date when the folder was created. You can select the file numbering method to  
be used. We recommend using the [Continuous] setting.  
117  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [File Numbering] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [File Numbering]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 Select the desired option and the press SET.  
[File Numbering]  
Options  
[Reset]:  
[Continuous]  
File numbers will restart from 100-0001 every time you insert  
a new SD card. If an SD card already contains previous  
recordings, file numbers will continue from the number  
following that of the last file on the SD card.  
[Continuous]: File numbers will continue from the number following that of  
the last MP4 clip or photo recorded with the camcorder.  
NOTES  
• The file number indicates the name and location of the e SD ca. For example, an MP4 clip/photo  
numbered 101-0107 that was recorded on 3 mber, cated in the “DCIM\101-1103” folder as the file  
“MVI_0107.MP4” or “IMG_0107.JPG”.  
     
Special Recording Modes  
Special Recording Modes  
The camcorder features 4 special recording modes for recording MXF clips. Only pre-recording is available for  
recording MP4 clips.  
118  
Interval recording: The camcorder will automatically record a pre-defined number of frames at a pre-defined  
interval. This mode is suitable for recording subjects with little movement, such as natural surroundings or plants.  
Frame recording: The camcorder will record a pre-defined number of frames every time you press the START/  
STOP button. This mode is suitable for recording stop motion animation.  
Slow & fast motion recording: This mode allows you to change the shooting frame rate to achieve a slow motion  
or fast motion effect during playback.  
Pre-recording: The camcorder will start recording approximately 3 seconds before you press the START/STOP  
button. This is especially useful when it is difficult to predict when to start recording.  
Interval Recording Mode  
[w Other Functions]  
Set the interval and number of frames in advance. Sound is not recorded  
in this special recording mode.  
[Interval Recording]  
Operating modes:  
[Interval]  
Configuring Interval Recording Mode  
[1 sec]  
1 Open the [Interval] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Interval Recording]
2 Select the desired interval and thepress SET.  
• See the following table for the ailable intervals.  
3 Select [Recorded Frames], select thdesirenumber of frames and  
then press SET.  
[w Other Functions]  
[Interval Recording]  
[Recorded Frames]  
[1]  
• Available options depend on the frame rate used: 1, 3, 6 or 9 (23.98P,  
29.97P, 59.94i), or 2, 6 or 12 (59.94P).  
Available intervals  
1 sec  
10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec  
4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min  
2 sec  
3 sec  
4 sec  
5 sec  
6 sec  
7 sec  
1 min  
8 sec  
2 min  
9 sec  
3 min  
10 min  
Activating Interval Recording Mode and Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
[Special Recording]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Special Recording] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Recording]  
2 Select [Interval Recording] and then press SET.  
• [INT STBY] appears at the top of the screen (with [INT] flashing).  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The camcorder automatically records the set number of frames at the set interval.  
• The front and rear tally lamps illuminate.  
• [INT STBY] changes to [Ü INT REC] while recording frames and [Ü INT STBY] while between intervals.  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.  
• All of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip.  
         
Special Recording Modes  
• The front and rear tally lamps go out and [INT STBY] appears at the top of the screen (with [INT] flashing).  
NOTES  
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.  
119  
• The interval and the number of frames recorded cannot be changed while recording.  
• Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip.  
• Interval recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the movie format or video configuration.  
• During this special recording mode, the time code’s running mode (A 90) can be set to [Rec Run] or [Regen.]  
and the time code advances by the number of frames recorded. If the time code’s running mode is set to [Free  
Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to [Rec Run] during  
special recording mode. When the special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its  
previous setting.  
•
During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the TIME CODE terminal,  
3G/HD-SDI terminal or MON. terminal.  
Frame Recording Mode  
Set the number of frames in advance. We recommend operating tccorder remotely or stabilizing the  
camcorder, for example, on a tripod. Sound is not recordehis sperecording mode.  
Operating modes:  
Configuring Frame Recording e  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Recorded Frames] sumenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Frame Rording] > [Recorded Frames]  
[Frame Recording]  
2 Select the desired number of frames d en press SET.  
• Available options depend on the frame rate used: 1, 3, 6 or 9 (23.98P,  
29.97P, 59.94i), or 2, 6 or 12 (59.94P).  
[Recorded Frames]  
[1]  
Activating Frame Recording Mode and Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Special Recording] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Recording]  
[Special Recording]  
2 Select [Frame Recording] and then press SET.  
• [FRM STBY] appears at the top of the screen (with [FRM] flashing).  
[Off]  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The camcorder automatically records the set number of frames.  
• The front and rear tally lamps illuminate.  
• [FRM STBY] changes to [Ü FRM REC] while recording frames and [Ü FRM STBY] when frames are not  
being recorded.  
• Repeat until you finish recording.  
4 Open the [Special Recording] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Recording]  
5 Select [Off] and then press SET.  
• Frame recording mode ends and all of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip.  
• The tally lamps go out and [STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
     
Special Recording Modes  
NOTES  
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.  
• The number of frames recorded cannot be changed while recording.  
• Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip.  
120  
• Frame recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the movie format or video configuration.  
• During this special recording mode, the time code’s running mode (A 90) can be set to [Rec Run] or [Regen.]  
and the time code advances by the number of frames recorded. If the time code’s running mode is set to [Free  
Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to [Rec Run] during  
special recording mode. When the special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its  
previous setting.  
•
During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the TIME CODE terminal,  
3G/HD-SDI terminal or MON. terminal.  
Slow & Fast Motion Mode  
When you set the frame rate to a progressive frame rate (A 55), the ccorder can record with a frame rate  
(shooting frame rate) that is different from the playback frame rate. Recoing a clip at a higher frame rate than  
the [Frame Rate] setting will result in a slow motion effect during playup to 40% of the original speed).  
Conversely, a lower frame rate will result in a fast motion eto 5x original speed). Sound is not  
recorded in this special recording mode.  
Operating modes:  
Configuring Slow & Fast Motin Mode  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [S&F Frame Rate] submeu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Slow & Fast ti] > [S&F Frame Rate]  
[Slow & Fast Motion]  
2 Select the desired shooting frame rate and then press SET.  
• Available shooting frame rates depend on the resolution used.  
[S&F Frame Rate]  
Available shooting frame rates (fps)  
[30]  
12  
28  
15  
30  
18  
20  
21  
22  
24  
25  
26  
27  
32*  
34*  
36*  
40*  
44*  
48*  
54*  
60*  
* Available only when the resolution is set to 1280x720.  
Activating Slow & Fast Motion Mode and Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
[Special Recording]  
[Off]  
1 Open the [Special Recording] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Recording]  
2 Select [Slow & Fast Motion] and then press SET.  
• [S&F STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
• The selected shooting frame rate appears on the right of the screen  
next to the frame rate setting (the playback frame rate).  
       
Special Recording Modes  
Shooting frame rate  
121  
Playback frame rate  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The front and rear tally lamps illuminate.  
• [S&F STBY] changes to [ÜS&F REC] while recording.  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.  
• The clip is recorded at the selected frame rate.  
• The tally lamps go out and [S&F STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
NOTES  
• Slow & fast motion recording cannot be used together with other special recording modes or double slot  
recording.  
• The shooting frame rate cannot be changed while recording.  
• For lower shooting frame rates, it may take approximately seconstop recording.  
• Slow & fast motion mode will be deactivated if the spding me is changed or turned off. It will be  
deactivated also if you change the movie format or videuration.  
• When the bit rate is set to 50 Mbps (A 55ordiis not available during slow motion recording.  
• During this special recording mode, the time ning ode (A 90) can be set to [Rec Run] or [Regen.]  
and the time code advances by tnumber ocorded. If the time code’s running mode is set to [Free  
Run] or the time code is input froan external the running mode will switch to [Rec Run] during  
special recording mode. When thspecial rcording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its  
previous setting.  
•
During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the TIME CODE terminal,  
3G/HD-SDI terminal or MON. terminal.  
Pre-recording Mode  
[w Other Functions]  
[Special Recording]  
[Off]  
When pre-recording mode is activated, the camcorder starts recording  
continuously into a temporary memory of approximately 3 seconds so  
when you press the START/STOP button, the clip will contain also  
approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before you pressed  
the button.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Special Recording] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Special Recording]  
2 Select [Pre-Recording] and then press SET.  
• [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.  
• The front and rear tally lamps illuminate.  
• [PRE REC STBY] changes to [Ü PRE REC] while recording.  
   
Special Recording Modes  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.  
• The camcorder records the clip, including approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before the  
START/STOP button was pressed.  
• The tally lamps go out and [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.  
122  
NOTES  
• During pre-recording mode, the time code will be recorded with the running mode (A 90) set to [Free Run],  
regardless of the previous setting. Alternatively, you can use an external time code signal. When the time code  
is recorded, it will include the 3 seconds before the START/STOP button was pressed. When the special  
recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its previous setting.  
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.  
• Pre-recording mode will be deactivated if you change the movie format or video configuration.  
Simultaneous Recording of MXF and MP4 Clips  
Simultaneous Recording of MXF and MP4 Clips  
Setting the movie format to MXF+MP4, you can record simultaneously clips in MXF format and clips in MP4  
format. When the movie format is set to MXF+MP4, start and stop recording the MXF clip with the START/STOP  
button, as usual. You can select whether that action would automatically record also an MP4 clip (MXF+MP4  
simultaneous recording) or whether to assign a separate control to start and stop recording MP4 clips (MP4  
backup recording).  
123  
MXF+MP4 Simultaneous Recording: The camcorder will record the same scene in two different formats.  
MP4 Backup Recording: The camcorder will keep recording continuously in MP4 format, ensuring that you never  
miss important shooting opportunities. You can set the [Bit Rate/Resolution] setting of MP4 clips to [3 Mbps  
640x360] or link it to the video configuration of the MXF clips.  
Operating modes:  
Video configurations of MXF clips and MP4 clips  
MXF Clips  
MP4 Clips  
2
[Bit Rate/Resolution] set to  
1
2
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[Bit Rate/Resolution] set to [Linked to MXF]  
[3 Mbps 640x360]  
Bit rate/  
Bit rate  
Resolution  
Frame rate  
Bit rate  
Resolu
Frame rate  
Frame rate  
Resolution  
59.94i  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94P  
29.9
23P  
59.
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
29.97P  
23.98P  
35 Mbps  
59.94i  
.97P  
23.98P  
59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94i  
29.97P  
23.98P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
1920x1080  
80  
24 Mbps  
9
50 Mbps  
1280x720  
1280x720  
5 Mbps  
24 Mbps  
29.97P  
1920x1080  
1440x1080  
1280x720  
3 Mbps/  
640x360  
1920x1080  
23.98P  
29.97P  
35 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
35 Mbps  
17 Mbps  
1280x720  
9 Mbps  
35 Mbps  
24 Mbps  
23.98P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
1440x1080  
1920x1080  
1
2
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Bit Rate/Resolution].  
[w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Bit Rate/Resolution] (when the movie format is set to MXF+MP4).  
       
Simultaneous Recording of MXF and MP4 Clips  
1 Set the movie format to [MXF (CF)+MP4 ] (A 55).  
[w Other Functions]  
[MP4]  
• At the top of the screen both [MP4] and [STBY] will appear. The time  
code running mode will change to [Free Run] and start advancing.  
2 Open the MP4 [Bit Rate/resolution] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Bit Rate/Resolution]  
124  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[Linked to MXF]  
3 Select [3 Mbps 640x360] or [Linked to MXF] and then press SET.  
• Refer to the previous table to check the resulting video configuration  
for MP4 clips.  
4 Open the MP4 [Rec Control] submenu.  
[w Other Functions]  
[MP4]  
[w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Rec Control]  
5 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
[Rec Control]  
[START/STOP Button]  
Options  
[START/STOP Button]: Every time you press the START/STOP button, thcorder will start or stop recording  
simultaneously an MXF clip on the CF card anclip on e SD card. Use this setting for  
MXF+MP4 simultaneous recording.  
[Assignable Buttons]: You can start or stop recordiMP4 sing the menu ([w Other Functions] > [MP4] >  
[Start/Stop] > [Start] or [Stop]) or le bon set to the [MP4 Start/Stop] function (A 129).  
Use this setting for MP4 backup rec
Recording in MP4 Backup Recrdig Mode  
When [w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Rec Control] is set to [Assignable Buttons] the actions that control the  
recording of MXF clips and MP4 clips (the backup recording) are separate.  
1 Open the MP4 [Start/Stop] menu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Start/Stop]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 Select [Start] and then press SET to start recording the backup  
MP4 clip.  
[MP4]  
• The front and rear tally lamps will illuminate, [MP4] changes to  
[ÜMP4] and the recording of the MP4 clip will begin.  
[Start/Stop]  
• You can also set an assignable button to [MP4 Start/Stop] and press  
the assignable button.  
[Stop]  
3 Press the START/STOP button to record an MXF clip  
simultaneously with the MP4 clip.  
• [STBY] changes to [ÜREC] and the recording of the MXF clip will begin.  
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording the MXF clip.  
• [ÜREC] changes to [STBY] and the MXF clip is recorded on the CF card.  
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to record additional MXF clips. All along, the recording of the backup  
MP4 clip will continue.  
5 To stop recording the MP4 clip, open the MP4 [Start/Stop] menu.  
• [w Other Functions] > [MP4] > [Start/Stop]  
 
Simultaneous Recording of MXF and MP4 Clips  
6 Select [Stop] and then press SET.  
• The front and rear tally lamps will go out, [ÜMP4] will change back to [MP4] and the MP4 clip is recorded  
on the SD card.  
• You can also set an assignable button to [MP4 Start/Stop] and press the assignable button.  
125  
NOTES  
• If any memory card becomes full during MXF+MP4 simultaneous recording, recording will stop on all recording  
media. If a memory card becomes full during MP4 backup recording, recording will stop only on the memory  
card that is full and continue on other recording media.  
• Simultaneous recording cannot be used together with other special recording modes or real-time proxy  
transfer mode.  
• While recording, the [Free Run] time code will be recorded with the MXF clip.  
Infrared Recording  
Infrared Recording  
Using the infrared mode, the camcorder becomes more sensitive to infrared light, allowing you to record in dark  
locations. You can use the camcorder’s own infrared light to keep shooting even in very dark conditions. Also,  
you can select whether the brighter areas of the picture appear in green or white.  
126  
Operating modes:  
Activating Infrared Mode  
Follow the procedure below to set the camcorder to infrared  
mode and to set the color of bright areas in the picture.  
1 Move the INFRARED switch to ON.  
• [Infrared] and the = icon will appear at the left of the  
screen.  
• The INFRARED switch will be more accessible when the  
OLED panel is at a vertical position.  
2 Open the [Monochrome] submenu to select a color.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Infrared] > [Monochrome]  
3 Select [White] or [Green] and then press SET.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Infrared]  
[Monochrome]  
[White]  
Using the Infrared Light  
[~ Camera Setup]  
You can turn the infrared light on and off using an assignable button or the  
menu.  
[Infrared]  
1 Open the [Light] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Infrared] > [Light]  
[Light]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
[Toggle]  
• When the infrared light is on, the < icon will appear on the left of the  
screen.  
Options  
[Toggle]:  
Allows you to turn the infrared light on and off using an assignable button. Set an assignable button  
(A 129) to [Infrared Light] in advance and press the assignable button to turn the infrared light on/off.  
[Always On]: The infrared light is always on while the camcorder is in infrared mode.  
[Always Off]: The infrared light is always off.  
           
Infrared Recording  
NOTES  
• When the camcorder is in infrared mode, the following adjustments are made automatically.  
- Gain, shutter speed and aperture are adjusted automatically and ND filters are not used.  
- AGC limit, light metering, AE shift, white balance and custom picture settings cannot be used.  
- The camcorder will switch from manual focus to autofocus so the focus point may change. Check that the  
focus is correct.  
127  
• Depending on the light source, autofocus may not work well while zooming.  
• When the camcorder is in infrared mode, do not point the lens at strong sources of light or heat. The  
camcorder’s sensitivity to such sources is much higher than when shooting video normally. If there are such  
sources in the picture before you switch the camcorder to infrared mode, shield the lens first.  
• If you set an assignable button to [Infrared Monochrome] (A 129), you can press the button to change the  
color of the bright areas of an infrared recording.  
Using the Focal Length Guide  
Using the Focal Length Guide  
The focal length guide aids you when using two camcorders for 3D recording. The guide appears as a numerical  
value and has a range of 202 steps. You can set the guide to 0 at any point in the zoom range to help precisely  
calibrate both camcorders.  
128  
Operating modes:  
1 Set up two camcorders and align their picture angle at full  
telephoto.  
[~ Camera Setup]  
[Zoom]  
2 Open the [Focal Length] submenu.  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > [Focal Length]  
3 Select [Set To 0] and then press SET.  
4 Press MENU.  
• The focal length guide appears on the left of the screen as [  
To turn off the indicator, select [Off] instead.  
[Focal Length]  
[Off]  
0].  
5 Operate the zoom.  
• If both camcorders are set so that the same value is displayed durizoom, the focal length for both  
camcorders will remain almost the same.  
NOTES  
• Although the focal length guide is an aid for 3D rcordingsure to check the picture angle visually while  
recording.  
• You can obtain more accurate results when this rocedure at full telephoto.  
• The same picture angle for both cmcorders cuaranteed.  
• When using the digital tele-conrter or digital om  
- When the focal length is reset to ro, the gital tele-converter or digital zoom is deactivated and  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Zoom] > odis set to [Normal] (optical zoom only).  
- If the focal length was reset to zero while the zoom was in the digital zoom range, the zoom position will  
change automatically to the telephoto end of the optical zoom.  
     
Customization  
4
129  
Assignable Buttons  
The camcorder conveniently features 13* buttons to which you can assign various functions. By assigning often-  
used functions, you can quickly access them with a single press of a button.  
* In  
mode, only assignable buttons 1 to 4 and 11 to 13 are available.  
Operating modes:  
Changing the Assigned Function  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Assignable Buttons] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Assignable Buttons]  
[Assignable Buttons]  
2 Select the button to change and then press SET.  
• A list of available functions appears.  
[1 PEAKING]  
[2 ZEBRA]  
• The quick reference shows the default settings for each assignable  
button. For assignable buttons 1 to 4 and 11 to 13, the label on the  
camcorder/grip indicates also the button’s default setting. By default,  
buttons 5 to 10 have no assignable function set.  
[3 POWERED IS]  
[4 MAGN.]  
[5-10 (NONE)]  
[11 HEADPHONE +]  
[12 HEADPHONE -]  
[13 WFM]  
3 Select the desired function and then press SET.  
• If you selected [User Setting], the menu will change from orange to  
blue to indicate you are selecting a menu setting to register. Continue  
the procedure to register a menu setting. Otherwise, you do not need  
to perform the rest of the procedure.  
       
Assignable Buttons  
4 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to register and then press SET.  
• The selected menu setting will be assigned to the button marked with a ¥ to indicate that it is a user-  
selected setting.  
130  
NOTES  
• You can check the two [Assignable Buttons] status screens (A 210) to see what functions are set for the  
assignable buttons.  
• You can reset only the functions assigned to the assignable buttons, without affecting other camera settings,  
with the [w Other Functions] >[Reset] > [Assignable Buttons] function. All the assignable buttons will return  
to their default function.  
Using an Assignable Button  
After you assign a function to one of the assignable buttons, press the button to activate the function. For some  
functions, an options menu may appear. In such case, select the desired option and then press SET.  
Remote Operation Using Browser Remote  
After completing the necessary preparations (A 182), you can use the nctions assigned to assignable  
buttons 1 to 4 from a connected device using the Browser Remote pation.  
Press one of the assignable buttons 1 to 4 on the Bemote creen.  
• You can check the functions assigned to these 4 assigntons on tBrowser Remote screen.  
Currently assigned functions  
NOTES  
• Even if [Shutter Increment] is assigned to one of the assignable buttons 1 to 4, it cannot be used from the  
Browser Remote application.  
Assignable Functions  
Functions can be set separately in  
functions and available modes.  
mode and  
mode. Refer to the following table for assignable  
Function name  
Description  
A
[Img Stab.]  
[POWERED IS]*  
[Focus Limit]  
[Face AF]  
Turns image stabilization on/off.  
Turns Powered IS on/off.  
Turns the focus limit on/off.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
87  
87  
86  
85  
Toggles the autofocus mode between [Face Priority], [Face Only] and [Off].  
Turns the [Backlight] light metering option on/off.  
Turns the [Spotlight] light metering option on/off.  
Turns the digital zoom on/off.  
[Backlight]  
68  
74  
[Spotlight]  
[Digital Zoom]  
   
Assignable Buttons  
Function name  
[Tele-converter]  
Description  
A
Activates the digital tele-converter in the following sequence:  
Ü
–
74  
1.5x J 3x J 6x J Off  
[Wide-End Angle]  
[Gain Mode]  
Toggles the angle of view at wide-angle end between [Normal] and [Wider].  
Toggles the gain mode between [Automatic] and [Manual].  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
–
–
–
74  
62  
131  
[Shutter Mode]  
[Shutter Increment]  
Toggles the shutter speed mode between [Automatic] and [Manual].  
Changes the shutter speed increment between [Normal] and [Fine].  
58  
69  
Toggles the white balance mode between automatic white balance (AWB) and  
the current position of the WHITE BAL. switch.  
[WB Mode]  
Ü
–
[PEAKING]  
[ZEBRA]  
Turns peaking on/off.  
Ü
Ü
–
–
84  
89  
Turns zebra patterns on/off.  
Activates video scopes in the following sequence:  
Waveform monitor J Vectorscope J Edge monitor (  
[WFM]  
Ü
Ü
108  
84  
mode only) J Off  
[MAGN.]  
Turns magnification on/off.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
–
–
–
–
[TL-H58]  
Sets the [~ Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] setting to [TL-H58] or [Off].  
Sets the [~ Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] setting to [WA-H58] or [Off].  
Turns color bars on/off.  
80  
[WA-H58]  
[Color Bars]  
[Infrared Monochrome]  
107  
126  
Switches between white and green when the camcorder is in iared mode.  
Turns the infrared light on/off when [~ Camera Setup[ared] >  
[Light] is set to [Toggle].  
[Infrared Light]  
Ü
–
126  
[Markers]  
Turns onscreen markers on/off.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
88  
34  
34  
35  
[OLED Setup]  
[Viewfinder Setup]  
[OLED/VF B&W]  
Opens the [OLED Setup] submen
Ü
Ü
Ü
Opens the [Viewfinder Setup]
Turns the B&W mohe OLiewfiner on/off.  
Turns on/off the lusion of onscron video output from the  
camcorder’s termals (both HD and SD video output).  
[Onscreen Display]  
Ü
Ü
165  
[MP4 Start/Stop]**  
[MP4 FTP Transfer]*  
[Add Shot Mark 1]  
[Add Shot Mark 2]*  
[Add $ Mark]  
Starts or stops recong an Mclip.  
Adds the MP4 clip that was just recorded to the FTP transfer queue.  
Adds an " mark to the clip.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
123  
190  
–
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
110  
152  
Adds an # mark to the clip.  
Adds an $ mark to the clip.  
[Add % Mark]  
Adds a % mark to the clip.  
[Time Code]  
Displays the [Time Code] submenu.  
Puts the time code display on hold or resumes it.  
Increases the headphone volume.  
Reduces the headphone volume.  
90  
91  
[Time Code Hold]*  
[HEADPHONE +]  
[HEADPHONE -]  
[Monitor Channels]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
149  
166  
Switches the audio output channel.  
105,  
106  
[Audio Level]  
Turns the audio level meter on/off.  
Ü
Ü
[Wireless Controller]  
[Photo]*  
Turns the supplied wireless controller on/off.  
Records a photo.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
44  
195  
209  
30  
[Status]*  
Displays the status screens.  
[My Menu]  
Opens the [My Menu] customized submenu.  
Opens the [Initialize Media] submenu.  
[Initialize Media]  
Ü
41  
Customizable slot. Assign to the button any menu setting you would like to  
register.  
[User Setting]*  
Ü
Ü
–
*
This function can be used only by assigning it to an assignable button.  
** This function can only be assigned to assignable buttons 1 to 4.  
Custom Picture Settings  
Custom Picture Settings  
You can preset a number of picture-related settings (A 135). After changing individual settings to your  
preference, you can save the whole set in the camcorder or on an SD card as a custom picture file. You can then  
load the file at a later date to change the current settings to the preset levels you selected. You can even add  
custom picture settings to MXF clips recorded on a CF card.  
132  
You can save up to 9 different custom picture files on the camcorder and up to 20 custom picture files on an SD  
card. Custom picture files can be copied between the camcorder and SD card.  
Custom picture files created with this camcorder are compatible only with other XF200 / XF205 camcorders.  
Operating modes:  
Selecting Custom Picture Files  
[~ Camera Setup]  
Select a custom picture file to easily apply its settings to your recordings  
or to edit, rename, protect, or transfer it.  
[Custom Picture]  
1 Open the [Custom Picture] submenu.  
[- / Select File]  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Custom Picture]  
2 Select [- / Select File] and then press SET.  
[Off]  
• The default custom picture file is [Off]. A list of custofiles in  
the camcorder and SD card appears. Files in the camegin  
with [C1] to [C9]; those on the SD card begSD1[SD20].  
3 Select the desired file and then press SE
• Select [Off] to record without apying any cure settings.  
• To apply the custom picture setgs of the selefile, continue to step 4. To perform other operations on  
the selected file (edit settings, co, proteetc.), continue instead with the one of the procedures in the  
following pages.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
• The selected custom picture file’s settings will be applied. / (camcorder) or . (SD card) and the custom  
picture file’s number will appear on the left of the screen.  
Preset Custom Picture Files  
By default, custom picture file [C9] in the camcorder is protected. Remove the protection (A 133) to edit the  
file.  
[C9: Wide DR]: Applies a gamma curve with a very wide dynamic range and an appropriate color matrix.  
NOTES  
• About changing custom picture related settings using the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller  
- When the remote controller is connected to the camcorder, you can press the remote controller's CUSTOM  
PICT. button to open/close the [Custom Picture] submenu.  
- If a protected custom picture file or no custom picture file is selected on the camcorder ([- / Select File]  
is set to [Off]), custom picture related settings cannot be changed using the remote controller.  
- While the remote controller is connected to the camcorder, custom picture files on the SD card ([SD1] to  
[SD20]) cannot be used. If you connect the remote controller while a custom picture file on the SD card was  
selected, the custom picture file will change automatically to [Off] (recording without custom picture  
settings). To use the settings of a custom picture file saved on the SD card, copy the file in advance from the  
SD card to an open file slot in the camcorder (A 134).  
           
Custom Picture Settings  
- Adjusting custom picture related settings using the remote controller will change the settings registered  
under the currently selected custom picture file. If you want to keep an important custom picture file, copy it  
in advance to the SD card or select in advance a custom picture file you do not mind changing.  
133  
Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings  
1 After selecting a file, select [, / Edit File] and then press SET.  
2 Select a setting and then press SET.  
3 Change the setting to the desired level and then press SET.  
• Refer to the table Available Custom Picture Settings (A 135) for details on the various settings.  
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings, as necessary.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
• The new custom picture settings will be applied. / (camcorder) or . (SD card) and the custom picture  
file’s number will appear on the left of the screen.  
Resetting the current file’s settings to default values  
1 Select [Reset] and then press SET.  
2 Select the default values and then press SET.  
• Select [Normal] to reset to neutral default values (eqo not ug custom picture settings at all) or  
[Wide DR] if you want to replicate the preset settingsmple as tarting point to edit them further.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
Renaming Custom Picture les  
[, / Edit File]  
1 After selecting a file, open the [Ramsubmenu.  
[, / Edit File] > [Rename]  
• A screen appears that displays the current file name with an orange  
selection frame on the first character.  
[Rename]  
2 Push the joystick up/down to select an alphanumeric character or symbol then push it right to move  
to the next field.  
• Change the rest of the name in the same way.  
3 Select [Set] and then press SET.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
Protecting Custom Picture Files  
[, / Edit File]  
Protecting a custom picture file prevents its settings from being  
accidentally changed.  
[Protect]  
1 After selecting a file, open the [Protect] submenu.  
[, / Edit File] > [Protect]  
2 Select [Protect] and then press SET.  
• In the custom picture menu, i will appear next to the file name.  
• To remove protection settings, select [Unprotect] instead.  
         
Custom Picture Settings  
3 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
134  
Transferring Custom Picture Files  
You can transfer custom picture files between the camcorder and SD card. When the selected custom picture  
file is in the camcorder, use [Copy To  
] or [Load From  
] depending on the operation you wish to perform.  
Similarly, when the selected custom picture file is on an SD card, use [Copy To Cam.] or [Load From Cam].  
Copying a File from the Camcorder to an SD Card  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file in the camcorder, open the [Copy To  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Copy To  
] submenu.  
]
[Copy To  
]
2 Select the file slot on the SD card under which to save the file and then  
press SET.  
• If there are available slots, you can select [New File] to save the file in the first available slot.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the SD card, overwriting the file in that slot.  
When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
Replacing a File in the Camcorder with a File oCard  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file in the camcorder to replan the  
[Load From  
] submenu.  
[Load From  
]
[+ / Transfer File] > [Load From  
2 Select the file to transfer to the cacorder and s SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The file in the camcorder will be ovwrittby the one on the SD card. When the confirmation screen  
appears, press SET.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
Copying a File from an SD Card to the Camcorder  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file on the SD card, open the [Copy To Cam.]  
submenu.  
[Copy To Cam.]  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Copy To Cam.]  
2 Select the file slot under which to save the file and then press SET.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the camcorder, overwriting the file in that  
slot. When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
Replacing a File on an SD Card with a File in the Camcorder  
[+ / Transfer File]  
1 After selecting a file on the SD card to replace, open the  
[Load From Cam.] submenu.  
[Load From Cam.]  
[+ / Transfer File] > [Load From Cam.]  
2 Select the file to transfer to the SD card and then press SET.  
     
Custom Picture Settings  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The file on the SD card will be overwritten by the one on the camcorder. When the confirmation screen  
appears, press SET.  
4 Press the MENU button to exit the menu.  
135  
NOTES  
• You can also copy to the camcorder a custom picture file embedded in an MXF clip (A 155).  
Embedding Custom Picture Settings in a Recording  
[w Other Functions]  
By default, when you record MXF clips using custom picture settings, the  
custom picture file is saved along with the MXF clip. Later, you can copy  
the custom picture file embedded in the MXF clip to the camcorder  
[MXF]  
(A 155) and use the same custom picture settings to record additional  
[Clips]  
[Add / File]  
[On]  
clips. You may find that embedding custom picture settings in a recording  
helps you keep track of them, such as verifying what settings were used  
for a particular recording.  
1 Open the [Add / File] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Clips] > [Add / File
2 Select [On] or [Off] and then press SET.  
Available Custom Picture Sttings  
The following are the available settis. Even if no cutom picture file is selected, the default settings are still  
applied to the picture.  
[Gamma]  
The gamma curve changes the overall look of the image. Generally, this should be the same setting as [Select]  
under [Color Matrix]. (Default: [Normal 1]).  
[Normal 1] to [Normal 4]: These settings are suitable for viewing the image on a TV monitor. Highlights in  
[Normal 2] are brighter than those of [Normal 1]. Dark tones in the lower part of the gamma  
curve for [Normal 3] (ITU-R BT.709 standard) and [Normal 4] are more pronounced than those of  
[Normal 2].  
[Cine 1] or [Cine 2]: Use [Cine 1] for a gamma curve that results in a picture with a cinema-like feel and cinema-  
like tones. [Cine 2] has softer contrasts than does [Cine 1] but is also suitable for creating a  
cinema-like picture.  
[Wide DR]:  
Applies a gamma curve with a very wide dynamic range, optimized for playback on an HDTV.  
           
Custom Picture Settings  
Gamma  
Normal 1  
Cine 1  
Cine 2  
Normal 2/3/4  
136  
Normal 1  
Wide DR  
Normal 4  
Normal 3  
Normal 1/2  
Input  
Input  
[Black]  
Controls the black level and color cast of blacks.  
[Master Pedestal]: The master pedestal increases or decreases the black level. Higher settings will make dark  
areas brighter but decrease contrast. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Master Black]: Corrects color cast in blacks.  
[Red]:  
-50 to 50 (Default: 0)  
[Green]: -50 to 50 (Default: 0)  
[Blue]: -50 to 50 (Default: 0)  
[Black Gamma]  
Controls the lower part of the gamma cve (dahe iage). When [Gamma] is set to [Wide DR], this  
setting has no effect on the picture.  
[Level]:  
[Range]:  
[Point]:  
Raises or lowers the ower part of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to  
50. (Default: 0)  
Selects the range in whick areas are affected. This setting can be adjusted from -20 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
Determines the shape of the lower part of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from -  
20 to 50. (Default: 0)  
Black Gamma  
Point  
Input  
[Low Key Satur.]  
Adjusts color saturation in dark areas.  
[Enable]:  
[Level]:  
Activates/deactivates the setting. (Default: [Off])  
Specifies how saturated colors are in dark areas. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
       
Custom Picture Settings  
[Knee]  
Controls the upper part of the gamma curve (highlights of the image). By compressing the highlights, you can  
prevent parts of the image from being overexposed. When [Gamma] is set to [Cine 1], [Cine 2] or [Wide DR], this  
setting has no effect on the picture.  
137  
[Enable]:  
Activates/deactivates the setting. (Default: [On])  
[Automatic]:  
Select [On] to have the camcorder automatically set the knee point and slope to prevent images  
being overexposed so quickly. Select [Off] to manually adjust the knee point. (Default: [On])  
[Slope]:  
Determines the slope of the gamma curve above the knee point. This setting can be adjusted  
from -35 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Point]:  
Sets the knee point of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 109.  
(Default: 95)  
[Saturation]:  
Adjusts color saturation in highlights. This setting can be adjusted from -10 to 10. (Default: 0)  
Knee Slope  
Knee Point  
Input  
Input  
[Sharpness]  
Sets the sharpness of the output anecordisignal.  
[Level]: Sets the sharpness leves setting can be adjusted from -10 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[H Detail Freq.]: Sets the center frequency of horizontal sharpness. Setting higher values increases the  
frequency, which, in turn, increases the sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from -8 to 8.  
(Default: 0)  
[Coring]:  
Reduces noise artifacts caused by high sharpness levels.  
[Level]: Sets the coring level. Higher values prevent sharpness from being applied to minute details, resulting  
in less noise. This setting can be adjusted from -30 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[D-Ofst]: You can use [D-Ofst], [D-Curve] and [D-Depth] to adjust the coring level based on brightness. [D-Ofst]  
sets the coring level of the minimum brightness level. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[D-Curve]: Sets the curve of the coring adjustment. This curve is the change from [Level] to [D-Ofst]. This setting  
can be adjusted from 0 to 8. (Default: 0)  
[D-Depth]: Sets a multiplier to [D-Ofst] that determines the coring level adjustment based on brightness.  
Positive values raise the coring level in dark areas and negative values lower the level. This setting can  
be adjusted from -4 to 4. (Default: 0)  
[HV Detail Bal.]: Adjusts the ratio between horizontal and vertical detail. Higher values emphasize vertical detail  
while lower values emphasize horizontal detail. This setting can be adjusted from -8 to 8.  
(Default: 0)  
[Limit]:  
Restricts how much sharpness is applied. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
     
Custom Picture Settings  
[
Knee Aperture]: Allows you to set the sharpness of only the areas above the knee point by adjusting the gain and  
slope. When [Gamma] is set to [Cine 1], [Cine 2] or [Wide DR], this setting has no effect on the  
picture.  
[Gain]: Sets the amount of sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 9. (Default: 0)  
138  
[Slope]: Sets the slope of the sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 3, with 0 having no slope, 1  
having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope. (Default: 1)  
[Level Depend]: Lowers the amount of sharpness applied to dark areas of the image.  
[Level]: Sets the brightness of the dark areas of the image that will be affected. This setting can be adjusted  
from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Slope]: Determines the slope of the area between the upper and lower parts of the gamma curve. This  
setting can be adjusted from 0 to 3, with 0 having no slope, 1 having a steep slope and 3 having a  
gradual slope. (Default: 0)  
[Offset]: Adjusts the sharpness level of dark areas in the image. Setting higher values will lower the sharpness  
level. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Ingredient Ratio]: Changing this ratio allows you to affect the balance between resolution and the reduction of  
jagged edges. Higher values emphasize resolution while lower values emphasize the reduction  
of jagged edges. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Noise Reduction]  
Reduces the amount of noise that appears in the image. Select [Aomc] to have the camcorder adjust the  
noise automatically. Otherwise, select a level from 1 (lowest level) to 1hest level), or select [Off] to turn the  
noise reduction off. (Default: [Off])  
[Skin Detail]  
The camcorder applies a softening filter to areature ith skin tones to give a more pleasant  
appearance. By changing these settings, you ce wt areas will be detected as skin tones. A zebra  
pattern will appear over areas on thscreen that ed as having skin tones.  
[Effect Level]: Adjusts the level of e filter. The availle options are [Off], [Low], [Middle] and [High]. (Default:  
[Off])  
[Hue]:  
Adjusts the hue for deteof skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from -16 to 16.  
(Default: 0)  
[Chroma]:  
[Area]:  
Adjusts the color saturation for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to  
31. (Default: 16)  
Adjusts the color range for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Y Level]:  
Adjusts the brightness for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Selective NR]  
The camcorder detects the characteristics of a certain color or tone and applies a noise reduction filter to the  
targeted areas. A zebra pattern will appear over targeted areas on the screen.  
[Effect Level]: Adjusts the level of the noise reduction filter. The available options are [Off], [Low], [Middle] and  
[High]. (Default: [Off])  
[Hue]:  
Adjusts the hue for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 0)  
[Chroma]:  
[Area]:  
Adjusts the color saturation for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to  
31. (Default: 16)  
Adjusts the color range for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
[Y Level]:  
Adjusts the brightness for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.  
(Default: 16)  
       
Custom Picture Settings  
[Color Matrix]  
Color matrix affects the color tones throughout the whole image.  
[Select]:  
Available options are [Normal 1] to [Normal 4], [Cine 1] and [Cine 2] and [Wide DR]. Generally,  
this should be the same setting as [Gamma]. After selecting an option, you can make more  
precise adjustments. (Default: [Normal 1])  
139  
[Gain]:  
[Phase]:  
[R-G]:  
Adjusts the color intensity. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
Adjusts the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18. (Default: 0)  
The R-G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan/green and red/magenta  
gradations. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[R-B]:  
[G-R]:  
[G-B]:  
[B-R]:  
[B-G]:  
The R-B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan/blue and red/yellow gradations.  
This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
The G-R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta/red and green/cyan  
gradations. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
The G-B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta/blue and green/yellow  
gradations. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
The B-R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow/red and blue/cyan gradations.  
This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
The B-G matrix changes the tint of the picture along thyellow/green and blue/magenta  
gradations. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 5(Default: 0)  
[White Balance]  
Adjusts the amount of white balance throughout the wh.  
[R Gain]:  
[B Gain]:  
Adjust the intensity of red toness settibe adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
Adjust the intensity of blue toettincan be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Color Correction]  
The camcorder detects the characistics of a certolor (color phase, chroma, area and Y level) and corrects  
them when recording. You can set tcolor rrection for up to two different areas (A and B).  
[Select Area]: Selects the area or areto orrect. Available options are [Area A], [Area B] and [Area A&B].  
Select [Off] to turn this setting off. (Default: [Off])  
[Area A Setting]: Determines the area in which colors will be corrected.  
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)  
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area A Revision]: Sets the amount of correction for area A.  
[Level]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[Phase]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18.  
(Default: 0)  
[Area B Setting]: Determines the area in which colors will be corrected.  
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)  
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)  
[Area B Revision]: Sets the amount of correction for area B.  
[Level]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.  
(Default: 0)  
[Phase]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18.  
(Default: 0)  
             
Custom Picture Settings  
[Other Functions]  
[Setup Level]: Adjusts the black level set by the [Black] and [Master Pedestal] settings. This setting can be  
adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: 0)  
[Over 100%]: This function determines how the camcorder handles video signals exceeding 100%. Available  
options are [Through] to do nothing, [Clip] to clip the signal at 100%, and [Press] that  
compresses a signal of up to 108% down to 100% levels. (Default: [Through])  
140  
NOTES  
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, the following custom picture  
settings can be changed using the buttons and dials on the remote controller. They cannot be changed from  
the camcorder while the RC-V100 is connected.  
- [Black] > [Master Pedestal]; [Black] > [Master Black] > [Red], [Blue]  
- [Black Gamma] > [Level]  
- [Knee] > [Slope] and [Point] (only when [Knee] > [Enable] is set to [On])  
- [Sharpness] > [Level]  
- [White Balance] > [R Gain], [B Gain]  
 
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays  
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays  
Customize the camcorder to match your shooting style and needs. Use the [w Other Functions] >  
[Custom Function] settings to adjust how some of the camcorder’s controls and functions operate in  
mode. Similarly, use the [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2] settings to  
customize the onscreen displays that appear during recording. You can save these preferences along with other  
menu settings to an SD card and use them again later (A 143).  
141  
Operating modes:  
Customizing Functions  
[w Other Functions]  
The following table describes which functions can be customized using  
[Custom Function].  
[Custom Function]  
1 Open the [Custom Function] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function]  
2 Select the desired function.  
3 Change the setting option and then press SET.  
Customizable functions with [Custom Function]  
Menu item  
[Shockless Gain]  
[Shockless WB]  
[AE Response]  
[Iris Limit]  
ription  
Determines the speed of the transgain changed.  
Creates a softer transithen this chged.  
Controls the camcor’s responsivenging the aperture during automatic aperture mode.  
Sets a maximum apere value (F80) to be used for shooting.  
[Iris Ring Direction]  
Changes the direction oe adjuent when turning the iris ring.  
[Focus Ring Direction] Changes the direction of the adjustment when turning the focus ring.  
[Zoom Ring Direction] Changes the direction of the adjustment when turning the zoom ring.  
[Focus Ring Control] Selects the sensitivity of the response when operating the focus ring.  
[Zoom Ring Control]  
Selects the sensitivity of the response when operating the zoom ring.  
Automatically switches the screen to B&W while the focus assistance functions (peaking and magnification) are  
activated. You can have the screen switch to B&W when only the peaking is activated, when only the magnification is  
activated or when both are activated.  
[Focus Assistance  
B&W]  
Selects the units of distance (meters or feet) displayed when the camcorder shows the distance to the subject in manual  
focus mode.  
[Distance Units]  
Selects the display of the zoom indicator between a graphic bar and a numeric display (0 to 99; 0 to 81 when  
[~ Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set to [WA-H58]; 0 to 149 when digital zoom is activated).  
[Zoom Indicator]  
[Scan Reverse Rec]  
[OSD Recording]  
Inverts the recorded image horizontally and/or vertically.  
When this function is set to [On], all of the onscreen displays will be recorded to the MXF clip exactly as they appear on the  
screen.  
           
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays  
Customizing Onscreen Displays  
[£ OLED/VF Setup]  
For details on which onscreen displays can be customized, refer to  
Onscreen Displays (A 51).  
[Custom Display 1]  
[Custom Display 2]  
142  
1 Open the [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2] submenu.  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2]  
2 Select the desired onscreen display.  
3 Change the setting option and then press SET.  
• Most onscreen elements can be turned [On] or [Off]. A few elements, like the zoom display, will have the  
option to be displayed all the time ([Always On]) or only while operated ([Normal]); others, like the remaining  
battery or remaining recording time, will have the option to be displayed all the time ([Normal]) or only when  
they are at a warning level ([Only warnings]).  
   
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
After you adjust custom picture settings and settings in the various menus, you can save those settings on an  
SD card. You can load those settings at a later date or on another XF205 or XF200 camcorder so that you can  
use that camcorder in that same exact way.  
143  
Operating modes:  
Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Save To  
] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Transfer Menu//] > [Save To  
]
[Transfer Menu//]  
[Save To  
2 Select [Menu] or [Menu+/] and then press SET.  
• Selecting [Menu] will save menu settings and [Menu+/] will save  
]
menu and custom picture settings.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The current settings are saved to the SD card. If the SD card alreay has camera settings on it, they will be  
overwritten.  
4 When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
Loading Camera Settings from an
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Load From  
] subenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [TransfeMenu//] > [Lad From  
]
[Transfer Menu//]  
[Load From  
2 Select [Menu] or [Menu+/] anhen ess SET.  
• Selecting [Menu] will load menu settings and [Menu+/] will load  
]
menu and custom picture settings.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• After the camcorder’s current settings are replaced with the settings saved on the SD card, the screen will  
turn black momentarily and the camcorder will restart.  
NOTES  
• The following settings are not saved on the SD card.  
- Encryption keys/passwords under [w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
- Passwords under [w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Remote Settings] > [Users Settings]  
- [w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [FTP Server Settings] > [Password]  
• When loading camera settings from an SD card, even protected custom picture files in the camcorder will be  
replaced.  
• Only camera settings from other XF200 / XF205 camcorders can be used with this camcorder.  
       
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
144  
Playback  
5
145  
Playback  
This section explains how to play back clips with the camcorder. For details on playing back clips using an  
external monitor, refer to Connecting to an External Monitor (A 162). For details on viewing photos on the SD  
card, refer to Viewing Photos (A 197).  
Operating modes:  
MXF and MP4 Clip Index Screens  
Playback functions are accessed from the index screen. To  
open the MXF clip index screen or [MP4] index screen, set the  
camcorder to  
mode.  
Hold down the button on the Q switch and slide the  
switch to MEDIA.  
• The camcorder switches to  
screen appears.  
mode and the index  
MXF clips  
MP4 clips  
6
7
8
9
1
2
10  
3
11  
12  
13  
4
5
14 15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
       
Playback  
1
1
1
2
3
$ mark/% mark (A 110, 152)  
11 Special recording mode (A 118)  
12 Time code of thumbnail  
13 Total recording time  
1
Orange selection frame  
Relay recording (A 148, see the explanation for  
1
icon number 8)  
14 Recording date and time  
15 Embedded custom picture file (A 132)  
146  
1
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
Shot mark (A 110, 157)  
1
MXF clip name (A 49)  
16 Bit rate and resolution (A 55)  
2
Network type/FTP file transfer (A 173, 189)  
Clip thumbnail (A 158)  
Currently selected recording media (A 41)  
Clip number / Total number of clips  
17 Frame rate (A 55)  
3
18 File number (A 117)  
3
19 Clip geotagged with GPS information (A 111,  
114)  
1
10 Recording date (month and day only) and time  
MXF clips only.  
For MXF clips recorded using slow & fast motion mode, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed.  
MP4 clips only.  
1
2
3
Switching Between the CF Card Slots  
If both CF card slots contain a CF card, you can switch between  
them as necessary.  
Operating modes:  
Press the SLOT SELECT button.  
• The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illu
green.  
Switching to Other Index Screns  
All of the MXF clips on a CF card can e acceed from the MXF  
clip index screen. However, you can switother index screens  
that show only MXF clips with an $ mark ([$ Mark] index screen),  
MXF clips with a % mark ([% Mark] index screen), MP4 clips*  
([MP4] index screen) or photos* ([Photos] index screen).  
* Photos and MP4 clips are saved on the SD card.  
Operating modes:  
1 Press the INDEX button.  
• The index screen selection menu appears.  
2 Select the desired index screen and then press SET.  
• The selected index screen appears.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• Press the INDEX button again to return to the MXF clip index screen.  
   
Playback  
Playing Back Clips  
You can play back clips from the MXF clip index screen,  
[$ Mark] index screen, [% Mark] index screen and [MP4] index  
screen. Use the playback control buttons on the camcorder or  
use the joystick and joystick guide. You can also use the  
supplied wireless controller.  
147  
1 In the index screen, move the orange selection frame to  
the clip you want to play back.  
2 Press the Ò button to start playback.  
• Playback will start from the clip selected and continue until  
the end of the last clip in the index screen. When the last  
frame of the last clip is reached, playback will be paused.  
• Press the Ò button again or press SET to pause/resume the playback.  
• Press the Ñ button to stop the playback and return to the index screen.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while any access indicators are illuminated or flashing in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorde
- Do not open the CF card slot cover or the SD card slor of the cording media being accessed and do  
not remove the recording media.  
NOTES  
• You may notice brief stops in video audio etwen clips.  
Onscreen Displays  
MXF clips  
MP4 clips  
7
8
9 10 11  
7
9
11  
1
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
12  
13  
14  
15  
17  
2
3
4
5
6
2
6
18  
19  
20  
21  
20  
21  
         
Playback  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remaining battery charge (A 51)  
12 Clip number / Total number of clips  
13 Movie format (A 55)  
Joystick guide (A 148)  
Shutter speed1 (A 58)  
Aperture value1 (A 65)  
Gain1 (A 62)  
14 Bit rate and resolution (A 55)  
4
15 Frame rate (A 55)  
148  
16 Embedded custom picture file3 (A 135)  
17 Output displays (A 165)  
18 User bit3 (A 93)  
Recording date and time2  
Playback operation  
3
Relay recording3  
19 4-channel audio (A 100)  
Currently selected recording media (A 41)  
20 Audio output channels (A 166)  
21 Audio level meter  
10 $ mark/% mark3 (A 110, 152)  
11 Time code (A 90)  
1
2
Appears for MXF clips only, when [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Display Metadata] > [Camera Data] is set to [On].  
Appears when [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Display Metadata] > [Date/Time] is set to [On]. For MP4 clips, only the date of  
recording appears.  
3
4
MXF clips only.  
For MXF clips recorded using slow & fast motion mode, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed.  
7 Playback operation  
Ð PLAY  
Playback  
Ý PAUSE  
Ô/Ó  
F FWD ×  
Ø F REV  
Playback pause  
Frame reverse/Frame advance  
Fast playback*  
Fast reverse playback*  
* The playback speed (x5, x15 or x60) will also appeandica
8 Relay recording  
Appears when an MXF clip begion one Ccontinues uninterrupted on the other. 5 indicates  
the first part of the recording, 6 ndicates the part(s) and 7 indicates the last part.  
Playback Controls  
When you play back a clip, operate the buttons on the  
camcorder, the joystick and joystick guide or the supplied  
wireless controller. Refer to the following table.  
     
Playback  
Available playback types  
Playback type  
Operation  
Buttons: Press the Ø or × button.  
Joystick: During playback, push the joystick up or down.  
Wireless controller: Press the Ø or × button.  
Fast playback  
149  
Repeat to increase the playback speed to approximately 5x J 15x J 60x the normal speed.  
Joystick: During playback pause, push the joystick up or down.  
Wireless controller: Press the Ô or Ó button (during playback pause).  
Frame advance/reverse  
Buttons: Press the Ù button.  
Joystick: Push the joystick right.  
Wireless controller: Press the ß button.  
Skip to the beginning of the  
next clip  
Buttons: Press the Ú button.  
Joystick: Push the joystick left.  
Wireless controller: Press the à button.  
Skip to the beginning of the  
current clip  
Buttons: Press the Ú button twice.  
Joystick: Push the joystick left twice.  
Wireless controller: Press the à button twice.  
Skip to the previous clip  
Return to playback mode  
Buttons: Press the Ò button.  
Joystick: Press the joystick itself (SET button).  
Wireless controller: Press the Ò button.  
NOTES  
• There is no audio during any of the playback types listeprevious able.  
• During some special playback modes, you soanomalies (blocky video artifacts, banding, etc.)  
in the playback picture.  
• The speed indicated on the screis approx
• During frame advance, the time vanced betweames depends on the video configuration used:  
0.2 seconds (for 1280x720/59.94MXF cls) or 0.5 seconds for other video configurations.  
• You can press the DISP. button to tuthoystick guide display on and off.  
Adjusting the Volume  
× (headphone) terminal  
Speaker  
During playback, audio will be output from the monaural  
built-in speaker (on the grip) or from the stereo ×  
(headphone) terminal. When you connect headphones to  
the × (headphone) terminal, the built-in speaker will be  
muted. The audio signal will also be output through the  
3G/HD-SDI terminal*, MON. terminal*, HDMI OUT terminal  
and AV OUT terminal.  
*
only.  
Press the HEADPHONE +/- buttons to adjust the  
volume.  
NOTES  
• For details on changing the audio channel, refer to  
Selecting the Audio Channel (A 166).  
• You can also adjust the headphone or built-in speaker  
volume with the [¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] >  
[Headphone Volume] or [Speaker Volume] setting.  
     
Clip Operations  
Clip Operations  
Besides playing back a clip, you can perform other operations such as deleting a clip or displaying an MXF clip’s  
clip information. This is done through the clip menu, which contains different functions depending on the index  
screen. You can use the functions in the [w Other Functions] menu to perform some of the operations on all the  
clips or a selection of clips. Refer to the following table for available functions and refer to the following pages for  
more details of the functions.  
150  
Operating modes:  
MXF clip menu functions  
Index screen  
1
Menu item  
Description  
A
[$ Mark]/  
[% Mark]  
[Shot Mark] /  
[Expand Clip]  
MXF clips  
Ü
[Display Clip Info]  
Displays various information about a clip.  
Ü
–
151  
[Add $ Mark]/  
[Delete $ Mark]  
2
Adds or deletes an $ mark.  
Ü
Ü
–
152  
[Add % Mark]/  
[Delete % Mark]  
3
Adds or deletes a % mark.  
Ü
Ü
–
2
[Copy Clip]  
Copies a clip from one CF card to the other.  
Deletes a clip.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
–
153  
154  
189  
3
[Delete Clip]  
[FTP Transfer]  
Ü
Transfers the clip to a previously configured FTP
–
Displays an index screen of all the fraa clip
have either shot mark.  
[Shot Mark]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
–
–
Displays an index screen of all the that  
have the " mark.  
[Shot Mark 1]  
[Shot Mark 2]  
Ü
Ü
155  
Displays an index scn of all the frameip that  
have the # mark.  
Displays an index screen shs frames of a clip at  
a fixed interval.  
[Expand Clip]  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
–
–
156  
155  
155  
[Delete User Memo]  
[Copy / File]  
Deletes the user memo and GPS information of a clip.  
Copies the custom picture file from a clip to the  
camcorder.  
[Add Shot Mark 1]/  
[Del. Shot Mark 1]  
Adds or deletes a " mark.  
–
–
–
–
Ü
Ü
157  
156  
[Add Shot Mark 2]/  
[Del. Shot Mark 2]  
Adds or deletes a # mark.  
4
[Fewer Index Pics]  
[More Index Pics]  
Decreases the number of thumbnails that are displayed.  
Increases the number of thumbnails that are displayed.  
–
–
–
–
Ü
4
Ü
Switches to playback of a clip with playback paused on  
the selected frame.  
[Pause]  
–
–
–
–
Ü
Ü
–
[Set Index Picture]  
Sets the thumbnail used in the MXF clip index screen.  
158  
1
2
3
4
Includes also the [Shot Mark 1] and [Shot Mark 2] index screens.  
[$ Mark] index screen only.  
[% Mark] index screen only.  
[Expand Clip] index screen only.  
MP4 clip menu functions ([MP4] index screen)  
Menu item Description  
[Delete]  
[FTP Transfer]  
A
154  
191  
Deletes a clip.  
Transfers the clip to a previously configured FTP server.  
 
Clip Operations  
Using the Clip Menu  
1 Select a clip and then press SET.  
• The clip menu appears. Available functions depend on the index screen and which functions are enabled.  
151  
2 Select the desired function and then press SET.  
• The function is enabled. For some functions, further action may be required. Follow the onscreen directions.  
• Press the CANCEL button instead to return to the previous index screen.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while any access indicators are illuminated or flashing in red. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not open the CF card slot cover or the SD card slot cover of the recording media being accessed and do  
not remove the recording media.  
Displaying Clip Information  
Select [Display Clip Info] in the clip menu to display the selected clip’s ormation screen ([Clip Info] screen).  
Push the joystick left/right to switch to the previous/next clip. Whyore finished, press the CANCEL button  
to return to the MXF clip index screen.  
Operating modes:  
5 6 7  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Thumbnail of the selected clip  
Thumbnail of the previous clip  
Thumbnail of the next clip  
Shot mark (A 110, 157)  
Clip geotagged with GPS information (A 111,  
114)  
Special recording mode (A 118)  
Currently selected CF card slot (A 41)  
Clip number / Total number of clips  
Recording date and time  
10 Clip name (A 49)  
11 Bit rate and resolution (A 55)  
12 Frame rate* (A 55)  
13 $ mark / % mark (A 110, 152)  
14 Embedded custom picture file (A 135)  
15 Time code of the clip thumbnail  
16 Time code of the first frame in clip  
17 Time code of the last frame in clip  
18 Clip duration  
6
7
8
9
* For clips recorded using slow & fast motion mode, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed.  
     
Clip Operations  
Displaying the User Memo  
From the [Clip Info] screen, push the joystick up to display the [Q] screen. In this screen you can check details  
about the embedded user memo. Push the joystick down to return to the [Clip Info] screen.  
152  
Displaying Custom Picture Settings  
When displaying the [Clip Info] screen of a clip that has a custom picture file recorded with it, push the joystick  
down to display the first of three screens with the clip’s custom picture settings ([/ Data 1/3] screen).  
Repeatedly push down the joystick to check the information screens in the following order: [/ Data 2/3] screen  
J [/ Data 3/3] screen J [Q] screen J [Clip Info].  
Adding $ Marks or % Marks  
If you add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to MXF clips, you can later display an index screen that shows  
only the clips with an $ mark or only the clips with a % mark. Furthermore, you cannot delete clips with an $  
mark so you can use this mark to protect important clips.  
Operating modes:  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark during Playback  
To add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to a clip durick or pback pause, you must first set an  
assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] in ad
1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] oMarkA 129).  
• To add both types of clip marks (derenone assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another  
assignable button to [Add % Mrk].  
2 During playback or playback pauspress thassignable button to add the clip mark.  
• A message indicating the clip marwill apear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip.  
• Adding a clip mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.  
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark from the Index Screen  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The screen changes back to the MXF clip index screen and an $ mark or % appears next to the selected  
clip’s thumbnail.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 129), you can add an $ mark or %  
mark to MXF clips from the index screen, during playback or during playback pause.  
• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and % mark at the same time. When you add a % mark to a clip with an  
$ mark, the $ mark will be deleted. Similarly, when you add an $ mark to a clip with a % mark, the %  
mark will be deleted.  
   
Clip Operations  
Deleting $ Marks or % Marks  
Operating modes:  
153  
Deleting an $ Mark or % Mark from a Clip  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Delete $ Mark] or [Delete % Mark] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The screen changes back to the MXF clip index screen the selected mark is deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
Deleting $ Marks from All Clips  
[w Other Functions]  
[Delete All $ Marks]  
1 Open the [Delete All $ Marks] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Delete All $ Marks]  
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All $ marks from clips on the selected CF card will be deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the $ marks are being deleted, you can press o canc
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Copying Clips  
You can copy MXF clips from one Ccard to the other. The copied clips will retain their original name.  
Operating modes:  
Copying a Single Clip  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Copy Clip] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation. You can also check the  
available space on both CF cards.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clip is being copied, you can press SET to cancel.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
• The selected clip is copied to the other CF card and the screen changes back to the MXF clip index screen.  
Copying Multiple Clips  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Copy] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Copy]  
[Clips]  
2 Select [Select] to select which clips to copy, [$ Mark] to copy all the  
clips with an $ mark, or [All] to copy all the clips, and then press SET.  
[Copy]  
         
Clip Operations  
• If you selected [Select], use the joystick to move between the clips. Press SET to select a clip to copy and  
repeat as necessary (up to 100 clips). After selecting all the desired clips, press the MENU button.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All the applicable clips on the selected CF card will be copied to the other CF card.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
154  
• While the clips are being copied, you can press SET to cancel.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
NOTES  
• You cannot copy a clip if either CF card slot cover is open.  
• If a clip is being copied to a card that already has a clip with the same number (the last 4 digits in the clip  
name), the copied clip will be renamed with the following number.  
Deleting Clips  
You can delete any clip except for MXF clips with an $ mark. To delete such clips, delete the $ mark  
beforehand.  
Operating modes:  
Deleting a Single Clip  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET tclip enu.  
2 Select [Delete Clip] (MXF clips) or [De] (MPthen press SET.  
• You will be prompted to confirm he operatioF clips only, the clip information will be displayed on  
the screen as well.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clip is being deleted, the operation cannot be canceled.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Deleting Multiple Clips  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Delete] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Delete]  
[Clips]  
2 Select [Select] to select which clips to delete or [All] to delete all the  
clips and then press SET.  
[Delete]  
• If you selected [Select], use the joystick to move between the clips.  
Press SET to select a clip to delete and repeat as necessary (up to  
100 clips). After selecting all the desired clips, press the MENU button.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All the applicable clips on the selected recording media will be deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clips are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
   
Clip Operations  
Deleting the User Memo and GPS Information  
Operating modes:  
155  
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Delete User Memo] and then press SET.  
• The [Delete User Memo] screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The user memo and GPS information is deleted and the screen changes back to the MXF clip index screen.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a Clip  
You can copy the custom picture file embedded in an MXF clip to the camcorder.  
Operating modes:  
1 Select the desired clip (a clip with the / icon) and then ess ET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.  
• The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange same inating a custom picture file slot in the  
camcorder.  
• You can push the joystick up/down to dis/ Da 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3] screens.  
3 Push the joystick left/right to seche slot and then press SET.  
4 Select [OK] and then press S.  
• The custom picture file already the selted file slot will be overwritten.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel topation.  
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
NOTES  
• You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot that contains a protected custom picture file.  
• By default, file slot [C9] is protected.  
Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks  
After you add shot marks to an MXF clip, you can display an index screen that contains all the frames in a clip  
with either shot mark, only the " mark or only the # mark. When you play back a clip from this index screen,  
playback will start from the frame indicated by the shot mark. You can also perform other operations from this  
index screen, such as adding and deleting shot marks.  
Operating modes:  
1 Select the desired clip (a clip with the ! icon) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Shot Mark] and then press SET.  
• The [Shot Mark] index screen appears, which contains all the frames with shot marks in the clip. Select  
instead [Shot Mark 1] to display an index screen only of the frames with the " mark or [Shot Mark 2] to  
display an index screen only of the frames with the # mark.  
         
Clip Operations  
• The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame with the shot mark.  
• Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the MXF clip index screen.  
156  
Time code of the  
frame with the  
shot mark  
NOTES  
• After you finish playing back a clip from this index screen, the index screen that was open before the [Shot  
Mark] index screen will appear.  
Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single Clip  
You can display an index screen of a single MXF clip brokas framat fixed intervals. This is useful  
when you have a long clip or wish to play back a crom a point. You can change how many thumbnails  
are displayed. You can also perform other opem thndex screen, such as adding and deleting shot  
marks.  
Operating modes:  
1 Select the desired clip and then pss ST to open the clip menu.  
2 Select [Expand Clip] and then press SET.  
• The [Expand Clip] index screen appears, which shows thumbnails of frames taken from the clip at fixed  
intervals. The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame.  
• You can change the fixed interval between frames by showing more or fewer thumbnails. To show more  
thumbnails, open the clip menu and select [More Index Pics] and then press SET. To show fewer  
thumbnails, select [Fewer Index Pics] and then press SET.  
• Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the MXF clip index screen.  
Thumbnail icon:  
Indicates the frame  
used as the clip  
thumbnail in the  
MXF clip index  
screen.  
Time code of the  
displayed frame  
NOTES  
• After you finish playing back a clip from this index screen, the index screen that was open before the [Expand  
Clip] index screen will appear.  
   
Clip Operations  
Adding Shot Marks  
You can add shot marks (", # or both) to shots in an MXF clip you want to set apart. Later, you can display an  
index screen that shows only the clips with a " mark, only the clips with a # mark, or only clips with either shot  
mark.  
157  
Operating modes:  
Adding Shot Marks during Playback  
To add an " mark or # mark to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an assignable  
button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] in advance.  
1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] (A 129).  
2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button at the point in the clip where you  
want to add the shot mark.  
• A message indicating the shot mark appears on the screen and the shot mark is added to the clip.  
• Adding a shot mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.  
Adding Shot Marks from the Index Screen  
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press Sen the p menu.  
3 Select [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] and theSET.  
• The clip information screen appears and iyou confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The screen changes back to tprevious in and the selected shot mark appears next to the  
selected clip’s thumbnail.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to canche opetion.  
NOTES  
• You can also add " marks (only) using the SHOT1 button on the supplied wireless controller.  
• Up to 100 shot marks (" and # marks combined) can be added to a single MXF clip.  
• There may be up to a 0.5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camcorder adds the shot  
mark.  
Deleting Shot Marks  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
3 Select [Del. Shot Mark 1] or [Del. Shot Mark 2] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The selected mark is deleted and the screen changes back to the previous index screen.  
• If a frame has no shot marks, it will no longer appear in the [Shot Mark] index screen.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
           
Clip Operations  
Changing a Clip’s Thumbnail  
You can change the thumbnail that appears in the MXF clip index screen to one of the other frames that appear  
in the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
158  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.  
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.  
3 Select [Set Index Picture] and then press SET.  
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• The selected frame is set as the clip’s thumbnail and the screen changes back to the previous index screen.  
R appears next to the thumbnail of the selected frame.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
NOTES  
• When playing back a clip from the MXF clip index screen, playback wistart from the beginning of the clip,  
regardless of the thumbnail.  
   
External Connections  
6
159  
Video Output Configuration  
The video signal output from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal*, MON. terminal*, HDMI OUT and AV OUT terminals  
depends on the clip’s video configuration, the capability of the external monitor (for video output from the HDMI  
OUT terminal) and on various menu settings.  
*
only.  
Recording Video Signal Configuration and Video Output Configuration by Terminal  
Refer to the following table for the video output configuration from each terminal, depending on the recording  
video configuration used.  
Operating modes:  
3G/HD-SDI terminal and MON. terminal  
1
Recording video configuration  
3G/HD-SDI ter
MON. terminal output  
3
-SDI] s
[MON.] setting  
Bit rate  
Frame rate  
4
[D
[mpatible]  
1080/59.94i  
[HD]  
[SD]  
5
59.94P  
1080/
1080/59
1080/29.97P  
1083.98P  
720/59.94P  
720/29.97P  
720/23.98P  
1080/59.94i  
6
59.94i  
1920x1080  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
1080/29.97PsF  
1080/59.94i  
1080/29.97PsF  
1080/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
1280x720  
720/59.94P  
720/59.94P  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Onscreen displays can be superimposed and output to an external monitor (A 165).  
[¢ Video Setup] > [3G/HD-SDI].  
[¢ Video Setup] > [MON.].  
The zebra pattern can be output to an external monitor (A 89).  
MP4 clips only.  
MXF clips only.  
       
Video Output Configuration  
HDMI OUT terminal and AV OUT terminal  
1
Recording video configuration  
HDMI OUT terminal output  
AV OUT  
terminal output  
(SD output)  
2
1
[MON.] setting  
Bit rate  
Frame rate  
3
4
[HD]  
1080/59.94P  
[SD]  
[Off]  
1080/59.94P  
160  
5
7
7
59.94P  
6
59.94i  
1920x1080  
1080/59.94i or  
480/59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
59.94P  
29.97P  
23.98P  
1080/59.94i  
720/59.94P  
480/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
720/59.94P or  
480/59.94P  
1280x720  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Onscreen displays can be superimposed and output to an external monitor (A 165).  
[¢ Video Setup] > [MON.].  
The zebra pattern can be output to an external monitor (A 89).  
The video signal will change automatically depending on the capability of the external monitor.  
MP4 clips only.  
MXF clips only.  
Only when [¢ Video Setup] > [3G/HD-SDI] is set to a setting other than [Compatible] and [¢ Video Setup] > [HDMI] is set  
to [+1920x1080 59.94P].  
Playback Video Configuration and Video Ouonfigution by Terminal  
Refer to the following tables for the video outpuratioom each terminal, depending on the video  
configuration of the clip being played back.  
Operating modes:  
3G/HD-SDI terminal and MON. rmil  
1
Video configuration of the clip  
MON. terminal output  
3G/HD-SDI terminal  
output  
2
[MON.] setting  
Movie format  
MXF  
Bit rate  
Frame rate  
[HD]  
[SD]  
59.94i /  
29.97P /  
23.98P  
1920x1080  
1280x720  
1080/59.94i  
720/59.94P  
1080/59.94P  
1080/59.94i  
720/59.94P  
1080/59.94i  
59.94P /  
29.97P /  
23.98P  
480/59.94i  
1920x1080 /  
1280x720 /  
640x360  
59.94P /  
29.97P /  
23.98P  
MP4  
1
2
Onscreen displays can be superimposed and output to an external monitor (A 165).  
[¢ Video Setup] > [MON.].  
 
Video Output Configuration  
HDMI OUT terminal and AV OUT terminal  
1
Video configuration of the clip  
HDMI OUT terminal output  
AV OUT terminal  
output  
(SD output)  
2
1
[MON.] setting  
Movie format  
Bit rate  
Frame rate  
3
[HD]  
[SD]  
[Off]  
161  
59.94i /  
29.97P /  
23.98P  
1080/59.94i or  
480/59.94i  
1920x1080  
1080/59.94i  
MXF  
59.94P /  
29.97P /  
23.98P  
720/59.94P or  
480/59.94i  
1280x720  
720/59.94P  
480/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
4
4
59.94P  
1080/59.94P  
1920x1080 /  
1280x720 /  
640x360  
1080/59.94P  
MP4  
1080/59.94i or  
480/59.94i  
29.97P /  
23.98P  
1080/59.94i  
1
2
3
4
Onscreen displays can be superimposed and output to an external monitor (A 165).  
[¢ Video Setup] > [MON.].  
The video signal will change automatically depending on the capability of the external monitor.  
Only when [¢ Video Setup] > [HDMI] is set to [+1920x1080 59.94P].  
Connecting to an External Monitor  
Connecting to an External Monitor  
When you connect the camcorder to an external monitor for recording or playback, use the terminal on the  
camcorder that matches the one you wish to use on the monitor. Then, select the video signal output  
configuration (A 159). The camcorder can output video from all of the video output terminals simultaneously.  
162  
Operating modes:  
Connection Diagram  
We recommend that you power the camcorder from a household power outlet using the compact power adapter.  
AV OUT  
terminal  
MON. terminal  
MI OUT  
erminal  
3G/HD-SDI  
terminal  
HDMI cable  
(commercially  
available)  
STV-250N  
Stereo Video  
Cable (optional)  
BNC cable  
(commercially  
available)  
HDMI IN  
AV IN  
3G-SDI IN or HD SDI IN  
HD SDI IN or SDI IN  
           
Connecting to an External Monitor  
Using the 3G/HD-SDI Terminal  
[¢ Video Setup]  
[3G/HD-SDI]  
[Off]  
The digital signal output from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal includes the video  
signal, audio signal (2 or 4 channels) and time code signal. If necessary,  
perform the following procedure to activate the terminal and select the  
type of signal output. Turning the output off will conserve the camcorder’s  
power.  
163  
1 Open the [3G/HD-SDI] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [3G/HD-SDI]  
[¢ Video Setup]  
[3G-SDI Mapping]  
[Level B]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
3 To select the mapping mode for 1080/59.94P output, open the  
[3G-SDI Mapping] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [3G-SDI Mapping]  
4 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• You can select a video output signal compliant with Level A or Level B  
of the SMPTE ST 425-1 standard.  
Options  
1
[Direct] :The video recording signal is output unchanged.  
1
[Compatible] : The video signal output is compatible with mosernal mors.  
2
[On] :There is video output from the terminal.  
[Off]:No video output from the terminal.  
1
2
mode only.  
mode only.  
NOTES  
• If necessary, you can superimpose he onseen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 165).  
Using the MON. Terminal  
[¢ Video Setup]  
The digital signal output from the MON. terminal also includes the video  
signal, audio signal (2 or 4 channels) and time code signal. If necessary,  
perform the following procedure to activate the terminal and change the  
output to HD or SD. Turning the output off will conserve the camcorder's  
[MON.]  
[Off]  
power.  
1 Open the [MON.] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [MON.]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• If you selected [SD], you can select the SD output method (A 165).  
NOTES  
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 165).  
           
Connecting to an External Monitor  
Using the HDMI OUT Terminal  
The HDMITM OUT terminal also offers a digital connection and outputs both a video and audio signal (2 channels  
only).  
The output of the HDMI OUT terminal depends on the [¢ Video Setup] > [3G/HD-SDI], [MON.] and  
[HDMI] settings. When [¢ Video Setup] > [MON.] is set to [Off], the output signal will switch automatically  
depending on the capability of the external monitor.  
164  
The output of the HDMI OUT terminal depends on the [¢ Video Setup] > [HDMI] setting and the  
capability of the external monitor.  
1
If necessary, check the settings for the 3G/HD-SDI  
terminal (A 163) and MON. terminal (A 163), as they can affect  
the output from the HDMI OUT terminal as well.  
[¢ Video Setup]  
[HDMI]  
• To use the 1080/59.94P video output, set [¢ Video Setup] > [3G/  
HD-SDI] to [Direct] or [Off].  
[Normal]  
• For details, refer the video output configuration tables (A 159).  
2 Open the [HDMI] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [HDMI]  
3 Select [Normal] (no 1080/59.94P output) or [+1920x1080/59.94P] and then press SET.  
NOTES  
• The HDMI OUT terminal is for output only. Do not connamcorr to another device’s output terminal  
using the HDMI OUT terminal as this will cause a malfu
• Correct operation cannot be guaranteed whectincamcorder to DVI monitors.  
• Video may not be output correctly dependinnitoIn such case, use another terminal.  
• If necessary, you can superimpose e nscron the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 165).  
• However, when [HDMI] is set to [+20x108059.94P], onscreen displays will not be superimposed during the  
output of 1080/59.94P video. In  
moand in  
mode during playback, only the live/playback  
image will be displayed on the external nitor; while the [MP4] or [Photos] index screen appears on the  
camcorder’s screen, only the thumbnails of the clips or photos will be displayed on the external monitor.  
• You can select the SD output method (A 165).  
Using the AV OUT Terminal  
When you output video from the AV OUT terminal, the video signal is converted to an analog SD composite  
video signal. In addition, the AV OUT terminal also outputs audio. You can select the SD output method  
(A 165).  
NOTES  
• When you play back a clip on a monitor with a 4:3 aspect ratio, the monitor will switch automatically to  
widescreen mode if it is compatible with the Video ID-1system.  
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor  
(A 165).  
       
Connecting to an External Monitor  
SD Output  
[¢ Video Setup]  
[HD/SD Output]  
[Resize SD Output]  
[Letterbox]  
When HD video with a 16:9 aspect ratio is converted and output from the  
MON. terminal*, HDMI OUT terminal or AV OUT terminal as SD video with  
a 4:3 aspect ratio, you can choose how it appears on the external  
monitor.  
165  
*
only.  
1 Open the [Resize SD Output] submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [HD/SD Output] > [Resize SD Output]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
[Letterbox]:The 16:9 aspect ratio is maintained but black letterbox bars are added to the top and bottom of the image.  
[Squeeze]:The image is squeezed from the left and right so that the entire image fits within the screen. The image will  
appear normal if the external monitor also has a 16:9 aspect ratio.  
[Side Crop]:The left and right sides of the image are cropped so that the central part of the image fits within the screen.  
Original image (16:9)  
[Letterbox] setting  
[Squeetting  
[Side Crop] setting  
Superimposing Onscreen Displays ar oan  
External Monitor  
[¢ Video Setup]  
You can choose to superimpose ocreen displays on the video output  
from the MON. terminal*, HDMI OUT erminar AV OUT terminal. Doing  
so will display the onscreen displays on ternal monitor. You can set  
this function separately for HD and SD output. This setting will not affect  
your recordings.  
[HD/SD Output]  
[HD Onscreen Displays]  
[SD Onscreen Displays]  
*
only.  
[Off]  
1 Open the [HD Onscreen Displays] or [SD Onscreen Displays]  
submenu.  
[¢ Video Setup] > [HD/SD Output] > [HD Onscreen Displays] or [SD Onscreen Displays]  
2 Select [On] and then press SET.  
• If [£ OLED/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 2] > [Output Display] is set to [On], T appears on the  
upper right of the screen.  
NOTES  
• Onscreen displays will not appear on an external monitor for SD output if [¢ Video Setup] > [HD/SD  
Output] > [Resize SD Output] is set to [Side Crop].  
• If you set an assignable button to [Onscreen Display] (A 129), you can press the button to turn on and off the  
superimposing of onscreen displays on video output from the camcorder’s terminals (simultaneously for HD  
and SD video).  
       
Audio Output  
Audio Output  
The camcorder can output audio from the 3G/HD-SDI terminal*, MON. terminal*, HDMI OUT terminal, AV OUT  
terminal or × (headphone) terminal. When audio is output from the AV OUT terminal or × (headphone) terminal,  
you can configure settings such as the output channel. When audio is output from the AV OUT terminal, you can  
select the output level. Additionally, during playback of MXF clips recorded with 4-channel audio, you can select  
the channels output from the HDMI OUT terminal.  
166  
*
only.  
Selecting the Audio Channel  
You can select the audio channels that are output from the various terminals.  
Audio Output from the AV OUT Terminal or × (headphone) Terminal  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Monitor Channels] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Monitor Channels]  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Output]  
[Monitor Channels]  
[CH1/CH2]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
• The icon of the selected channels will appear on the e  
screen, above the audio level meter.  
NOTES  
• If you set an assignable button to onitor Cha129), you can  
press the button to cycle through e audio chantions.  
Audio Output from the HDMI OUminal  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Output]  
[HDMI Channels]  
[CH1/CH2]  
During 2-channel audio recording, the audio channels output from the  
HDMI OUT terminal are [CH1/CH2] and cannot be changed. During the  
recording/playback of MXF clips with 4 audio channels, you can select  
which two channels to output from the HDMI OUT terminal.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [HDMI Channels] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [HDMI Channels]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
Audio output  
Setting  
L
R
[CH1/CH2]  
CH1  
CH2  
[CH1/CH1]  
CH1  
CH2  
CH1  
[CH2/CH2]  
CH2  
CH1+CH2 mixed  
CH4  
[CH1+2/CH1+2]  
[CH3/CH4]*  
[CH3/CH3]*  
[CH4/CH4]*  
CH1+CH2 mixed  
CH3  
CH3  
CH3  
CH4  
CH4  
       
Audio Output  
Audio output  
Setting  
L
R
[CH3+4/CH3+4]*  
[CH1+3/CH2+4]*  
CH3+CH4 mixed  
CH1+CH3 mixed  
CH3+CH4 mixed  
CH2+CH4 mixed  
167  
* Only available during the recording/playback of MXF clips with 4 audio channels.  
Synchronizing the Video with the Audio being Monitored  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
[Audio Output]  
[Monitor Delay]  
[Normal]  
When audio is output from the AV OUT terminal or × (headphone)  
terminal, you can choose to synchronize the audio signal with the video  
signal or have the camcorder output the audio in real time.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [Monitor Delay] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Monitor Delay]  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
Options  
[Line Out]:Synchronizes the audio and video signals.  
[Normal]:Allows you to monitor the audio in real time. There light delbetween the audio and video.  
NOTES  
• The audio and video signals recored ill be ed, regardless of the [Monitor Delay] setting.  
Selecting the Output Level of the AV OUT Terminal  
[¡ Audio Setup]  
You can select the output level of audio that is output from the AV OUT  
terminal.  
[Audio Output]  
Operating modes:  
[Level]  
1 Open the audio ouput [Level] submenu.  
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Level]  
[1 Vrms]  
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.  
Options  
[1 Vrms]:The audio output level is normal.  
[2 Vrms]:The audio output level is 6 dB higher.  
NOTES  
• This setting does not affect audio output to headphones.  
         
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Saving Clips to a Computer  
The software used to save your clips on a computer depends on the movie format of the clips. Use Canon XF  
Utility to save MXF clips or one of the Canon XF plugins* to import MXF clips into a non-linear editing (NLE)  
software. Use the supplied software Data Import Utility to save MP4 clips.  
168  
* Plugins are available for NLE software by Avid and Apple.  
Saving MXF Clips  
Canon XF Utility and the Canon XF plugins are available for free download from your local Canon Web site.  
Refer to the Web site for the system requirements and the latest information about the software and plugins.  
Canon XF Utility: Browser for transferring clips to a computer, playing back and checking video, and managing  
clips.  
Plugins for non-linear editing (NLE) software: The plugins allow you to transfer clips from a computer or a CF  
card (connected via USB reader to a computer) to the NLE software. The following plugins are available.  
- Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access (Windows or Mac OS)  
- Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro/Final Cut Pro X (Mac OS)  
For details about using the software, refer to the instruction manua(PDile) that is installed with the software/  
plugin. Refer to Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals (A 170) fails on accessing the manuals.  
The following procedures for Windows systems are writteon a cputer running Windows 7. The  
procedure may be different for other versions. For details elp moes of the operating system.  
Operating modes:  
Installing Canon XF Utility (Widows)  
1 Double-click the file that you downaded frthe Canon Web site to decompress it.  
• The file is xuw*****.zip for Canon XF tilior xpmw*****.zip for Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access.  
The rest of the explanation refers only to Canon XF Utility but the procedure is similar for the Canon XF  
plugin.  
• The folder xuw***** will be created that contains the file xuw***.exe.  
2 Double-click xuw***.exe.  
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to select your area (continent), country/region and/or language, as necessary.  
• Available options will vary depending on your country/region.  
4 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications, exit other applications and then click OK.  
• The software’s license agreement appears.  
5 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation.  
• If you do not select Yes, you cannot install the software.  
• When the installation has completed, Installation has completed successfully appears.  
6 Click Next and then click Finish.  
Uninstalling Canon XF Utility (Windows)  
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Uninstall Canon XF  
Utility.  
• A confirmation screen appears.  
2 Click Yes to begin uninstalling the software.  
• When the software has been uninstalled, The software has been successfully uninstalled appears.  
3 Click OK.  
           
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Uninstalling Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access and Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder  
(Windows)  
1 In the Control Panel, open Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs.  
• A list of installed programs appears.  
169  
2 Select the plugin/decoder you wish to uninstall.  
3 Click Uninstall or Uninstall/Change and follow the instructions to uninstall the plugin/decoder.  
Uninstalling the Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Instructions  
1 From the Start menu, open All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access  
> Uninstall Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual.  
2 When the confirmation screen appears, click Yes and then click OK.  
Installing Canon XF Utility (Mac OS)  
1 Double-click the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site to decompress it.  
• The downloaded file is xum*****.dmg.gz for Canon XF Utility, xpmm*****.dmg.gz for Canon XF Plugin for  
Avid Media Access, or xpfm*****.dmg.gz for Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro/Final Cut Pro X. The rest of  
the explanation refers only to Canon XF Utility but the procedure is imilar for the Canon XF plugins.  
• The file xum*****.dmg will be created.  
2 Double-click xum*****.dmg.  
• The xum*** icon will appear on the desktop.  
3 Double-click xum*** and then double-click XUMnstall
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to select yontinnt), country/region and/or language, as necessary.  
• Available options will vary dependng on yregi.  
5 After the message appears promting you to applications, exit other applications and then click OK.  
• The software’s license agreemt appears.  
6 Read the license agreement and cliYes begin the installation.  
• If you do not select Yes, you cannot install the software.  
• When the installation has completed, Installation has completed successfully appears.  
7 Click Next and then click Finish.  
Uninstalling the Software (Mac OS)  
Drag and drop to Trash the file or folder corresponding to the item you wish to uninstall.  
Software/Plugin/Manual  
Canon XF Utility  
File/Folder  
/Applications/Canon Utilities/Canon XF Utility  
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro  
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X  
Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access  
Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder  
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/MIO/RAD/Plugins/CanonXF.RADPlug  
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/MIO/RADPlugins/CanonXF64.RADPlug  
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/Avid/AVX2_Plug-ins/AMA/MVP_CanonXF64.avx  
/Library/QuickTime/XFMpeg2Dec.component  
Canon XF Plugin Instructions  
/Applications/Canon Utilities/Desired plugin name  
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals  
For details on using the software, refer to the instruction manual (PDF file) of each module. The instruction  
manuals are installed with the software. You can also view the instruction manual by starting the Canon XF  
Utility software and then selecting Help > View Instruction Manual.  
170  
Viewing the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual  
Windows:  
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Canon XF Utility  
Instruction Manual.  
2 Select the language of the instruction manual to view.  
Mac OS:  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Manual.  
2 Open the folder of the desired language and double-click the PDF file.  
Viewing the Plugin Instructions  
Windows:  
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access  
> Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual
2 Select the desired language.  
Mac OS:  
1 From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Desired plue > Manl.  
2 Open the folder of the desired language and ck tPDF file.  
Saving MP4 Clips  
Using the supplied software Data Importiy, you can save MP4 clips to a computer. Data Import Utility will  
also automatically join multiple MP4 clips of a single scene that were split every 4 GB because of file size limits  
and save them as a single video file.  
For more details, refer to ‘Data Import Utility Software Guide’, a PDF file in the [\Manual\English] folder of the  
supplied software CD-ROM.  
IMPORTANT  
• Before saving MP4 clips to your computer with Data Import Utility using an SD card reader or your  
computer’s memory card slot, do not access or manipulate the files on the SD card with other software. Failing  
to do so may result in not being able to save the files to your computer.  
Installing Data Import Utility  
See Installation and System requirements in the ‘Data Import Utility Software Guide’ Software Guide (PDF file) for  
step-by-step installation instructions and system requirements.  
         
Saving Clips to a Computer  
Connecting the Camcorder to a Computer  
Connect the camcorder to a computer using the optional IFC-400PCU USB cable. Use the appropriate software  
as described in the previous sections to save your recordings.  
171  
Operating modes:  
1 Power the camcorder using the compact power adapter.  
2 On the camcorder, hold down the button on the Q switch and slide the switch to MEDIA.  
3 Connect the camcorder to the computer using the optional IFC-400PCU USB cable.  
USB terminal  
IFC-400PCU USB Cable  
(optional)  
     
Saving Clips to a Computer  
172  
Network Functions  
7
173  
About the Network Functions  
After you connect the camcorder to a network via Wi-Fi (A 174) or wired LAN (A 179), you can use the  
following network functions. You can save up to 5 network configurations and switch easily between them  
depending on your working environment. You can check the current network settings on the status screens  
(A 215) and change them if necessary (A 181).  
Network functions and connection types  
Wi-Fi  
Wired  
LAN  
Network function  
Description  
A
Camera Access  
1
Infrastructure  
2
Point  
Control the camcorder remotely from the Web  
browser of a connected device.  
Browser Remote  
Ü
–
–
Ü
Ü
182  
188  
Send a proxy video file from the camcorder to a  
connected device to save locally on the device.  
Real-Time Proxy Transfer  
FTP File Transfer  
–
Transfer clips recorded with the camcorder to  
another device connected to the network usi
the FTP protocol.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
189  
193  
Access the MP4 clips or photos rd on th
SD card in the camcorder fro
browser of a connected devicr  
save locally.  
Playback via Browser  
–
1
2
Connection to a Wi-Fi network via an exnal access point less router, etc.)  
Direct connection to one Wi-Fi-enabled dce wherhe camcorder serves as the Wi-Fi access point.  
Before using the network functions  
• The instructions in this chapter assume you already have a correctly configured and working network, network  
device(s) and/or Wi-Fi access point. If necessary, refer to the documentation provided with the network  
devices you want to use.  
• Configuring the network settings requires adequate knowledge about configuring and using wired (Ethernet)  
and/or wireless (Wi-Fi) networks. Canon cannot provide support regarding network configurations.  
IMPORTANT  
• Canon shall not be liable for any loss of data or damage resulting from incorrect network configuration or  
settings. Additionally, Canon shall not be liable for any loss or damage caused by the use of network functions.  
• Using an unprotected Wi-Fi network can expose your files and data to monitoring by unauthorized third  
parties. Be aware of the risks involved.  
NOTES  
• About the Wi-Fi antenna: When using the camcorder's Wi-Fi functions,  
do not cover the Wi-Fi antenna with your hand or other object. Covering  
it may interfere with wireless signals.  
• Do not open either of the CF card slot covers or the SD card slot cover  
while using network functions.  
     
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
The camcorder is Wi-Fi certified and can connect to a Wi-Fi network using an external access  
point (wireless router) or can itself serve as a Wi-Fi access point. The camcorder can connect to  
wireless routers (access points) compliant with the 802.11a/b/g/n protocol and are Wi-Fi certified  
(bear the logo shown on the right).  
174  
The camcorder offers 5 ways to connect to a Wi-Fi network and the method you use will depend on the type and  
specifications of the access point and network you want to use. Note that using an unprotected Wi-Fi network  
can expose your data to monitoring by unauthorized third parties. Be aware of the risks involved.  
Operating modes:  
WPS (button): If your wireless router supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), setup will be  
easy and require minimal configuring and no passwords. To check if your wireless router  
has a WPS button and for details about how to activate the Wi-Fi protected setup, refer to  
the instruction manual of your wireless router.  
WPS (PIN code): Even if your wireless router does not have a dedicated WPS button, it may support WPS using  
a PIN code instead. For setup using a PIN code, you will need to know in advance how to activate the wireless  
router’s WPS function. For details refer to the instruction manual of your wireless router.  
Searching for Access Points: If your access point does not suppohe PS function or you cannot activate it,  
you can have the camcorder search for access points in the aea.  
Manual Setup: If the access point you want to use has ste activd and it cannot be automatically  
detected by the camcorder, you can enter all the nessargs manually. This requires more advanced  
knowledge of Wi-Fi and network settings.  
Camera Access Point: When shooting a locahere re no access points available, the camcorder  
can serve as a wireless access poinWi-Fi enaes will be able to connect to the camcorder directly.  
* Limited only to the connection between tcamcorder and rted Wi-Fi enabled devices. The functionality is not the same  
as that of commercially available access pts.  
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)  
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is the easiest way to connect to a Wi-Fi access point. You can do simply by  
pushing a button (if the access point (wireless router) you want to connect to has a WPS button) or using a PIN  
code issued by the camcorder.  
Wireless Routers with a WPS Button  
1 Open the [Set Up New] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
[w Other Functions]  
> [Set Up New]  
[Network Settings]  
2 Select the [WPS: Button] method.  
[Wi-Fi] > [Infrastructure] > [WPS: Button]  
[Connection Settings]  
3 Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.  
• The length of time required to hold down the WPS button depends  
on the wireless router. Refer to the instruction manual of your wireless  
router and make sure the wireless router’s WPS function is activated.  
[Set Up New]  
     
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
4 Within 2 minutes, press SET on the camcorder.  
• While [Connecting] appears on the screen, you can press SET or the CANCEL button to cancel the  
operation.  
• After the connection is correctly established, continue with the procedure to configure the IP address  
assignment (A 178).  
175  
NOTES  
• The [WPS: Button] method may not work correctly if there are several active access points in the area. In such  
case try using [WPS: PIN Code] or [Search for Access Points] (A 175) instead.  
WPS using a PIN code  
1 Open the [Set Up New] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings] > [Set Up New]  
2 Select the [WPS: PIN Code] method.  
[Wi-Fi] > [Infrastructure] > [WPS: PIN Code]  
• The camcorder will generate and display an 8-digit PIN code.  
3 Enter the PIN code from step 2 into the wireless router’s WPS (PIN code) setup screen.  
• For most wireless routers, you must use a Web browser to access he setup screen.  
• For details about how to access your wireless router’s settings ctivate the Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
(WPS) using a PIN code, refer to the instruction maur wiress router.  
4 Within 2 minutes, press SET on the camcorder.  
• While [Connecting] appears on the screepreSET or the CANCEL button to cancel the  
operation.  
• After the connection is correctlestablishewith the procedure to configure the IP address  
assignment (A 178).  
Searching for Access Points  
The camcorder will automatically detect access points in the vicinity. After you select the desired access point,  
you only need to enter the selected network’s encryption key (password) to connect the camcorder.  
1 Open the [Set Up New] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
[w Other Functions]  
> [Set Up New]  
[Network Settings]  
2 Select the [Search for Access Points] method.  
[Wi-Fi] > [Infrastructure] > [Search for Access Points]  
[Connection Settings]  
• The camcorder will search for active access points in your area and  
display a list of available options.  
[Set Up New]  
   
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
3 Push the joystick up/down to select the desired access  
point and then press SET.  
Current access point/Total number  
of active access points detected  
• If the access point is encrypted (C), enter the encryption  
key (password) with the following procedure. Otherwise,  
continue with the procedure to configure the IP address  
assignment (A 178).  
176  
Encrypted access point  
Network name (SSID)  
Encrypted Access Points  
1 If necessary, select the WEP index key.  
• This step is only necessary if the Wi-Fi network’s authentication method is set to [Shared Key] or if the  
encryption method is set to [WEP].  
2 To enter the [Encryption Key] (password), select [Input] and then press SET.  
• Enter the password of the selected Wi-Fi network using the keyboard screen (A 176).  
3 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignent (A 178).  
NOTES  
Valid encryption keys vary depending on the encryption m
64-bit WEP encryption: 5 ASCII characters odecil characters.  
128-bit WEP encryption: 13 ASCII characters eciml characters.  
AES / TKIP encryption: 8 to 63 ASII charactexadecimal characters.  
* Note: ASCII characters include the numb0 to 9, the lettz and A to Z and some punctuation marks and special  
symbols. Hexadecimal characters comprithe numbes 0 to 9 and the letters a to f and A to F.  
Using the Virtual Keyboard Screen  
The virtual keyboard is displayed on the OLED screen.  
1 Use the joystick to select a character and then press SET to  
add it.  
• If you are entering sensitive information, like a password, the  
character you entered will change to “‹” after a moment to  
protect the password.  
• Use the arrows (ð/ñ/ò/ó) to change the position of the  
cursor and the backspace character (™) to delete the last  
Current character / Character limit  
character entered.  
• Repeat this step as necessary to enter the desired text.  
2 After entering the desired text, select [OK] and then press SET to close the keyboard screen.  
3 Back in the original screen, select [OK] and then press SET to confirm the text and continue.  
   
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
Manual Setup  
If you prefer, you can enter manually the details of the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. Follow the  
instructions on the screen to complete the procedure.  
1 Open the [Set Up New] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
177  
[w Other Functions]  
> [Set Up New]  
[Network Settings]  
2 Select the [Manual] method.  
[Wi-Fi] > [Infrastructure] > [Manual]  
[Connection Settings]  
3 To enter the [SSID] (network name), select [Input] and then press  
SET.  
[Set Up New]  
• Enter the SSID (network name) of the selected Wi-Fi network using  
the keyboard screen (A 176).  
4 Select the Wi-Fi network’s authentication method and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Shared Key], skip to step 6.  
5 Select the Wi-Fi network’s encryption method and then press SET.  
• If the authentication method is [Open], you can select [WEP] and continue to step 6, or [No encryption] and  
skip to step 7.  
• If the authentication method is [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK], ycaselect [TKIP] or [AES].  
6 Enter the encryption key as described in Encryptess Pois (A 176).  
7 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP assignmt (A 178).  
Camera Access Point  
In this mode the camcorder itself sees as a ireless access point to which other Wi-Fi-enabled devices can  
connect. Follow the instructions on thscreeto complete the procedure.  
1 Open the [Set Up New] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
[w Other Functions]  
> [Set Up New]  
[Network Settings]  
2 Select the [Camera Access Point] method.  
[Wi-Fi] > [Camera Access Point]  
[Connection Settings]  
3 To enter the [SSID] (network name), select [Input] and then press  
SET.  
[Set Up New]  
• Enter the SSID (network name) the camcorder will use as a Wi-Fi  
access point using the keyboard screen (A 176).  
• The network name is needed to connect the network device to the  
camcorder. If necessary, write it down.  
4 Select the wireless connection mode (5 GHz band or 2.4 GHz band) and then press SET.  
5 Select the channel and then press SET.  
• Available channels will be different depending on the wireless connection mode selected in the previous  
step.  
6 Select the encryption method and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Open/No encryption], skip to step 8. If you selected [WPA2-PSK/AES], continue with step 7.  
7 Enter the encryption key as described in Encrypted Access Points (A 176).  
• This encryption key (password) is needed to connect the network device to the camcorder. If necessary,  
write it down.  
       
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
8 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 178).  
178  
Configuring the IP Address Settings  
At this point you need to configure the TCP/IP settings for the camcorder to be able to connect to a wired or  
Wi-Fi network. If you need to configure the TCP/IP settings manually, consult the network administrator to obtain  
the relevant information.  
1 Select the method for assigning the IP address: Select [Automatic] or [Manual] and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Automatic], IP settings will be assigned automatically. Continue with the procedure to review  
and save the configuration (A 178).  
2 If you selected [Manual], enter manually the IP address assigned to the camcorder.  
• Push the joystick up/down to select a value for the first field and then press SET to move to the next field.  
After completing the four fields of an address, select [Set] and then press SET to confirm the address.  
3 Enter the [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway] addresses in the same way.  
• For Camera Access Point connections, the rest of the procedure is not necessary. Continue with the  
procedure to review and save the configuration (A 178).  
4 Select the method for setting up the DNS server: Select [Do nouse DNS] or [Manual].  
• If you selected [Do not use DNS], a DNS server will not be usedonue with the procedure to review and  
save the configuration (A 178).  
5 If you selected [Manual], enter the [Primary DNS Sd [Secodary DNS Server] using the  
method described in step 2.  
• After entering the secondary DNS server, h thprocedure to review and save the configuration  
(A 178).  
Saving the Configuration  
1 Review the access point’s configuration and then press SET.  
• The first screen shows the access point’s SSID and the type of connection. Push the joystick up/down to  
review additional settings before pressing SET.  
2 Select the desired configuration number and then press SET.  
• You can save up to 5 different network configuration profiles in the camcorder. If you select a configuration  
number that was already in use, the previous configuration will be overwritten by the new one.  
3 To change the [Network Configuration Name], select [Input] and then press SET.  
• If you wish, you can give the network configuration profile a more descriptive name to make it easier to  
identify. Enter the desired name using the keyboard screen (A 176).  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET to save the network configuration.  
5 When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
     
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network  
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network  
Connect the camcorder to a router or other device connected to a wired (Ethernet) network using a  
commercially available LAN cable. Use Category 5e, shielded twisted pair (STP) LAN cables compatible with  
Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) with good shielding capability.  
179  
LAN access indicator  
LAN port on a  
network device  
LAN cable  
(commercially available)  
1 Connect a commercially available LAN cable to the LAN termil on the camcorder and a LAN port  
on a network device.  
2 Open the [Set Up New] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connetings]  
[w Other Functions]  
> [Set Up New]  
[Network Settings]  
3 Select [Ethernet] and then press SET.  
• Continue with the procedure to onfure ss assignment  
(A 178).  
[Connection Settings]  
[Set Up New]  
     
Selecting a Network Connection  
Selecting a Network Connection  
You can save up to 5 different network configuration profiles. You can select which one to use depending on  
where you plan to use the camcorder. If you just saved a new network configuration (A 178), that network  
configuration will already be automatically selected and this procedure is not required.  
180  
1 Open the [Select] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
[w Other Functions]  
> [Select]  
[Network Settings]  
2 Select the desired configuration number and then press SET.  
• The camcorder will connect to the selected network only when you  
activate a network function. The icon displayed on the top left of the  
[Connection Settings]  
screen will indicate the type of network selected and the connection  
status. Refer to the following table.  
[Select]  
Connection type  
Onscreen  
Connection type  
Connection status  
display  
Wi-Fi  
(Infrastructure)  
In yellow: The camcorder is connecting to or disconnecting from  
the network. In white: The network function can be ud.  
Wi-Fi  
In yellow: Starting the camcorder’s access poi. In w: The  
camcorder’s access point is ready. Connect the i bled  
device to the camcorder.  
(Camera Access Point)  
• On the device: Open the Wi-Fi en and set the  
network name (SSID) that was smcorder. If  
necessary, enter trd set camcorder (A 177).  
LAN (Ethernet)  
In yellow: The camting r disconnecting from  
the netwThe LAor wilash as well.  
In w: The network e used. The LAN access  
indior will illuminate
• If set [w Other Functions] > [LAN (Ethernet) LED] to [Off],  
the N access dicator will not illuminate.  
   
Changing Network Settings  
Changing Network Settings  
You can edit the settings of the currently selected network configuration profile even after the initial setup.  
Changing settings manually requires more advanced knowledge of Wi-Fi and network settings. Turn off any  
active network functions and wait until the network icons disappear from the screen before starting the  
procedure.  
181  
1 Select the network configuration profile whose settings you want to change (A 180).  
2 Open the [Edit] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]  
> [Edit]  
[w Other Functions]  
3 Continue with one of the following procedures depending on the  
[Network Settings]  
settings you wish to change.  
[Connection Settings]  
Changing Network Settings  
4 Select [Settings] and then press SET.  
[Edit]  
5 If in step 1 you selected a Wi-Fi connection, select [Infrastructure]  
or [Camera Access Point].  
• Continue the procedure as described in Manual Setup (A 177, frm step 3) or Camera Access Point  
(A 177, from step 3).  
If in step 1 you selected a LAN connection, selecatic] oManual] and then press SET.  
• If you selected [Automatic], IP settings will be assignmatically d no further settings are necessary.  
Select [OK] and then press SET twice to sconfiation.  
• If you selected [Manual], continue the proesced in Manual Setup (A 177, from step 3).  
Renaming the Configuration rofile  
Each network configuration profile is tored uder a configuration number ([No. 1] to [No. 5]). You can rename it  
with a more familiar name to make it ear distinguish between various networks you use.  
4 Select [Rename] and then press SET.  
5 To enter the new [Network Configuration Name], select [Input] and then press SET.  
• Enter the desired network configuration name using the keyboard screen (A 176).  
   
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device  
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network  
Device  
After connecting the camcorder to a network (Wi-Fi or using the LAN terminal), you can control the camcorder  
remotely from the Web browser of a connected network device* using the Browser Remote application. Browser  
Remote lets you monitor the image through live view, start and stop recording and remotely control the shutter  
speed, gain and other settings. You can also create, edit and transfer a metadata profile** and check the  
recording media, remaining recording time, time code, etc.  
182  
* For details about compatible devices, operating systems, Web browsers, etc., please visit your local Canon Web site.  
**MXF clips only.  
Operating modes:  
Setting Up Browser Remote  
Camcorder Settings  
You can set a unique camcorder identification code and designate the port that the Browser Remote application  
should use when accessing the camcorder through network. The port nmber (HTTP protocol) used by Browser  
Remote is usually set to port 80, but you can change it if necessaThamcorder ID will appear on the  
Browser Remote screen, making it easy to identify which camcorder tpplication is controlling in case of a  
multi-camera shooting setup.  
1 Open the [Camera Settings] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] Setgs] >  
[w Other Functions]  
[Camera Settings]  
2 Push the joystick up/down to slect a value first digit of  
[Network Settings]  
the port number and then press ET to ove to the next digit.  
3 After completing all the digits, sele[St] and then press SET to  
confirm the port number.  
[Remote Settings]  
[Camera Settings]  
4 To enter the [Camera ID], select [Input] and then press SET.  
• Enter the desired camcorder ID using the keyboard screen (A 176).  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET to save the network  
configuration.  
6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
User Settings  
A user name and password are required before the Browser Remote application can access and operate the  
camcorder. You can set up to three different users and select whether you want to allow single-user operation  
(full control) or two-user operation (one controlling camcorder functions and another in charge of metadata input  
for MXF clips).  
[Full Control User]  
Can access all 3 Browser Remote screens: [Advanced Control], [Basic Control] and  
[Metadata Input].  
[Camera Control User] Can access only the [Advanced Control] screen. This would be the main operator  
controlling the camcorder.  
[Meta Control User]  
Can access only the [Metadata Input] screen. This would be the person in charge of  
keeping the MXF clip information up to date.  
           
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device  
1 Open the [Users Settings] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [Remote Settings] >  
[Users Settings]  
[w Other Functions]  
[Network Settings]  
[Remote Settings]  
[Users Settings]  
2 To enter the [User Name] for the [Full Control User], select [Input]  
and then press SET.  
• Enter the desired user name using the keyboard screen (A 176).  
183  
3 Enter the [Password] for the [Full Control User] in the same way.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the user names and passwords for  
the [Camera Control User] and [Meta Control User].  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET to save the network  
configuration. When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
6 Back in the [Remote Settings] submenu, select [Select User] and then press SET.  
7 Select [One User (Full Control)] or [Two Users (Camera/Meta)] and then press SET.  
8 Select [OK] and then press SET to save the network configuration. When the confirmation screen  
appears, press SET.  
Starting Browser Remote  
After connecting the camcorder to the network, you can BrowseRemote application on the Web  
browser* of any network device connected to thme ne. You can check the Browser Remote settings  
on the status screens (A 216).  
* A Web browser that supports JavaScript enablookieis required.  
Preparations on the camcorr  
Operating modes:  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Connect the camcorder to the desired network (A 180).  
• Select a Camera Access Point connection or a wired network  
[Network Functions]  
connection.  
[Off]  
2 To activate Browser Remote on the camcorder, open the  
[Network Functions] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Functions]  
3 Select [Browser Remote] and then press SET.  
•
will appear on the top of the screen, next to the connection type icon. When the icons turn white, the  
camcorder is ready to accept commands from the Browser Remote application.  
• With Camera Access Point connections, you need to actively connect the Wi-Fi enabled device to the  
camcorder.  
4 Check the camcorder’s IP address on the status screen.  
• Set an assignable button to [Status] in advance (A 129). Press the assignable button to open the status  
screens and push the joystick up/down to select the [Network Settings 4/10] status screen.  
• Check the IP address assigned to the camcorder ([IP Address]) and, if necessary, write it down.  
• Press the assignable button set to [Status] again to close the status screens  
   
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device  
On the connected network device  
1 Start the Web browser on the network device.  
2 Enter the camcorder’s URL.  
• Enter the IP address you checked previously into the Web browser’s  
address bar, adding the prefix “http://”.  
184  
• If the you chose a port other than the default port [80], you can  
specify it by adding “:nnn” at the end of the URL. For example  
“http://192.168.0.80:095”.  
Camcorder’s IP address from the  
status screen  
3 Enter the user name and password.  
• Be sure to log in with the user name and password of one of the  
users that were set on the camcorder (A 182). If necessary,  
consult the administrator who configured the camcorder’s settings.  
• The Browser Remote screen will appear. The screen displayed will  
differ depending on the user information used to log in.  
Example of the login screen. The screen may  
differ depending on the Web browser and  
version used.  
• While Browser Remote is correctly connected to the camcorder, the  
above the time code will turn on one by one and then turn  
off in an endless loop.  
• The camcorder’s ID will appear on the Browser Remote screen  
while live view is not activated. In the [Metadata Input] screen, t apars at the bottom of the screen.  
Screen selection tabs appear only for [Full Control
Language selection  
Network connection  
indicator  
Camcorder ID  
4 Select the language for Browser Remote.  
• Press the [Î] next to the language button and select the desired language from the  
list. Most buttons and controls emulate physical controls on the camcorder and are  
labeled in English only, regardless of the language selected.  
5 Use the Browser Remote controls to operate the camcorder.  
• Descriptions of the controls are given in the following pages. Detailed operation is  
given in each function’s reference page.  
6 When you have finished using Browser Remote, on the camcorder set  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Functions] to [Off] and the press SET.  
• The network icons will turn yellow and then disappear from the camcorder’s screen  
and the connection with the application will be terminated.  
 
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device  
NOTES  
• Depending on the network used and the strength of the Wi-Fi signal (for Wi-Fi connections), you may notice  
delays in the refreshing of the live view image and other settings.  
• While color bars are displayed on the camcorder, the live view image will not be displayed.  
185  
The [Advanced Control] Screen  
* [Full Control User]/[Camera Control User] only.  
When using a computer, tablet and other devices with larger screens, the [Advanced Control] screen offers all  
the controls available for operating the camcorder remotely via Browser Remote. For details, refer to each  
function’s explanation.  
6
7
8
9 10 11 12  
13  
14  
15  
1
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
2
3
4
5
23  
24  
25  
26  
1
2
Live view screen* (A 50)  
Current functions of assignable buttons 1 to 4*  
15 Recording media selection and approximate  
remaining recording time  
(A 129)  
Focus controls (A 81)  
16 Full auto mode/Infrared mode indicator* (A 49,  
126)  
3
4
5
6
Assignable buttons 1 and 2 (A 130)  
IRIS (ND) -/+ buttons (A 65)  
Browser Remote screen selection tabs  
([Full Control User] only)  
Language selection (A 184)  
Focus mode button (A 81, 83)  
Double slot recording* (A 42)  
17 SLOT SELECT (CF card slot selection) button  
(A 41)  
18 ND filter buttons (A 67)  
19 White balance controls (A 69)  
20 Aperture controls (A 65)  
21 Shutter speed controls (A 58)  
22 Gain controls (A 62)  
7
8
9
10 Recording operation (A 52)  
23 Zoom controls (A 79)  
11 Network connection indicator*  
12 Time code* (A 90)  
13 Key lock button (Browser Remote controls only)  
14 Approximate remaining battery charge*  
24 Assignable buttons 3 and 4 (A 130)  
25 START/STOP button (A 50)  
26 LIVE VIEW ON/OFF button (A 50)  
* Onscreen display/indication only. The content or value cannot be changed using Browser Remote.  
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device  
The [Basic Control] Screen  
* [Full Control User] only.  
When using a smartphone or other device with a smaller screen, you can use the [Basic Control] screen that  
offers only the most important shooting controls (START/STOP, live view, zoom and assignable buttons) but will  
fit in the screen without scrolling. For details, refer to each function's explanation.  
186  
1 Open the [Basic Control] screen.  
From the [Advanced Control] screen press the [Basic Control] tab.  
The [Metadata Input] Screen  
* [Full Control User]/[Meta Control User] only.  
Using Browser Remote you can cree, edit and the camcorder a metadata profile that can be used  
to record MXF clips. This metadata ofile includes thuser memo information (clip title, creator, location and  
description), as well as GPS informati. For dails, refer to Using Metadata (A 111).  
1 Open the [Metadata Input] screen.  
• From the [Advanced Control] screen press the [Metadata Input] tab.  
• This step is not necessary when logging in with the user name and  
password of the [Meta Control User].  
Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device  
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
187  
10  
11  
3
4
12  
1
[
Activate] button (activate metadata control  
6
7
8
Language selection  
Recordinperation  
Netwnnection indicator*  
from Browser Remote)  
Metadata transfer mode selection buttons  
User memo fields  
GPS information fields  
Browser Remote screen selection tabs ([Full  
Control User] only)  
2
3
4
5
y lock ton (Browser Remote controls only)  
oximatemaining battery charge*  
1ar] buttons (clear current data)  
12 amcorder ID*  
* Onscreen display/indication only. The content or valuangeusing Browser Remote.  
NOTES  
• Using Browser Remote ([  
Active] butt) you can give priority to metadata sent through the application.  
However, you cannot return the priobak to the SD card. To use a user memo file saved on the SD card  
you will need to set [w Other Functions] > [MXF] > [Set Metadata] > [Setting] to [SD Card] on the  
camcorder itself.  
Real-Time Proxy Transfer  
Real-Time Proxy Transfer  
You can stream a proxy video file* of the image recorded on the camcorder to a connected iOS or Android  
device** in order to record it locally on the device. You can then send the video back to a studio or broadcast  
control unit for immediate reporting from the ground.  
In addition to checking the camcorder’s live image, with the CameraAccess plus app you can also zoom and  
start/stop recording (on the iOS/Android device or on the camcorder).  
188  
*
1.5 Mbps, 640x360 MP4 video file.  
** The CameraAccess plus app needs to be installed on the iOS or Android device. The CameraAccess plus app, provided by  
PIXELA, is available for free from the App Store (for iOS devices) and Google Play™ (for Android devices).  
Operating modes:  
1 On the iOS/Android device, download and install the CameraAccess plus app.  
• The app can be downloaded for free from the following Web sites.  
App Store:  
http://appstore.com/cameraaccessplus  
Google Play™:  
http://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=jp.co.pixela.cameraaessplus  
• This step is necessary only the first time you use this function
2 Select a Camera Access Point connection (A 180).  
3 To start the Real-Time Proxy Transfer mode on the der,  
open the [Network Functions] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Functions
[w Other Functions]  
[Network Functions]  
[Off]  
4 Select [RT Proxy Transfer] and ten ress
• [Connected] will appear on the mcorder's s
• While the camcorder is in Real-Te ProxTransfer mode, only the  
Q switch, CANCEL button athe ystick’s SET button can  
be used on the camcorder.  
5 On the iOS/Android device's Wi-Fi settings, select the camcorder's access point (A 180).  
6 Start the CameraAccess plus app on the iOS/Android device.  
7 Touch Start under Monitor from Home.  
• Use the app's onscreen controls to operate the camcorder while viewing the live image on the device.  
8 When you have finished recording, press SET on the camcorder to end the Real-Time Proxy Transfer  
mode.  
NOTES  
• In real-time proxy transfer mode, the camcorder switches to full auto mode. Additionally, the focus mode  
changes to autofocus (with no face detection), the zoom mode changes to [Normal] (optical zoom only) and  
pre-recording is activated automatically.  
• Real-time proxy transfer cannot be used when the frame rate is set to 23.98P or together with special  
recording modes.  
• While commands are being sent from the iOS/Android device to the camcorder, you may notice brief stops in  
the live view image displayed on the iOS/Android device.  
• For details about the CameraAccess plus app, visit PIXELA’s Web site.  
http://pixela.jp/cecap  
     
FTP File Transfer  
FTP File Transfer  
After connecting the camcorder to a network, you can transfer clips from the camcorder to another device  
connected to the network using the FTP protocol. In mode, you can transfer the last MP4 clip just  
mode, you can transfer multiple clips or photos stored in the recording media in the  
recorded. In  
camcorder.  
189  
The following explanations assume that the FTP server is on, ready and correctly configured.  
Operating modes:  
Preparations  
Before you can transfer clips to a connected device, you need to configure the FTP server settings and other  
settings related to the handling of folders and files.  
FTP Server Settings  
To complete this procedure you will need detailed information about the FTP server that will be used as the  
destination when transferring clips. If necessary, consult the network aministrator in charge of the FTP server.  
1 Open the [FTP Server Settings] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [FTP Stings]  
[w Other Functions]  
2 To enter the [FTP Server], select [Input] and then pT.  
[Network Settings]  
• Enter the FTP server’s IP address or host ng thkeyboard  
screen (A 176).  
[FTP Server Settings]  
• Though the FTP server’s host nme is not en using  
Camera Access Point connectns, enter any ers to be able to  
continue the procedure.  
3 Enter the [User Name], [Passworan[Destination Folder] in the same way.  
4 To enter the [Port No.], select [Input] and then press SET.  
• Push the joystick up/down to select a value for the first digit and then press SET to move to the next digit.  
• After completing all the digits, select [Set] and then press SET.  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET to confirm the port number.  
6 Select whether to turn the passive mode [On] or [Off] and then press SET.  
• [Off] is the standard setting for most cases. [On] (passive mode) is more appropriate for FTP transfers within  
a network behind a firewall.  
7 Select [OK] and then press SET to save the FTP server configuration.  
8 When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.  
           
FTP File Transfer  
FTP Transfer Settings  
[w Other Functions]  
[Network Settings]  
[FTP Transfer Settings]  
[Create Folder by Date]  
[On]  
These settings determine the handling of files and folders on the FTP  
server.  
1 Open the [Create Folder by Date] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Settings] > [FTP Transfer Settings]  
> [Create Folder by Date]  
190  
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
3 Back in the [FTP Transfer Settings] submenu, select [Same  
Named Files] and then press SET.  
4 Select the desired option and then press SET.  
[w Other Functions]  
[Network Settings]  
[FTP Transfer Settings]  
[Same Named Files]  
[Skip]  
Options  
[On]:  
A new subfolder under the transfer fold“YYYYMMDD\HHMMSS” will be created for every  
transfer operation.  
[Off]:  
All the files will be transfred to the fo[Destination Folder] in the FTP server settings.  
[Skip]:  
If a file with the same namalreadxists in the destination folder, the file will not be transferred.  
[Overwrite]: Even if a file with the same namalready exists in the destination folder, the file will be transferred,  
overwriting any file with the same name in the destination folder.  
FTP Transfer in  
Mode  
If you activate the FTP transfer function and set in advance an assignable button to [MP4 FTP Transfer], you can  
press the button to add the last MP4 clip recorded to the FTP transfer queue (up to 5 clips). MP4 clips are then  
transferred to the FTP server one by one. The FTP transfer is performed in the background so you can continue  
recording while the files are transferred. In fact, the transfer will not be interrupted even if you set the camcorder  
to  
mode.  
You can check the FTP-related settings on the status screens (A 217).  
Operating modes:  
1 Set an assignable button to [MP4 FTP Transfer] in advance (A 129).  
2 Connect the camcorder to the desired network (A 180).  
   
FTP File Transfer  
3 To activate the FTP transfer function, open the [Network  
Functions] submenu.  
[w Other Functions]  
[w Other Functions] > [Network Functions]  
[Network Functions]  
[Off]  
4 Select [FTP Transfer] and then press SET.  
191  
•
will appear on the top of the screen, next to the connection type  
icon. When the icons turn white, the camcorder is ready to transfer  
files.  
• With Camera Access Point connections, you need to actively connect the Wi-Fi enabled device to the  
camcorder.  
5 After recording an MP4 clip, press the assignable button set to [MP4 FTP Transfer].  
• The MP4 clip just recorded will be added to the FTP transfer queue.  
• The number of MP4 clips in the FTP transfer queue will appear next to the  
icon.  
6 When you have finished transferring the desired clips, turn off the network functions.  
• Set [w Other Functions] > [Network Functions] to [Off] and then press SET.  
• The network icons will turn yellow and then disappear from the screen.  
FTP Transfer in  
Mode  
In  
mode, you can transfer to the FTP server MXF corded othe CF card and MP4 clips or photos  
recorded on the SD card.  
You can check the FTP-related settings on the sscreA 217).  
Operating modes:  
Transferring a Single Clip or Poto  
1 Connect the camcorder to the dired etwork (A 180).  
• With Camera Access Point connections, you need to actively connect the Wi-Fi enabled device to the  
camcorder.  
2 Select the desired clip or photo and then press SET to open the clip/photo menu.  
3 Select [FTP Transfer] and then press SET.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
•
will appear on the top of the screen, next to the connection type icon. When the icons turn white, the  
clip/photo will be transferred to the FTP server. When using a LAN connection, the LAN access indicator will  
flash quickly while the file is being transferred.  
• While the clip/photo is being transferred, you can press SET to cancel.  
• When the transfer is completed, the network icons will turn yellow and then disappear from the screen.  
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
   
FTP File Transfer  
Transferring Multiple Clips or Photos  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Connect the camcorder to the desired network (A 180).  
• With Camera Access Point connections, you need to actively  
connect the Wi-Fi enabled device to the camcorder.  
[Clips]  
[Photos]  
192  
2 Open the index screen that contains the clips or photos you want  
to transfer (A 146).  
[FTP Transfer]  
3 Open the [FTP Transfer] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] or [Photos] > [FTP Transfer]  
4 Select [Select] to select which clips/photos to transfer, or [All] to transfer all the clips/photos and  
then press SET.  
• If you selected [Select], use the joystick to move between the clips/photos. Press SET to select a clip/photo  
to transfer and repeat as necessary. After selecting all the desired clips/photos, press the MENU button.  
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
•
will appear on the top of the screen, next to the connection type icon. When the icons turn white, all the  
applicable clips/photos will be transferred to the FTP server. When using a LAN connection, the LAN access  
indicator will flash quickly while the files are being transferred.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the clips/photos are transferred, you can press SET to cance
• When the transfer is completed, the network icons will turn yellow then disappear from the screen.  
6 When the confirmation message appears, press S
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions when tran. Faig to do so may interrupt the transfer and  
incomplete files may remain at the ransfer de
- Do not open the CF card slot cer or SD card over.  
- Do not disconnect the power soce or tuoff the camcorder.  
• If incomplete files remain at the transfeenation, check the content and make sure they are safe to delete  
before deleting them.  
NOTES  
• Depending on the access point’s settings and capabilities, it may take some time to transfer files.  
 
Playback via Browser  
Playback via Browser  
You can use the Playback via Browser function to access the MP4 clips and photos in the camcorder from the  
Web browser of a connected network device*. You can then play back your recordings using the Web browser  
and even save local copies of them on the device.  
193  
* Depending on the device, OS, browser and video quality, you may not be able to play back or save recordings. For details, visit  
your local Canon Web site.  
Operating modes:  
1 Open the [MP4] or [Photos] index screen (A 145).  
2 Connect the camcorder to the desired network (A 180).  
• Select a Camera Access Point connection or a wired network connection.  
3 Open the [Playback via Browser] submenu and then press SET to  
activate the function.  
[w Other Functions]  
[w Other Functions] > [Playback via Browser]  
• [Connected] and the camcorder’s URL will appear on the  
camcorder's screen.  
[Playback via Browser]  
• While the camcorder is in Playback via Browser mode, only the Q switch, CANCEL button and the  
joystick’s SET button can be used on the camcorder.  
• With Camera Access Point connections, you need to ly connt the Wi-Fi enabled device to the  
camcorder.  
4 Connected device: Start the Web browsenteURL  
displayed on the camcorder’s screen.  
• The Playback via Browser screewapp
5 Connected device: Play back our recordin
• To change the index screen disayed, toch/click the button on the top left of the screen (8¸ or  
8}). Touch/click ¸ to show P4 ps or } to show photos.  
• Touch/click the desired recording from the list of recordings. For MP4 clips, touch/click Ð to play back the  
clip. For photos, the photo will be displayed.  
• Touch/click ö to return to the list of recordings.  
• Devices other than iOS devices: Touch/click õ to save a local copy of the MP4 clip/photo on the device.  
6 Camcorder: When you have finished playing back, press SET to end the Playback via Browser  
mode.  
NOTES  
• Only one device may be connected to the camcorder at a time.  
• Long recordings, whose video stream file exceeds 4 GB, will be recognized as multiple files on other devices.  
     
Playback via Browser  
194  
Photos  
8
195  
Taking Photos  
You can take photos when the camcorder is in  
camcorder is in  
mode or you can capture a photo from a clip when the  
mode. Photos are saved onto the SD card. In  
mode, photo size is 1920x1080*. In  
mode, the photo size depends on the current video configuration. If the resolution is 1920x1080 or  
1440x1080, the photo size is 1920x1080; if it is 1280x720, the photo size is also 1280x720.  
* At 1920x1080 size, the camcorder can save approximately 670 photos on a 1 GB SD card.  
Taking Photos in  
Mode  
You can take a photo while the camcorder is recording a clip or is in record pause mode. To take a photo, set an  
assignable button to [Photo] in advance or use the supplied wireless controller.  
Operating modes:  
1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 129).  
2 Press the assignable button to take a photo.  
• You can also press the PHOTO button on lied eless controller.  
•
and the number of available photos ae uper right of the screen.  
• The SD card access indicator ll illuminatoto is being recorded.  
Capturing Photos in  
Mode  
You can capture a photo from a clip during playback pause. To capture a photo, set an assignable button to  
[Photo] in advance or use the supplied wireless controller.  
Operating modes:  
1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 129).  
2 Select the desired clip and then press the Ò button to start playback.  
3 Pause the playback at the point you want to capture.  
4 Press the assignable button to capture a photo.  
• You can also press the PHOTO button on the supplied wireless controller.  
•
and the number of available photos appear on the upper right of the screen.  
• The SD card access indicator will illuminate as the photo is being recorded.  
5 Press the Ñ button to stop playback.  
           
Taking Photos  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is on or flashing. Failure to do so may  
result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not remove the SD card.  
196  
NOTES  
• If the LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent writing, you will not be able to record a photo. Change the  
position of the LOCK switch in advance.  
Photo Playback  
Photo Playback  
You can view the photos that you took with the camcorder.  
Operating modes:  
197  
Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen  
Display the [Photos] index screen to view photos.  
1 Hold down the button on the Q switch and slide  
the switch to MEDIA.  
• The camcorder switches to  
clip index screen appears.  
mode and the MXF  
2 Press the INDEX button.  
• The index screen selection menu appears.  
3 Select [Photo Index] and then press SET.  
• The [Photos] index screen appears.  
• After you are finished viewing photos, press the INDEX  
button to return to the MXF clip index screen.  
Viewing Photos  
1 Move the orange selection frae to the deoto.  
2 Press the Ò button to view he pho.  
• The photo playback screen appearnthe selected  
photo is displayed.  
• Use the Ú/Ù buttons or push the joystick left/right  
to switch to the previous/next photo.  
• Press the DISP. button to hide/show the onscreen  
displays.  
• Press the Ñ button to return to the [Photos] index  
screen.  
IMPORTANT  
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is on or flashing. Failure to do so may  
result in permanent data loss.  
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.  
- Do not remove the SD card.  
NOTES  
• The following photos may not be displayed correctly.  
- Photos not recorded with this camcorder.  
- Photos created or edited on a computer.  
- Photos whose file names have been changed.  
       
Deleting Photos  
Deleting Photos  
You can delete a photo you no longer need. Photos can be deleted one at a time from the photo playback  
screen or [Photos] index screen.  
198  
Operating modes:  
Deleting a Photo from the Playback Screen  
1 Display the photo to be deleted (A 197).  
2 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
3 Select [Delete] and then press SET.  
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.  
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• The selected photo is deleted.  
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Deleting a Photo from the Index Screen  
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 197).  
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be de
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.  
4 Select [Delete] and then press SET.  
• The screen prompts you to confire op
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancehe operaion.  
• The selected photo is deleted.  
6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
Deleting Multiple Photos  
[w Other Functions]  
1 Open the [Delete] submenu.  
[w Other Functions] > [Photos] > [Delete]  
[Photos]  
2 Select [Select] to select which photos to delete or [All] to delete all the  
photos, and then press SET.  
[Delete]  
• If you selected [Select], use the joystick to move between the photos.  
Press SET to select a photo to delete and repeat as necessary. After  
selecting all the desired photos, press the MENU button.  
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.  
• All the applicable photos on the SD card will be deleted.  
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.  
• While the photos are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.  
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.  
IMPORTANT  
• Be careful when deleting photos. Deleted photos cannot be recovered.  
   
Additional Information  
9
199  
Menu Options  
For details about how to select an item, refer to Using the Menus (A 29). For details about each function, see  
the reference page. Menu items without a reference page are explained after the tables. Setting options in  
boldface indicate default values.  
Depending on the camcorder's operating mode and the current selection of other settings, some menu items  
may not appear at all or may appear grayed out in the menu screens.  
To skip directly to the page of a specific menu:  
[~ Camera Setup] menu  
[¡ Audio Setup] menu  
[¢ Video Setup] menu  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] menu  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] menu  
[w Other Functions] menu  
[¥ My Menu] customized menu  
A 199  
A 201  
A 201  
A 202  
A 204  
A 204  
A 208  
[~ Camera Setup] menu (  
mode only)  
Menu item  
[Light Metering]  
[AE Shift]  
Submenus  
ting options  
A
cklig[Standard], [Spotlight]  
68  
, [+1], [+1.5], [+1.25], [+1.0], [+0.75], [+0.5], [+0.25],  
-0.25], [-0.5], [-0.75], [-1.0], [-1.25], [-1.5], [-1.75], [-2.0]  
67  
[Gain]  
[L]  
[Mode]  
[Automatic], [Manual]  
[AGC Limit]  
[Manual]  
[Off/27 dB], [26.00 dB] to [0.0 dB]  
[Fine Tuning] (0.0 dB), [33.0 dB], [27.0 dB], [24.0 dB], [21.0 dB],  
[18.0 dB], [15.0 dB], [12.0 dB], [9.0 dB], [6.0 dB], [3.0 dB], [0.0 dB],  
[-3.0 dB], [-6.0 dB]  
[M]  
[H]  
[Mode]  
[Automatic], [Manual]  
[AGC Limit]  
[Manual]  
[Off/27 dB], [26.00 dB] to [0.0 dB]  
62  
[Fine Tuning] (0.0 dB), [33.0 dB], [27.0 dB], [24.0 dB], [21.0 dB],  
[18.0 dB], [15.0 dB], [12.0 dB], [9.0 dB], [6.0 dB], [3.0 dB], [0.0 dB],  
[-3.0 dB], [-6.0 dB]  
[Mode]  
[Automatic], [Manual]  
[AGC Limit]  
[Manual]  
[Off/27 dB], [26.00 dB] to [0.0 dB]  
[Fine Tuning] (0.0 dB), [33.0 dB], [27.0 dB], [24.0 dB], [21.0 dB],  
[18.0 dB], [15.0 dB], [12.0 dB], [9.0 dB], [6.0 dB], [3.0 dB], [0.0 dB],  
[-3.0 dB], [-6.0 dB]  
[Shutter]  
[Mode]  
[Automatic], [Manual]  
[Speed], [Angle], [Clear Scan], [Slow]  
[Normal], [Fine]  
[Manual]  
58  
67  
[Shutter Increment]  
[ND Filter]  
[Automatic], [Off]  
       
Menu Options  
Menu item  
[White Balance]  
Submenus  
Setting options  
A
[B]  
[AWB], [Set]  
[A]  
[AWB], [Set]  
[PRESET]  
69  
200  
[Mode]  
[Preset]  
[Speed]  
[AWB], [Preset]  
[Daylight], [Tungsten], [Kelvin]  
[High], [Medium], [Normal]  
[Face Priority], [Face Only], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[AF Mode]  
81  
85  
86  
[Face AF]  
[Focus Limit]  
[OIS Functions]  
[Select]  
[Img Stab.], [Off]  
87  
74  
[Image Stabilizer]  
[Dynamic], [Standard]  
[Wider], [Normal]  
[Wide-End Angle]  
[Zoom]  
[Mode]  
[Tele-converter 6.0x], [Tele-converter 3.0x], [Tele-converter 1.5x],  
[Digital Zoom], [Normal]  
[Speed Level]  
[Fast], [Normal], [Slow]  
[Soft Zoom Control]  
[Grip Rocker]  
[Both], [Stop], [Start], [Off]  
[Select]  
[Constant], [Variable]  
1 to 16 (8)  
74  
[Constant Speed]  
[Handle Rocker H]  
[Handle Rocker L]  
[Wireless Controller]  
[High-Speed Zoom]  
[Focal Length]  
1 to
1 to 16
16 (8
ff]  
], [Off]  
128  
61  
[Flicker Reduction]  
[Conversion Lens]  
[Color Bars]  
matic], [Off]  
[TL-H58], [WA-H58], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
80  
[Enable]  
107  
[Type]  
[SMPTE], [ARIB]  
[White], [Green]  
[Toggle], [Always On], [Always Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Infrared]  
[Monochrome]  
[Light]  
126  
132  
[Slow Shutter]  
[- /Select File]  
[, /Edit File]  
[Custom Picture]  
–
See the explanations on the reference page.  
133,  
135  
[+ /Transfer File]  
For custom picture files in the camcorder:  
[Copy To  
], [Load From  
]
134  
For custom picture files on the SD card:  
[Copy To Cam.], [Load From Cam.]  
Menu Options  
[¡ Audio Setup] menu  
Menu item  
Submenus  
[4-Channel Input]  
Setting options  
A
[Audio Input]  
[On], [Off]  
100  
[CH3/CH4 Mode]  
[CH3/CH4 Level]  
[MP4 Channels]  
[CH2 Input]  
[Automatic], [Manual]  
0 to 99 (50)  
201  
106  
[CH1/CH2], [CH3/CH4]  
[INPUT 2], [INPUT 1]  
100  
103  
104  
104  
104  
104  
105  
106  
[INPUT 1 Mic Trimming]  
[INPUT 1 Mic Att.]  
[INPUT 2 Mic Trimming]  
[INPUT 2 Mic Att.]  
[INPUT 1&2 ALC Link]  
[INPUT 1&2 Limiter]  
[MIC Att.]  
[+12 dB], [+6 dB], [0 dB], [-6 dB], [-12 dB]  
[On], [Off]  
[+12 dB], [+6 dB], [0 dB], [-6 dB], [-12 dB]  
[On], [Off]  
[Linked], [Separated]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[MIC Low Cut]  
[On], [Off]  
[Int. Mic Att.]  
[On], [Off]  
101  
[Int. Mic Low Cut]  
[Int. Mic Sensitivity]  
[1 kHz Tone]  
[Off], [LC1], [LC2]  
[Normal], [Hig
[-12 dB]8 dB], [], [Off]  
[Limal]  
107  
167  
[Audio Output]*  
[Monitor Delay]  
[Monitor Channels]  
[CH1/1/CH1], [CH/CH2], [CH1+2/CH1+2], [CH3/CH4],  
3/CH[CH4/CH4], [CH3+4/CH3+4], [CH1+3/CH2+4]  
166  
[HDMI Channels]  
[Level]  
CH2]H3/CH4]  
s], [2 Vrms]  
], 1 to 15 (8)  
167  
149  
[Headphone ume]  
[Speaker Volu
[Off], 1 to 15 (8)  
* In  
mode, not available in some index screens and playback modes.  
[¢ Video Setup] menu  
Menu item  
Submenus  
Setting options  
A
[3G/HD-SDI]*  
In  
In  
mode: [Direct], [Compatible], [Off]  
mode: [On], [Off]  
163  
[3G-SDI Mapping]  
[MON.]  
[Level A], [Level B]  
[HD], [SD], [Off]  
163  
164  
[HDMI]  
[Normal], [+1920x1080 59.94P]  
[On], [Off]  
[HD/SD Output]  
[HD Onscreen Displays]  
[SD Onscreen Displays]  
[Resize SD Output]  
165  
[On], [Off]  
[Letterbox], [Squeeze], [Side Crop]  
[On], [Off]  
165  
49  
[Rec Command]  
[HDMI Time Code]  
[GENLOCK/SYNC OUT]  
[On], [Off]  
96  
[Genlock], [SYNC Output]  
94,  
96  
[SYNC Scan Mode]  
[P], [PsF]  
96  
* In  
mode, not available in some index screens and playback modes.  
   
Menu Options  
[£ OLED/VF Setup] menu  
Menu item  
Submenus  
[Brightness]  
Setting options  
A
[OLED Setup]  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-20 to 20 ( 0)  
1 to 4 (2)  
[Contrast]  
[Color]  
202  
[Sharpness]  
[Luminence]  
[On], [Off]  
34  
[Color Balance]  
[R-B Simult. Adjust.]  
-25 to 25 ( 0)  
-25 to 25 ( 0)  
-25 to 25 ( 0)  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-99 to 99 ( 0)  
-20 to 20 ( 0)  
1 to 4 (2)  
[R Fine Tuning]  
[B Fine Tuning]  
[Viewfinder Setup]  
[Brightness]  
[Contrast]  
[Color]  
34  
[Sharpness]  
[Backlight]  
[Normal], [Bright]  
[On], [Off]  
[OLED Mirror Image]  
[OLED/VF B&W]  
33  
35  
34  
–
[On], [Off]  
[OLED/VF Simul.]  
[Audio Level]*  
[On], [Off]  
[On]
[Display Metadata]*  
[Date/Time]  
[Camera Data]  
[Setting]  
[On], [O
–
[Off]  
[Peaking]  
ff]  
[Select]  
g 1], [Peaking 2]  
[Peaking 1]  
[Color]  
[White], [Red], [Yellow], [Blue]  
[Off], 1 to 15 (8)  
[Gain]  
84  
[Frequency]  
1 to 4 (2)  
[Peaking 2]  
[Color]  
[White], [Red], [Yellow], [Blue]  
[Off], 1 to 15 (15)  
[Gain]  
[Frequency]  
1 to 4 (1)  
[Zebra]  
[Setting]  
[On], [Off]  
[Select]  
[Zebra 1], [Zebra 2], [Zebra 1&2]  
[70 5%], [75 5%], [80 5%], [85 5%], [90 5%], [95 5%]  
[70%], [75%], [80%], [85%], [90%], [95%], [100%]  
[On], [Off]  
[Zebra 1 Level]  
[Zebra 2 Level]  
[HD Output]  
[Enable]  
89  
[Markers]  
[On], [Off]  
[Center]  
[Black], [Gray], [Off]  
[Horizontal]  
[Grid]  
[Black], [Gray], [Off]  
[Black], [Gray], [Off]  
88  
[Safe Area]  
[Safe Area Setting]  
[Aspect Marker]  
[Aspect Ratio]  
[Black], [Gray], [Off]  
[80%], [90%], [92.5%], [95%]  
[Black], [Gray], [Off]  
[4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [1.66:1], [1.75:1], [1.85:1], [2.35:1]  
 
Menu Options  
Menu item  
Submenus  
[Zoom Position]  
Setting options  
[Always On], [Normal], [Off]  
A
[Custom Display 1]  
51,  
142  
[Light Metering]  
[Custom Picture]  
[ND Filter]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
203  
[On], [Off]  
[Focus Mode]  
[Object Distance]  
[Full Auto]  
[On], [Off]  
[Always On], [Normal], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Infrared]  
[On], [Off]  
[White Balance]  
[Exposure]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Iris]  
[On], [Off]  
[Gain]  
[On], [Off]  
[Shutter]  
[On], [Off]  
[Conversion Lens]  
[Tele-converter]  
[Peaking]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Magnification]  
[OIS Functions]  
[Remaining Battery]  
[Remaining Rec Time]  
[Recording Mode]  
[Genlock]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Of
[Custom Display 2]  
[On, [NormaOff]  
[Only , [Normal], Off]  
], [Of
Off]  
[Time Code]  
Off]  
[Interval Cour]  
[Remaining Phs]  
[Temperature/Fan]  
[Movie Format]  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
[Frame Rate]  
On], [Off]  
[Only Warnings], [Normal], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[OSD Recording]  
[Wireless Controller]  
[Output Display]  
[Rec Command]  
[User Memo]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[User Bit]  
[On], [Off]  
[Monitor Channels]  
[Audio Level]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[4-Channel Input]  
[Network Functions]  
[GPS]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Date/Time]  
[Date/Time], [Time], [Date], [Off]  
* In  
mode, not available in some index screens and playback modes.  
[Audio Level] (  
mode only): Displays the audio level meter during playback mode when set to [On].  
Menu Options  
[Display Metadata] (  
mode only): Displays the date and time of recording and/or the camera data (shutter  
speed, aperture value, gain) during the playback of MXF clips. During the playback of MP4 clips, when [Date/  
Time] is set to [On] only the date of recording is displayed. During photo playback, the date and time of recording  
is always displayed (this setting is not available).  
204  
[¤ TC/UB Setup] menu (  
mode only)  
Menu item  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
90  
90  
91  
90  
95  
–
[Time Code]  
[Mode]  
[Preset], [Regen.]  
[Rec Run], [Free Run]  
[DF], [NDF]  
[Run]  
[DF/NDF]*  
[Setting]  
[Set], [Reset]  
[TC In/Out]  
[In], [Out]  
[XF Legacy Sync]  
[Recording Mode]  
[Output Mode]  
[On], [Off]  
[User Bit]  
[Internal], [External]  
[Fixed], [Pulldown]  
[Setting], [Time], [Date]  
95  
96  
93  
[Type]  
* When the frame rate is set to 23.98P, the time code is set to [NDF] and this setting not be changed.  
[XF Legacy Sync]: Determines the characteristics of the synoation reference output signal (A 96)  
and the characteristics of the time code input/output signathe geck reference signal when the frame  
rate is set to 23.98P.  
[On]: Synchronization mode compatible with Canoseries camcorders. When the frame rate is set  
to 23.98P, synchronizes the time code at a ignand the Genlock signal at a 29.97 Hz or 59.94 Hz  
signal. A 59.94i (or 59.94P) signal is output hronation reference output. Use this setting to  
synchronize the camcorder with Canon HD er XF105 or XF305.  
[Off]: Standard synchronization de. When the e rate is set to 23.98P, synchronizes the time code at a  
24-frame signal and the Genlock gnal* at 23.98 Hz signal. The synchronization reference output signal  
has the same frequency as video out fm 3G/HD-SDI terminal. Select this setting to synchronize the  
camcorder with a Canon HD Camcorder XF205 or with one of the camcorders/digital cinema cameras in the  
CINEMA EOS SYSTEM lineup.  
* Only when [¢ Video Setup] > [3G/HD-SDI] is set to [Direct].  
[w Other Functions] menu  
Menu item  
Submenus  
[All Settings]  
Setting options  
A
[Reset]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Camera Settings]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
–
1
[Assignable Buttons]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Transfer Menu//]  
[Save To  
]
[Menu], [Menu+/]  
[Menu], [Menu+/]  
143  
27  
[Load From  
]
[Time Zone]  
[Set Clock]  
List of world time zones.  
[UTC-05:00 New York]  
[Date/Time]  
–
27  
[Date Format]  
[YMD], [YMD/24H], [MDY], [MDY/24H], [DMY], [DMY/24H]  
       
Menu Options  
Menu item  
Submenus  
Setting options  
[WFM], [VS], [Edge Mon.], [Off]  
A
1
[WFM (OLED)]  
[Setting]  
108  
[Waveform Monitor]  
[Type]  
[Line], [Line+Spot], [Field], [RGB], [YPbPr]  
108  
109  
109  
205  
[Gain]  
[1x], [2x]  
[Vectorscope]  
[Type]  
[Spot], [Normal]  
[Gain]  
[1x], [5x]  
[Edge Monitor]  
[Type]  
[Type 1], [Type 2]  
[Gain]  
[Off], 1 to 15 (12)  
[Language !]  
[Deutsch], [English], [Español], [Français], [Italiano], [Polski],  
[Português], [ ], [ ], [ ], [  
28  
]
[REMOTE Term.]  
[Wireless Controller]  
[Assignable Buttons]  
[Tally Lamp]  
[RC-V100], [Standard]  
[On], [Off]  
45  
44  
1
[1] to [13]  
[Front]  
See footnote 2.  
[On], [Off]  
129  
–
[Rear]  
[POWER LED]  
[Media Access LED]  
[LAN (Ethernet) LED]  
[Fan]  
[On], [Off]  
–
–
[O
[On],
–
], [Amatic]  
to +23 (000)  
CF)], [MXF (CF)+MP4  
54  
–
[Genlock Adjustment]  
[Movie Format]  
[MXF]  
], [MP4  
]
55  
[Bit Rate/Reution]  
Mbps 1920x1080], [50 Mbps 1280x720], [35 Mbps 1920x1080],  
[35 Mbps 1440x1080], [35 Mbps 1280x720], [25 Mbps 1440x1080]  
55  
42  
[Frame Rate]  
[59.94i], [59.94P], [29.97P], [23.98P]  
[Relay Recording]  
[Double Slot Recording]  
[Clips]  
[On], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[Title Prefix]  
Two characters, each:  
[A] to [Z], [0] to [9] ([AA])  
–
[Number setting]  
[Add / File]  
[Set Metadata]  
[Setting]  
[Set], [Reset]  
[On], [Off]  
[Remote], [SD Card]  
111  
–
[User Memo]  
[Off], list of user memo files available on the SD card  
[Country Code]  
[Organization]  
[User Code]  
Letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9, plus sign (+), minus sign (-), colon (:),  
space  
[MP4]  
[Bit Rate/Resolution]  
When the movie format is set to MP4:  
[35 Mbps 1920x1080], [24 Mbps 1920x1080],  
[17 Mbps 1280x720], [9 Mbps 1280x720]  
When the movie format is set to MXF+MP4:  
[Linked to MXF], [3 Mbps 640x360]  
55  
[Frame Rate]  
[Rec Control]  
[Start/Stop]  
[29.97P], [23.98P]  
[START/STOP Button], [Assignable Buttons]  
[Start], [Stop]  
123  
Menu Options  
Menu item  
Submenus  
Setting options  
When the movie format is set to MXF:  
A
[Special Recording]  
[Interval Recording], [Frame Recording], [Pre-Recording],  
[Slow & Fast Motion], [Off]  
When the movie format is set to MP4:  
[Pre-Recording], [Off]  
118  
206  
[Interval Recording]  
[Interval]  
[1 sec] to [10 sec], [15 sec], [20 sec],  
[30 sec], [40 sec], [50 sec],  
[1 min] to [10 min]  
118  
[Recorded Frames]  
[Recorded Frames]  
[S&F Frame Rate]  
When the frame rate is set to 23.98P, 29.97P or 59.94i:  
1, 3, 6, 9  
When the frame rate is set to 59.94P:  
2, 6, 12  
[Frame Recording]  
When the frame rate is set to 23.98P, 29.97P or 59.94i:  
1, 3, 6, 9  
When the frame rate is set to 59.94P:  
2, 6, 12  
119  
120  
[Slow & Fast Motion]  
[Clips] or [Photos]  
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30 (all in fps)  
Only when the resolution is set to 1280x720 also:  
32, 34, 36, 40, 44, 48, 60 (all in fps)  
1
[Delete]  
154,  
198  
[Select]  
[All]  
–
[Can
1
[Copy]  
[Select]  
[$ Mark]  
[All]  
153  
], [OK
l], [OK]  
[FTP Transfer]  
[Select]  
[All]  
–
192  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Review Recording]  
[Delete Last Clip]  
[Entire Clip], [Last 4 sec]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
116  
–
1
[File Numbering]  
[Reset], [Continuous]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
117  
153  
[Delete All $ Marks]  
[Custom Function]  
[Shockless Gain]  
[Shockless WB]  
[Fast], [Normal], [Slow], [Off]  
[On], [Off]  
[AE Response]  
[High], [Normal], [Low]  
[On], [Off]  
[Iris Limit]  
[Iris Ring Direction]  
[Focus Ring Direction]  
[Zoom Ring Direction]  
[Focus Ring Control]  
[Zoom Ring Control]  
[Focus Assistance B&W]  
[Distance Units]  
[Reverse], [Normal]  
[Reverse], [Normal]  
[Reverse], [Normal]  
[Fast], [Normal], [Slow]  
[Fast], [Normal], [Slow]  
[Both], [Magnify], [Peaking], [Off]  
[Meters],[Feet]  
141  
[Zoom Indicator]  
[Scan Reverse Rec]  
[OSD Recording]  
[Bar], [Numerical]  
[Both], [Vertical], [Horizontal], [Off]  
[On  
], [Off]  
[Reset Hour Meter]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
–
Menu Options  
Menu item  
[Network Functions]  
[Playback via Browser]  
[Network Settings]  
Submenus  
Setting options  
A
173  
193  
[FTP Transfer], [Browser Remote], [RT Proxy Transfer], [Off]  
1
–
[Connection Settings]  
[Set Up New]  
207  
–
174,  
179  
[Select]  
[No.1] to [No.5]  
180  
181  
[Edit]  
[Settings], [Rename]  
[Remote Settings]  
[Camera Settings]  
[Select User]  
–
182  
189  
[One User (Full Control)], [Two Users (Camera/Meta)]  
[Users Settings]  
[FTP Server Settings]  
[FTP Transfer Settings]  
[Create Folder by Date]  
[Same Named Files]  
–
–
[On], [Off]  
[Skip], [Overwrite]  
[On], [Off]  
3
[GPS Auto Time]  
114  
41  
[Initialize Media]  
[CF A]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[CF B]  
[SD Card]  
[Coick]  
[Certification Logos]  
[Firmware]  
–
–
–
1
2
In  
mode, not available in some indecreens mod
Setting options for [Assignable Buttons]: NONE)], [ImWERED IS], [Focus Limit], [Face AF], [Backlight], [Spotlight],  
[Digital Zoom], [Tele-converter], [Wide-EAngle], [Gain utter Mode], [Shutter Increment], [WB Mode], [PEAKING],  
[ZEBRA], [WFM], [MAGN.], [TL-H58], [WH58], [Color Bars], [Infrared Monochrome], [Infrared Light], [Markers], [OLED Setup],  
[Viewfinder Setup], [OLED/VF B&W], [Onsen Disp], [MP4 Start/Stop] (only for assignable buttons 1 to 4), [MP4 FTP  
Transfer], [Add Shot Mark 1], [Add Shot Ma2], [A$ Mark], [Add % Mark], [Time Code], [Time Code Hold], [HEADPHONE  
+], [HEADPHONE -], [Monitor Channels], [Audio evel], [Wireless Controller], [Photo], [Status], [My Menu], [Initialize Media], [User  
Setting].  
The default settings are as follows. [1]: [PEAKING], [2]: [ZEBRA], [3]: [POWERED IS], [4]: [MAGN.], [5] to [10]: [NONE],  
[11]: [HEADPHONE +], [12]: [HEADPHONE -], [13]: [WFM].  
Available only when the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder.  
3
Menu Options  
[Reset]: Reset various camcorder settings.  
[All Settings]: Resets all the camcorder’s settings to default settings, except for the hour meter.  
[Camera Settings] (  
mode only): Resets the white balance, iris, gain, shutter speed,  
[~ Camera Setup] settings and custom picture settings to default settings.  
[Assignable Buttons]: Resets the assignable buttons to default settings.  
208  
[Tally Lamp] (  
mode only): Allows you to set whether the front and rear tally lamps illuminate while the  
camcorder is recording.  
[POWER LED]: Allows you to set whether the power indicator illuminates while the camcorder is on.  
[Media Access LED]: Allows you to set whether the CF card access indicators or the SD card access indicator  
illuminate while the camcorder is accessing a CF card or SD card.  
[LAN (Ethernet) LED]: Allows you to set whether the LAN access indicator illuminates when the camcorder is  
accessing a network via the LAN cable.  
[Genlock Adjustment] (  
mode only): The phase difference between the external Genlock signal and the  
camcorder is initially set to 0. This function allows you to adjust it within the range of approx. 0.4 H (-1023 to  
1023). When setting to 1000 or more or -1000 or less, set the first field to 10 or -10, respectively.  
[MXF] > [Clips] settings (  
mode only)  
[Title Prefix]: Determines the first 2 characters of the clip name. Combed with the [Number Setting] setting,  
this constitutes the 6-character clip name.  
[Number Setting]: Determines the last 4 digits of the clip name. Cod with the [Title Prefix] setting, this  
constitutes the 6-character clip name. Select [Set] to assired nmber to the first clip you record or  
select [Reset] to reset the number to [0001]. The numerase every me a clip is recorded.  
[MXF] > [Set Metadata] settings (  
mod
[Country Code]: This identifier is the country coy IS3166-1 and is to be entered starting from the left.  
[Organization]: This identifier repreents the orgthat owns or operates the camcorder and can be  
obtained by registering with the SMTE Registration uthority. If the organization is not registered, enter [0000].  
[User Code]: This identifier designatthe ur. Leave this blank if [Organization] is set to [0000].  
[Delete Last Clip]: (  
mode only): Deletes the last clip you recorded. This setting option will not appear if  
you turned the camcorder off since recording the last clip.  
[Reset Hour Meter]: The camcorder has two “hour meters” – the first keeps track of total operation time and the  
second keeps track of operation time since the last time the second hour meter was reset with this function.  
[Certification Logos] (  
mode only): This setting displays certification logos that apply to this camcorder.  
[Firmware] (  
mode only): You can verify the current version of the camcorder’s firmware. This menu option is  
usually unavailable.  
[¥ My Menu] (  
mode only)  
Menu item  
[Edit]  
Submenu  
Setting options  
A
[Register]  
[Move]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
[Cancel], [OK]  
30  
[Delete]  
[Reset All]  
             
Displaying the Status Screens  
Displaying the Status Screens  
You can use the status screens to check the camcorder’s various recording- and playback-related settings. You  
can also output the status screens on an external monitor.  
209  
Operating modes:  
1 Set an assignable button to [Status] in advance (A 129).  
2 Press the assignable button to open the status screens.  
• The status screen most recently displayed will appear unless you turned off the camcorder or changed the  
operating mode. In such case, the [Camera 1/2] status screen appears in  
Buttons 1/2] status screen appears in mode.  
mode and the [Assignable  
3 Push the joystick up/down to scroll through the status screens.  
4 When you are finished, press the assignable button set to [Status] again to exit the status screens.  
• Alternatively, you can press the MENU button. Doing so will exit the status screen and open the menu.  
,
Status screen  
Description  
A
[Camera 1/2], [Camera 2/2]  
Displays settings related to main recording functions, lgain, focus  
and zoom.  
Ü
Ü
–
210  
[Assignable Buttons 1/2],  
[Assignable Buttons 2/2]  
1
Allows you to verify the current functiassignabutton.  
Ü
210  
[Audio]  
[Media]  
[Video]  
Displays settings related to audio.  
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
211  
211  
Displays information ading dia.  
Displays the settings foinals d which special  
recording ode iin eff
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
Ü
–
212  
212  
213  
[Metadata 1/2], [Metadata 2/2]  
[Battery/Hour Meter]  
Displays e user memo and etadata that will be recorded  
with clips
Allows you to eck remaining battery time, battery life and how  
long the camcorder has been in operation.  
Ü
–
[/ Data 1/3], [/ Data 2/3],  
[/ Data 3/3]  
Displays the settings for the custom picture file that will be applied  
and saved with MXF clips.  
213,  
214  
2
[Network Settings 1/10] to  
[Network Settings 10/10]  
Displays various settings related to the camcorder's network  
functions.  
215-  
217  
Ü
Ü
Ü
3
[GPS Information Display]  
Displays GPS information.  
–
217  
1
2
3
In  
mode, not available in some index screens and playback modes.  
These screens appear only after a custom picture file has been selected.  
This screen appears only when an optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder.  
   
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Camera 1/2], [Camera 2/2] Status Screens (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
210  
4
5
6
7
8
1
Gain values for each GAIN switch position  
(A 62)  
Gain limits for each GAIN switch position (A 63)  
White balance settings for each WHITE BAL.  
switch position (A 69)  
5
6
7
Autofocus r faces (Face AF) (A 85)  
Foculimit A 86)  
Zoom ssettings for the various zoom  
rols (A 4)  
r reduct(A 61)  
2
3
4
AF mode (A 81)  
[Assignable Buttons 1/2], [Asignable Butons 2/2] Status Screen  
1
1
1
Assignable buttons 1 to 13* (A 129)  
* Assignable buttons 5 to 10 do not appear in  
mode.  
     
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Audio] Status Screen  
In  
mode  
1
2
211  
3
4
In  
mode  
4
1
2
Number of audio channels for MXF clips (A 100)  
MP4 audio channels during 4-channel audio  
recording (A 100)  
3
4
Audio source input and audio level adjustment  
mode for ach audio channel (A 98)  
Headphovolume (A 149)  
[Media] Status Screen  
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
3
4
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CF card A  
CF card B  
SD card  
Speed class of the SD card  
Total space on CF card A  
Used space on CF card A  
Available recording time on CF card A  
8
9
Approximate used space on CF card A  
Total space on the SD card  
10 Used space on the SD card  
11 Available recording time on the SD card  
12 Available number of shots on the SD card  
13 Approximate used space on the SD card  
NOTES  
• Depending on the recording media, the total space displayed on the screen may differ from the nominal  
capacity listed on the CF card or SD card.  
       
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Video] Status Screen  
1
2
3
212  
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
4
HDMI OUT terminal status  
5
MP4 clip settings for MXF+MP4 simultaneous  
recording (A 123)  
Superimposing onscreen displays (A 165)  
SD output setting (A 165)  
3G/HD-SDI terminal* output settings (A 163)  
MON. terminal* output settings (A 163)  
Special recording mode (A 118)  
6
7
*
only.  
[Metadata 1/2], [Metadata 2/2] Status Screens (  
me only)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
User memo file name (A 111)  
Clip title  
Camera operator  
Filming location  
5
6
7
8
Clip description  
Country code (A 208)  
Organization code  
User code  
   
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Battery/Hour Meter] Status Screen  
1
2
213  
3
4
5
1
2
3
Remaining recording time  
Remaining recording time indicator  
Battery life indicator  
4
5
Total operation time (A 208)  
Operation time since using [Reset Hour Meter]  
(A 208)  
[/ Data 1/3] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
Custom picture file name (A 132) and protection  
(A 133)  
Gamma (A 135)  
Master pedestal (A 136)  
Master black RGB levels (A 136)  
Black gamma settings (level, range and point)  
(A 136)  
6
7
8
9
Knee settings (slope, point and saturation)  
(A 137)  
Skin detail settings (hue, chroma, area and Y  
level) (A 138)  
Selective NR settings (hue, chroma, area and Y  
level) (A 138)  
2
3
4
5
Low key saturation (A 136)  
     
Displaying the Status Screens  
[/ Data 2/3] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
214  
1
Sharpness settings (level, horizontal detail  
frequency, horizontal/vertical detail balance, and  
limit) (A 137)  
Sharpness settings (knee aperture gain and  
slope, ingredient ratio) (A 137)  
Level depend settings (level, slope and offset)  
(A 138)  
4
Coring settings (level, offset, curve and depth)  
(A 137)  
Noise reduction (A 138)  
Color matrix settings (select, gain and phase)  
(A 139)  
5
6
2
3
7
Color matrix settings (A 139)  
[/ Data 3/3] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
White balance R/B gain (A 139)  
Color correction (A 139)  
Area A settings (phase, chroma, area and Y level)  
(A 139)  
5
6
Area B settings (phase, chroma, area and Y level)  
(A 139)  
Area B revision settings (level and phase)  
(A 139)  
4
Area A revision settings (level and phase)  
(A 139)  
7
8
Setup level (A 140)  
Clips exceeding 100% (A 140)  
 
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Network Settings 1/10] Status Screen  
215  
1
2
1
2
Camcorder’s MAC address for Wi-Fi networks  
Camcorder’s MAC address for wired networks  
[Network Settings 2/10], [Network Settings 3/10] Status Screens  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Connection settings of the current network connection (A 173)  
1
2
3
Network configuration name (A 180)  
Connection type  
SSID (network name)  
4
5
6
Authentication and encryption method  
WEP index key  
Wi-Fi channel  
   
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Network Settings 4/10], [Network Settings 5/10] Status Screens  
216  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TCP/IP settings of the current network connection (A 178)  
1
2
3
4
IP address assignment method  
IP address  
Subnet mask  
5
Primary Dserver (assignment method/IP  
addre
ondary NS server (assignment method/IP  
ss)  
6
Default gateway  
[Network Settings 6/10], [Nework Se10] Status Screens  
1
2
3
4
Browser Remote settings (A 182):  
1
2
Port number  
Camcorder ID  
3
4
User selection  
User name and whether a password was set* for  
each Browser Remote user  
* The password itself will not be displayed.  
 
Displaying the Status Screens  
[Network Settings 8/10] through [Network Settings 10/10] Status Screens  
217  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FTP server settings (A 189):  
1
2
3
4
FTP server (host) name  
User name  
Password protection*  
Port number  
6
7
8
Destination folder on the FTP server  
Passive mode  
Create new folders by transfer date  
Handling of same-named files  
* The password itself will not be displayed.  
[GPS Information Display] Status Screen (  
mode only)  
1
2
3
4
5
GPS information (A 114)  
1
2
3
Latitude  
Longitude  
Elevation  
4
5
UTC (coordinated universal time) date and time  
Satellite signal strength  
       
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
If you have a problem with your camcorder, refer to this section. Consult your dealer or a Canon Service Center  
if the problem persists.  
218  
Power source  
The camcorder will not turn on or it turns off by itself.  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.  
Shortly after turning it on, the camcorder turns off on its own.  
- You are using a DC coupler or a battery pack that is not compatible for use with this camcorder. Use a recommended  
battery pack (A 233).  
Cannot charge the battery pack.  
- The temperature of the battery pack is outside the charging range. If the battery pack’s temperature is below 0 °C  
(32 °F), warm it before charging it; if it is above 40 °C (104 °F), let the battery pack cool down before charging it.  
- Charge the battery pack in temperatures between 0 °C and 40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F).  
- The battery pack is faulty. Replace the battery pack.  
The battery pack is exhausted extremely quickly even at normal temperaturs.  
- Check the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 213) to see whether the attery pack is at the end of its service life.  
If so, buy a new battery pack.  
Recording  
Pressing the START/STOP button will not start re
- The START/STOP lock lever on the hdle set ng the handle’s START/STOP button inoperable. Change  
the position of the lock lever.  
The point where the START/STOP butn was presed does not match the beginning/end of the recording.  
- There is a slight interval between presg the ART/STOP button and the actual start/end of recording. This is not a  
malfunction.  
The camcorder will not focus.  
- The camcorder may not be able to focus on certain subjects using autofocus. Focus manually (A 83).  
- The viewfinder is not adjusted. Use the dioptric adjustment lever to make the proper adjustment (A 32).  
- The lens or Instant AF sensor is dirty. Clean the lens or sensor with a soft lens-cleaning cloth.  
When a subject flits across in front of the lens, the image appears slightly bent.  
- This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors. When a subject crosses very quickly in front of the camcorder,  
the image may seem slightly warped. This is not a malfunction.  
Changing between recording (ÜREC/ÜMP4) and record pause (STBY/MP4) takes longer than usual.  
- When the recording media contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your  
clips (A 168) and initialize the recording media (A 41). Alternatively, replace the recording media.  
The camcorder cannot record to the recording media properly.  
- This may occur as recordings are made and deleted over time. Save your clips (A 168) and initialize the recording media  
(A 41).  
After using the camcorder for a long time, it becomes hot.  
- The camcorder may become hot after using it continuously for long periods of time; this is not a malfunction. If the  
camcorder becomes unusually hot or it becomes hot after using it only for a short while, it may indicate a problem with  
the camcorder. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Playback  
Cannot delete MXF clips.  
- You cannot delete MXF clips with an $ mark. Remove the $ mark (A 153) to delete the clip.  
Deleting clips takes longer than usual.  
- When the recording media contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your  
219  
clips (A 168) and initialize the recording media (A 41).  
Cannot delete MP4 clips/photos.  
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.  
- Photos that were protected using other devices cannot be deleted with the camcorder.  
Cannot copy MXF clips.  
- There is not enough available space on the CF card being copied to or the CF card already contains the maximum  
number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 154) to free some space or replace the CF card.  
Indicators and Onscreen Displays  
ì appears in red on the screen.  
- Battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
í appears on the screen.  
- The camcorder cannot communicate with the battery pack attached so tremaining battery time cannot be  
displayed.  
The tally lamp does not illuminate.  
- Set [Other Functions] > [Tally Lamp] > [Front] and/or [Rn].  
The tally lamp flashes quickly.  
(4 flashes pe)  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or chaatterck.  
- There is not enough available space on the reca. Dte some clips (A 154) to free some space or replace  
the recording media.  
- A system error has occurred. Turn the amcck on again. If this does not solve the problem, consult a  
Canon Service Center.  
The tally lamp flashes slowly.  
(1 lash per second)  
- The combined available space on boCF cas is low. Replace the CF card that is not being recorded onto.  
- Available space on the SD card is low. e the SD card.  
appears in red on the screen.  
- An SD card error occurred. Remove and reinsert the SD card. If the display does not change back to normal, save your  
MP4 clips (A 168) and photos and initialize the SD card (A 41).  
Even after stopping recording, the CF card access indicator or SD card access indicator stays illuminated in red.  
- The clip is being recorded. This is not a malfunction.  
7 keeps flashing on the screen.  
- You connected the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver to the camcorder’s USB terminal in  
mode. Disconnect the  
GP-E2 and connect in again after setting the camcorder in  
mode.  
U keeps flashing on the screen.  
- The camcorder cannot lock on the external Genlock signal being input. Check the external signal. If necessary, check  
the [TC/UB Setup] > [XF Legacy Sync] setting (A 204).  
Picture and Sound  
The OLED screen is too dark.  
- Adjust the brightness with the [OLED/VF Setup] > [OLED Setup] > [Brightness] setting. To make the screen brighter  
temporarily, set [OLED/VF Setup] > [OLED Setup] > [Luminence] to [On].  
Screen displays turn on and off repeatedly.  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.  
Troubleshooting  
Abnormal characters appear on the screen and the camcorder does not operate properly.  
- Disconnect the power source and reconnect it after a short time. If the problem still persists, use the [Other Functions]  
> [Reset] > [All Settings] function. This resets all the camcorder’s settings to default values except for the hour  
meter.  
Video noise appears on screen.  
- Keep a distance between the camcorder and devices that emit strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful  
magnets and motors, MRI machines or high-voltage power lines.  
220  
Horizontal bands appear on the screen.  
- This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors when recording under some types of fluorescent, mercury or  
sodium lamps. This is not a malfunction. You may be able to reduce the symptoms by setting [Camera Setup] >  
[Flicker Reduction] to [Automatic] and/or by setting [Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Manual] to [Speed] and the  
shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system (1/50* or 1/100 for 50 Hz systems, 1/60  
or 1/120 for 60 Hz systems).  
* May not be available depending on the frame rate.  
Audio cannot be recorded.  
- The AUDIO IN selection switch is not set correctly (A 103).  
- An external microphone connected to the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminal requires phantom power. Set the corresponding  
INPUT 1/INPUT 2 audio input selection switch to MIC+48V (A 103).  
- The external microphone connected to the MIC terminal is not turned on or its battery is empty.  
Audio is recorded at an extremely low level.  
- The audio level for CH1 or CH2 is set to M, and the recording level is set too low. During 4-channel audio recording:  
[Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [CH3/CH4 Mode] is set to [Manual] and CH3/CH4 Level] is set to a level too low.  
Check the audio level meter on the screen and adjust the audio level correy (A 105, 106).  
- The microphone attenuator is on. Turn off the microphone attenuatoA 2, 104).  
Sound is distorted or is recorded at lower levels.  
- When recording near loud sounds (such as fireworks, shoerts), sod may become distorted or it may not  
be recorded at the actual levels. Activate the microphone atA 102, 4), or adjust the audio recording level  
manually.  
The picture is displayed correctly but there is no the ilt-in speaker.  
- Speaker volume is turned off. Adjust tolume
- If headphones are connected to the amcorder, dhem.  
Recording Media and Accessories  
Cannot insert the recording media.  
- The CF card or SD card you are trying to insert is not facing the correct direction. Turn it over and insert it.  
Cannot record on the CF card.  
- A compatible CF card must be used (A 38).  
- Initialize the CF card (A 41) when you use it with the camcorder for the first time.  
- The CF card is full or it already contains the maximum number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 154) to free  
some space or replace the CF card.  
Cannot record on the SD card.  
- A compatible SD card must be used (A 38).  
- Initialize the SD card (A 41) when you use it with the camcorder for the first time.  
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.  
- The SD card is full. Delete some clips (A 154) and photos (A 198) to free some space or replace the SD card.  
- The folder and file numbers for MP4 clips and photos have reached their maximum value. Set [Other Functions] >  
[File Numbering] to [Reset] and insert a new SD card.  
Recording to and playing back from a recording media is slow.  
- This may occur as clips and photos are recorded/deleted over time. Save your recordings (A 168) and initialize the  
recording media (A 41).  
The supplied wireless controller will not work.  
- Set [Other Functions] > [Wireless Controller] to [On].  
- Replace the battery of the wireless controller.  
Troubleshooting  
The optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or other commercially available remote control does not work.  
- Make sure that [Other Functions] > [REMOTE Term.] is set to [RC-V100] when using the optional RC-V100 Remote  
Controller or [Standard] when using a commercially available remote control.  
- Turn off the camcorder, reconnect the RC-V100 or other remote control and then turn the camcorder back on again.  
- A custom picture file saved in the camcorder must be selected to change custom picture settings using the remote  
controller. Select a custom picture file from [C1] to [C9] (A 132).  
221  
Connections with External Devices  
Video noise appears on a nearby TV screen.  
- When using the camcorder in a room where a TV is located, keep a distance between the compact power adapter and  
the power or antenna cables of the TV.  
Playback looks fine on the camcorder but there is no image on the external monitor.  
- The camcorder is not connected correctly to the external monitor. Make sure you are using the correct connection  
(A 162).  
- The video input on the external monitor is not set to the video terminal to which you connected the camcorder. Select  
the correct video input.  
The camcorder is connected using a commercially available HDMI cable, but there is no picture or sound from the  
external monitor.  
- Disconnect the HDMI cable and then restore the connection or turn the camcorder off and then on again.  
The computer does not recognize the camcorder even though the camcoer is connected correctly.  
- Disconnect the optional IFC-400PCU USB Cable and turn off the caorr. After a short while, turn it on again and  
restore the connection.  
- Connect the camcorder to a different USB port on the co
Network Functions  
Cannot connect with an access poin
- Wi-Fi networks with a stealth functn that do not broadcast their network name (SSID) will not be detected by the  
camcorder during the Wi-Fi network etup. Porm the setup manually (A 177) or turn off the stealth function of the  
access point.  
- Password information is not saved with the camera settings. When you load onto the camcorder camera settings from  
an SD card, all the encryption keys and passwords in the network-related settings are reset. Edit the network-related  
settings as necessary (A 181, 182).  
- The wireless signal is not strong enough or there are other devices in the vicinity interfering with the wireless signal.  
Refer to Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi Networks (A 222).  
Cannot establish a Camera Access Point connection with a Wi-Fi-enabled device.  
- When you reset all the camcorder’s settings, all network settings are lost as well. Set up the Camera Access Point  
settings again (A 177).  
- The wireless signal is not strong enough or there are other devices in the vicinity interfering with the wireless signal.  
Refer to Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi Networks (A 222).  
Cannot connect with a wired (Ethernet) network.  
- Use a category 5e or better shielded twisted pair (STP) LAN cable.  
- Try replacing the LAN cable.  
- When you reset all the camcorder’s settings, all network settings are lost as well. Set up the network settings again  
(A 179).  
- Check that the network device to which the camcorder is connected is on and functioning properly. To use 1000BASE-  
T connection speeds, make sure to use network devices compatible with Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T).  
The LAN access indicator illuminates in red and then turns off.  
- The LAN cable was disconnected or the camcorder cannot communicate with the connected network device. Check  
the LAN connection and the connected network device.  
The Playback via Browser application will not start on the Web browser.  
- Make sure to activate the function on the camcorder with the [Other Functions] > [Playback via Browser] setting  
(A 193).  
- The URL entered into the Web browser’s address bar is incorrect. Enter the URL exactly as it appears on the  
camcorder's screen.  
- The SD card slot cover is open or there is no SD card in the camcorder. Check that an SD card that contains MP4 clips  
and photos is correctly inserted into the camcorder and the SD card slot cover is closed.  
Troubleshooting  
The Browser Remote application will not start on the Web browser.  
- Make sure [Other Functions] > [Network Functions] is set to [Browser Remote].  
- The URL entered into the Web browser’s address bar is incorrect. Check the [Network Settings 4/10] status screen  
and make sure to use the IP address assigned to the camcorder as the URL (A 183).  
- The user name or password is incorrect. Make sure to enter the user name and password of one of the users set on  
the camcorder (A 182).  
222  
The Browser Remote or Playback via Browser screen is not displayed correctly on the Web browser.  
- The device, operating system or Web browser used may not be supported. For the latest information about supported  
systems, visit your local Canon Web site.  
- Enable JavaScript and cookies in your Web browser's settings. For details, refer to the help modules or online  
documentation of the Web browser used.  
Using the Playback via Browser application, playback on a Wi-Fi-enabled device is not smooth.  
- The wireless signal is not strong enough or there are other devices in the vicinity interfering with the wireless signal.  
Refer to Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi Networks (A 222).  
- Playback may not be smooth depending on the strength of the wireless connection.  
- Try connecting the camcorder to a wired network using a LAN cable.  
Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi Networks  
When using a Wi-Fi network, try the following corrective actions if the transmission rate drops, the connection is  
lost, or other problems occur.  
Location of the access point (wireless router)  
- When using a Wi-Fi network indoors, place the access point same rwhere you are using the camcorder.  
- Place the access point in an open, unobstructed location, ple or oects do not come between it and the  
camcorder.  
- Place the access point as close as possible to thorderarticular, note that during outdoor use in poor  
weather, rain may absorb radio waves and disrecti.  
Nearby electronic devices  
- If the transmission rate over a Wi-Fi etwork dropof interference from the following electronic devices,  
switching to the 5 GHz band or to a ifferent channolve the problem.  
- Wi-Fi networks using the IEEE 802.1/g/n protcol operate in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the transmission  
rate may drop if there are nearby micrave ovs, cordless telephones, microphones, or similar devices operating on  
the same frequency band.  
- If another access point operating on the same frequency band as the transmitter is used nearby, the transmission rate  
may drop.  
Using multiple camcorders/access points  
- Check that there are no IP address conflicts among the devices connected to the same network.  
- If multiple XF200 / XF205 camcorders are connected to a single access point, connection speeds may be reduced.  
- To reduce radio wave interference when there are multiple access points using IEEE 802.11b/g or IEEE 802.11n (in the  
2.4 GHz band), leave a gap of four channels between each wireless access point. For example, use channels 1, 6, and  
11, channels 2, 7, and 12, or channels 3, 8, and 13. If you can use IEEE 802.11a/n (in the 5 GHz band), switch to IEEE  
802.11a/n and specify a different channel.  
 
Troubleshooting  
List of Messages  
Refer to this section if a message appears on the screen. The messages in this section appear in alphabetical  
order. Note that for some messages, an indication of the recording media involved (CF A, CF B,  
combination thereof) may appear above the message itself.  
For error messages related to network connections, refer to Network Functions (A 225).  
, or a  
223  
Accessing CF A/CF B/  
Do not remove  
- You opened the CF card slot cover or SD card slot cover while the camcorder was accessing the recording media.  
Close the relevant card slot cover.  
Buffer overflow. Recording was stopped.  
- The data transfer rate was too high for the recording media card in use and the recording was stopped. Use a  
recommended card (A 38).  
Cannot acquire battery information Continue using this battery pack?  
- You attached a battery pack that does not bear the Intelligent System mark.  
- If you are using a battery pack that bears the Intelligent System mark, there may be a problem with the camcorder or  
battery pack. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
Cannot play back  
- The file control information is corrupted or there was a decoder error. Turn off the camcorder and back on again. If this  
does not solve the problem, consult a Canon Service Center.  
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or MXF clips with corrupt file control information  
cannot be read by Canon XF Utility or the Canon XF plugins.  
Cannot record  
- The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder erroroff the camcorder and back on again.  
Then, remove the CF card being used and reinsert it. Alterreplace e CF card. If this does not solve the  
problem, consult a Canon Service Center.  
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. Cor MXF clps with corrupt file control information  
cannot be read by Canon XF Utility or the Cugin
Cannot restore  
- Could not recover data on the CF cd. ve ys (A 168) and initialize the CF card (A 41).  
Cannot switch CF card slots  
- The SLOT SELECT button was pred while te camcorder is recording or when the movie format is set to MP4. Wait  
until recording is finished to change e selecd CF card slot.  
CF A/CF B error  
- The CF card cannot be recognized or cannot be accessed. Check that the CF card is inserted correctly and not  
malfunctioning.  
CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Switched  
- This message appears when you use the SLOT SELECT button to switch the CF card slot in use or recording  
continued from one CF card to the other.  
CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Will switch in a moment  
- The CF card is almost full so recording will continue on the other CF card in approximately 1 minute.  
Change the battery pack  
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.  
Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended  
- The CF card cannot be used for any of the following reasons.  
• A problem has occurred with the CF card.  
• The camcorder cannot read the CF card’s data.  
• The CF card was initialized using a computer.  
• The CF card has been partitioned.  
- Save your MXF clips (A 168) and initialize the CF card (A 41).  
Check the data on  
Initializing the card is also recommended  
- You inserted an SD card that was formatted using another device into the camcorder. Initialize the SD card with this  
camcorder.  
Check the SD card  
- You inserted a MultiMedia Card (MMC) or an SD card with a capacity of 64 MB or smaller into the camcorder. Use a  
recommended SD card (A 38).  
- Due to an SD card error, recording/playback Is not possible. Remove and then reinsert the SD card or use a different  
SD card.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Cover is open  
- The CF card slot cover or SD card slot cover was opened when the camcorder was switched to or turned on in  
mode. Check that the recording media is correctly inserted and close the relevant card slot cover.  
Data on CF A/CF B needs recovering Attempt to recover?  
- If data on the CF card is corrupted, such as when the power suddenly turned off while recording, the data must be  
recovered. When this message appears, select [OK] and then press SET.  
224  
Do not disconnect the USB cable or the power source until you safely end the connection from the computer.  
- When the camcorder is in  
mode and is connected to the computer with the optional IFC-400PCU USB Cable,  
the camcorder cannot be operated. Disconnecting the USB cable or power source while this message appears may  
corrupt the recordings on the recording media in the camcorder. Use the computer’s Safely Remove Hardware  
function to end the connection and disconnect the USB cable before using the camcorder.  
Fan error  
- The cooling fan may not be working properly. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
File name error  
- The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value. Set [Other Functions] > [File Numbering] to [Reset]  
and delete all the MP4 clips (A 154) and photos (A 198) on the SD card or initialize it (A 41).  
INFRARED switch position changed (ON/OFF). Check the focus.  
- The focus may change when you turn the infrared mode on or off. Check that the focus is correct.  
Invalid operation  
- The following operations cannot be performed.  
• Adding a shot mark to an MXF clip that already has a shot mark or to aMXF clip in frame recording mode or  
interval recording mode.  
• Adding an $ mark to an MXF clip that already has an $ maor add% mark to a clip that already has a %  
mark.  
• In  
mode, immediately reviewing a recording made ial recorg mode.  
• Pressing the START/STOP button, or trying to ordiMP4 clip, when there is no recording media in the  
camcorder.  
Management data is not supported and be d
- This message may appear if you int into the caCF card that was initialized by another Canon  
professional camcorder. Check the ntents of the .  
Management file error Cannot record  
- Cannot record because the camcorder nnorite to the file control information. This may occur if the MXF files on  
the CF card were accessed using another device. Save your MXF clips (A 168) and initialize the CF card (A 41).  
May not be possible to record movies on this memory card  
- You may not be able to record MP4 clips on an SD card without a Speed Class rating or rated CLASS 2 or 4. Replace  
the SD card with one rated CLASS 6 or 10.  
Media full  
- The recording media is full. Delete some recordings (A 154, 198) to free some space or replace the recording media.  
- CF card A or CF card B is full so recording will not start. Switch to the CF card in the other CF card slot to record.  
Media is almost full  
- The amount of available space on CF card A and CF card B combined is low. Replace the CF card that is not selected.  
- The SD card is almost full. Delete some recordings (A 154, 198) to free some space or replace the SD card.  
Media is not supported  
- CF cards that are less than 512 MB or not UDMA-compatible cannot be used with the camcorder. Use a  
recommended CF card (A 38).  
Memory card is write-protected  
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.  
No clips  
- There are no clips on the recording media to play back. Clips must be recorded (A 47) in order to play them back.  
No photos  
- There are no photos on the SD card to play back. Photos must be taken (A 195) in order to view them.  
No Shot Marks  
- This message appears if shot marks in a clip were deleted from the [Shot Mark] index screen. Press the INDEX button  
to return to the MXF clip index screen.  
Troubleshooting  
Number of clips already at maximum  
- The CF card selected for recording already contains the maximum number of MXF clips (999 clips). Replace the CF  
card or use the CF card in the other CF card slot.  
- Because both CF cards reached the maximum number of clips, double slot recording is not available.  
Number of Shot Marks at maximum  
- The shot mark could not be added because the MXF clip already contains 100 shot marks (" and # marks  
combined). You must delete shot marks (A 157) before adding any more.  
225  
Reached the recording limit for one clip. Recording was stopped.  
- When recording a single MXF clip for an extended period of time, the clip will be split into smaller video files every  
2 GB (or 1 GB when recording in slow motion). This message will appear when the number of smaller video files  
reaches 99.  
Recorded at 50.00 Hz Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended  
- The CF card contains MXF clips that were recorded using a system frequency different from the one used by the  
camcorder. Back up the content of the CF card if necessary and initialize the CF card with this camcorder (A 41).  
Recording was stopped.  
- The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder error. Turn off the camcorder and back on again.  
Then, remove the CF card being used and reinsert it. Alternatively, replace the CF card. If this does not solve the  
problem, consult a Canon Service Center.  
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot  
be read by Canon XF Utility or the Canon XF plugins.  
Shot Mark Error  
- Could not add a shot mark. If the message appears in  
mode, try ading the mark again. If that does not work,  
add the mark in  
mode after you finish recording. If the messaaears in mode, turn off the  
camcorder and then back on. Then, try to add the mark agai
System error  
- Turn off the camcorder and back on again. If this does not problem, here may be a malfunction with the  
camcorder. Consult a Canon Service Center.  
The sound of the Zoom motor may also be reco
- Be careful when operating the zoom hrecosound of the zoom motor may be recorded as well. Try  
zooming while the camcorder in reord pause m
This clip needs recovering. Attempo recover?  
- If the clip is corrupted, such as when e powsuddenly turned off while recording, the clip must be recovered. When  
this message appears, select [OK] and en ess SET.  
This photo cannot be displayed  
- You may not be able to display photos taken with other devices or image files created or edited on a computer.  
Using a card that supports UDMA mode 4 or higher is recommended  
- The CF card’s UDMA mode is lower than UDMA4. We recommend using a CF card that with a UDMA mode of at least  
UDMA4.  
% / $ Mark Error  
- Could not add a % mark or $ mark. If the message appears in  
not work, add the mark in mode. If the message appears in  
mode, try adding the mark again. If that does  
mode, turn off the camcorder and then back  
on. Then, try to add the mark again.  
Network Functions  
Along with this list, refer also to the instruction manuals of the access point or other external devices you are  
using.  
A User is already accessing the server. Try again later.  
- This message appears on the screen of the connected device. Another device connected to the network is already  
operating the camcorder. To use this device, first end the connection on the device accessing the camcorder and then  
touch Retry.  
Cannot create new folder on the FTP server.  
- Check the user permissions/restrictions for accessing the FTP server.  
Cannot log in to FTP server.  
- Check the user name and password information in the FTP server settings (A 189).  
 
Troubleshooting  
Cannot transfer files to FTP server.  
- Check that there is enough available space in the data storage device (hard disk, etc.) that contains the destination  
folder on the FTP server.  
Check the Media.  
- An error occurred with the recording media while files were being transferred to the FTP server. Check the recording  
media from which you are transferring files and try the FTP transfer operation again.  
226  
Check the network configuration.  
- The camcorder could not connect to the network using the current settings. Check that the network settings are  
correctly configured (A 215).  
File transfer was not completed.  
- The camcorder was turned off while the last FTP transfer operation was still in progress. Transfer the files again  
(A 189).  
FTP server not found.  
- The FTP server could not be found. Check the FTP server settings (A 189).  
FTP transfer error. File transfer was not completed.  
- An error occurred while transferring files to the FTP server. Turn then camcorder and the FTP server off and then on  
again and try again the FTP transfer.  
IP address conflict  
- Another device on the same network has the same IP address assigned to the camcorder. Change the IP address of  
the conflicting device or the camcorder.  
LAN cable not connected.  
- You attempted to connect to a wired network but the LAN cable is nooncted. Check that the LAN cable is  
correctly connected to the camcorder's LAN terminal and to tAN pothe network device.  
Memory card cover was opened so network functions will bted.  
- The CF card slot cover or SD card slot cover was opened wecording edia was being accessed. Stop the  
network function in use and end the network co
Multiple access points detected. Try the operatio
- There are multiple access points senut a t the same time. Try the operation again later or perform  
setup using the [WPS: PIN Code] oSearch for Ats] option (A 175).  
Network connection terminated  
- An error occurred on the access poinr conned device. Check the network or connected and try connecting  
again.  
- The Wi-Fi signal became too weak and the wireless connection was lost. Wait a moment or turn off other devices in  
the area that may be interfering with the Wi-Fi signal and then try connecting again.  
Network is not working correctly  
- There’s a hardware problem with the camcorder’s network related circuitry. Try turning the camcorder off and the on  
again. If the problem persists, consult a Canon Service Center.  
No access points found  
- The camcorder searched for active Wi-Fi networks (access points) in the area but none were found. Make sure the  
access point is working correctly and try connecting again.  
- The access point is operating in stealth mode. Deactivate the stealth function in the wireless router (access point)  
settings.  
- The connection wizard may not be able to find the access point if MAC address filtering is activated. Check the  
[Network Settings 1/10] status screen (A 215) and make sure to add the camcorder’s MAC address to the list of  
approved wireless devices in the wireless router (access point) settings.  
No files available for transfer.  
- All the files selected for transfer have already been transferred to the FTP server.  
Unable to complete WPS.  
- The access point’s encryption method is set to [WEP]. Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) cannot connect to access points  
set to this encryption method. Change the access point’s encryption method or use another connection method  
(A 174).  
Unable to complete WPS. Try the operation again.  
- More than 2 minutes passed between activating WPS on the access point and selecting [OK] on the camcorder. Start  
over the WPS procedure from the beginning.  
- The WPS button was not held down long enough. Refer to the instruction manual of your wireless router. When using  
WPS to make a wireless connection, keep the WPS button held down until the wireless router’s WPS function is  
activated.  
Troubleshooting  
Unable to connect  
- Could not connect to the access point or network device selected.  
- Cordless phones, microwave ovens, refrigerators and other appliances may interfere with the wireless signal. Try using  
the camcorder in a location farther away from such appliances.  
Unable to obtain an IP address  
- If you are not using a DHCP server, connect using the [Manual] option and enter the IP address using the [Manual]  
option (A 178).  
227  
- Turn on the DHCP server. If it is already on, make sure it is functioning properly.  
- Make sure the address range for the DHCP server is sufficient.  
- If you are not using a DNS server, set the DNS address to [0.0.0.0].  
- Set the DNS server’s IP address in the camcorder.  
- Turn on the DNS server. If it is already on, make sure it is functioning properly.  
- Make sure that the DNS server’s IP address and the name for that address are correctly configured.  
- If you are using a wireless gateway router, make sure all of the devices in the network, including the camcorder, are  
configured with the correct gateway address.  
Wi-Fi authentication unsuccessful  
- Check the access point’s authentication/encryption method and encryption key and change the camcorder’s Wi-Fi  
settings (A 181) as necessary.  
Wi-Fi cannot be used while the wireless microphone is attached.  
- Wi-Fi connections cannot be used while an optional WM-V1 Wireless Microphone is attached to the camcorder.  
Disconnect the WM-V1 from the camcorder and turn it off.  
Wi-Fi error. Incorrect authentication method  
- Check the access point’s authentication/encryption method and chnge e camcorder’s Wi-Fi settings (A 181) as  
necessary.  
Wi-Fi error. Incorrect encryption key.  
- When the authentication mode was set to [WPA-PSK] or [K], or the cryption method was set to [WEP], the  
encryption key (WEP index) entered or its length (mber oters) is incrrect.  
• When entering ASCII characters, enter 5 charbit eding) or 13 characters (128-bit encoding). When  
entering hexadecimal characters, enter 10 chbit eoding) or 26 characters (128-bit encoding).  
Wi-Fi error. Incorrect encryption meod  
- Make sure the camcorder and accs point are uame authentication/encryption method.  
Handling Precautions  
Handling Precautions  
Camcorder  
Be sure to observe the following precautions to ensure maximum performance.  
228  
• Do not carry the camcorder by the OLED panel. Be careful when closing the OLED panel.  
• Do not leave the camcorder in places subject to high temperatures (like the inside of a car parked under direct  
sunlight), or high humidity.  
• Do not use the camcorder near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors, MRI  
machines or high-voltage power lines. Using the camcorder in such places may cause anomalies in the video or  
audio or video noise to appear.  
• Do not use the camcorder’s Wi-Fi functions inside hospitals, medical clinics or onboard aircraft. In addition, do  
not use them near medical equipment or sensitive electronic devices as it may affect their performance. In the  
case of pacemakers, keep the camcorder at least 22 cm (8.7 in.) away from the device.  
• The camcorder’s Wi-Fi functions may be subject to interference from devices such as cordless phones and  
microwave ovens. Keeping as much distance as possible from these devices or using the camcorder’s Wi-Fi  
functions at a different time of day may reduce such interference.  
• Do not use or store the camcorder in dusty or sandy places. The camcorder is not waterproof – avoid also  
water, mud or salt. If any of the above should get into the camcorder it may damage the camcorder and/or the  
lens. Consult a Canon Service Center as soon as possible.  
• Be careful to avoid dust and dirt particles accumulating on the lens onteg the camcorder. When you finish using  
the camcorder, make sure to remove the lens hood and attalens co the camcorder.  
• Do not point the camcorder or viewfinder toward an intesource, ch as the sun on a sunny day or an  
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damthe iensor or the camcorder’s internal  
components. Be careful especially when usinor ulder strap. When you are not using the  
camcorder, make sure to attach the lens cap cord.  
• Be careful of heat generated by ligting equip
• Do not disassemble the camcordIf the camcoroes not function properly, consult qualified service  
personnel.  
• Handle the camcorder with care. Do nsject the camcorder to shocks or vibration as this may cause  
damage. When using the shoulder strap, do not allow the camcorder to swing and hit an object.  
Long-term storage  
If you do not intend to use the camcorder for a long time, store it in a place free of dust, in low humidity, and at  
temperatures not higher than 30 °C (86 °F).  
Battery Pack  
DANGER!  
Treat the battery pack with care.  
• Keep it away from fire (or it might explode).  
• Do not expose the battery pack to temperature higher than 60 °C (140 °F). Do not leave it near a heater or  
inside a car in hot weather.  
• Do not try to disassemble or modify it.  
• Do not drop it or subject it to shocks.  
• Do not get it wet.  
• Dirty terminals may cause a poor contact between the battery pack and the camcorder. Wipe the terminals  
with a soft cloth.  
   
Handling Precautions  
Long-term storage  
• Store battery packs in a dry place at temperatures no higher than 30 °C (86 °F).  
• To extend the battery life of the battery pack, discharge it completely before storing it.  
• Charge and discharge all your battery packs fully at least once a year.  
229  
Always attach the battery terminal cover.  
Do not allow any metal objects to touch the terminals (figure 1), as this can  
cause a short circuit and damage the battery pack. Attach the terminal cover  
whenever the battery pack is not being used (figure 2).  
The battery terminal cover has a [ð]-shaped hole. This is useful when you  
wish to differentiate between charged and uncharged battery packs. For  
example, with charged battery packs, attach the terminal cover so that the  
[ð]-shaped hole shows the colored label.  
Figure 1  
Figure 2  
Terminal cover attached  
Charged  
Back side of the  
battery pack  
Uncharged  
Remaining battery time  
When using a battery pack compatible with Insteif the remaining battery time displayed is not  
correct, charge the battery pack fully. Still, the maot be displayed if a fully charged battery pack is  
used continuously in high temperates or it is lfor long periods of time. Also, the correct remaining  
time may not be displayed, depeng on the batt. Use the time shown on the screen as an  
approximation.  
Regarding the use of non-Canon battery packs  
• We recommend using genuine Canon battery packs bearing the Intelligent System  
mark.  
• If you attach to the camcorder battery packs that are not genuine Canon battery packs, the remaining battery  
time will not be displayed.  
Recording Media  
• We recommend backing up the recordings on the recording media onto your computer. Data may be  
corrupted or lost due to defects or exposure to static electricity. Canon shall not be liable for lost or corrupted  
data.  
• Do not touch or expose the terminals to dust or dirt.  
• Do not use recording media in places subject to strong magnetic fields.  
• Do not leave recording media in places subject to high humidity and high temperature.  
• Do not disassemble, bend, drop, or subject recording media to shocks and do not expose them to water.  
• Check the direction before inserting the recording media. Forcing recording media into the slot if it is not  
correctly oriented may damage the recording media or the camcorder.  
• Do not attach any labels or stickers on the recording media.  
Handling Precautions  
• SD cards: SD cards have a physical switch to prevent writing on the card so as to  
avoid the accidental erasure of the card’s content. To write-protect the SD card,  
set the switch to the LOCK position.  
230  
Disposal  
LOCK switch  
When you delete data on the recording media, only the file allocation table is altered  
and stored data is not physically erased. Take the necessary precautions when you dispose of the recording  
media, for example by physically damaging it to prevent the leakage of private data.  
If giving the recording media to another person, initialize it (using the [Complete] initialization option for SD cards,  
A 41). Fill it up with unimportant recordings, and then initialize it again. This makes recovering the original  
recordings very difficult.  
Built-in Rechargeable Lithium Battery  
The camcorder has a built-in rechargeable lithium battery to keep the date/time and other settings. The built-in  
lithium battery is recharged while you use the camcorder; however, it will discharge completely if you do not use  
the camcorder for about 3 months.  
To recharge the built-in lithium battery: Connect the compact power aapter to the camcorder and use a  
household power outlet to power the camcorder for 24 hours whilt is rned off.  
Lithium Button Battery  
WARNING!  
• The battery used in this device y present a fihemical burn hazard if mishandled.  
• Do not disassemble, modify, immse in wer, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate the battery.  
• Replace with a CR2025 battery mady anasonic, Hitachi Maxell, Sony, Sanyo, or with Duracell2025.  
Use of other batteries may present a risk of fire or explosion.  
• Do not insert the battery into the mouth. If swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately. The battery  
case may break and the battery fluids may cause internal injuries.  
• Keep the battery out of the reach of children.  
• Do not recharge, short-circuit or insert the battery in the wrong direction.  
• Dispose of the used battery according to applicable recycling regulations.  
• Do not pick up the battery using tweezers or other metal tools, as this will cause a short circuit.  
• Wipe the battery with a clean dry cloth to ensure proper contact.  
• For CA, USA only  
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.  
 
Maintenance/Others  
Maintenance/Others  
Cleaning  
Camcorder Body  
231  
• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camcorder body. Never use chemically treated cloths or volatile solvents  
such as paint thinner.  
Lens and Instant AF Sensor  
• If the lens surface or Instant AF sensor is dirty, autofocus may not work properly.  
• Remove any dust or dirt particles using a non-aerosol type blower brush.  
• Use a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth to gently wipe the lens and sensor using commercially available cleaning  
fluid for eyeglasses. Never use tissue paper.  
OLED Screen  
• Clean the OLED screen using a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth.  
• Condensation may form on the surface of the screen when the temperature changes suddenly. Wipe it with a  
soft dry cloth.  
Condensation  
Moving the camcorder rapidly between hot and cold tems may cse condensation (water droplets) to  
form on its internal surfaces. Stop using the camcder if csation is detected. Continued use may damage  
the camcorder.  
Condensation may form in the folloincas
• When the camcorder is moved qckly from corm places  
• When the camcorder is left in a hmid room  
• When a cold room is heated rapidly  
To avoid condensation  
• Do not expose the camcorder to sudden or extreme changes in temperature.  
• Remove the recording media and battery pack. Then, place the camcorder in an airtight plastic bag and let it  
adjust gradually to temperature changes before removing it from the bag.  
When condensation is detected  
The camcorder automatically shuts off.  
The precise time required for water droplets to evaporate will vary depending on the location and weather  
conditions. As a general rule, wait for 2 hours before resuming use of the camcorder.  
Using the Camcorder Abroad  
Power Sources  
You can use the compact power adapter to operate the camcorder and to charge battery packs in any country  
with power supply between 100 and 240VAC, 50/60Hz. Consult a Canon Service Center for information on plug  
adapters for overseas use.  
     
Optional Accessories  
Optional Accessories  
The following optional accessories are compatible with this camcorder. The availability differs from area to area.  
232  
BP-950G, BP-955,  
BP-970G, BP-975  
Battery Pack  
CA-930 Compact  
Power Adapter  
DC-930 DC Cable  
WA-H58 Wide  
Attachment  
TL-H58 Tele-conr  
Protect Filter 58 mm,  
ND4L Filter 58 mm,  
ND8L Filter 58 mm  
RC-V100 Remote  
Controller  
GP-E2  
GPS Receiver  
TA-100 Tripod Adapter  
TB-1 Tripod Adapter  
Base  
STV-250N  
Stereo Video Cable  
IFC-400PCU  
USB Cable  
For our customers in the USA: Call or visit your local retailer/dealer for genuine Canon video accessories. You  
can also obtain genuine accessories for your Canon camcorder by calling: 1-800-828-4040, Canon U.S.A.  
Information Center.  
   
Optional Accessories  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories.  
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the  
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please  
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon  
accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
233  
Battery Packs  
When you need extra battery packs, select from the following: BP-950G,  
BP-955, BP-970G*, BP-975*.  
When you use battery packs bearing the Intelligent System mark, the  
camcorder will communicate with the battery and display the remaining  
usage time (accurate to 1 minute). You can only use and charge these battery  
packs with camcorders and chargers compatible with Intelligent System.  
BP-955  
BP-975  
*The optional BP-970G / BP-975 Battery Pack were not originally designed for use  
with this camcorder.  
Charging Times  
Use the supplied CA-930 Compact Power Adapter to charge battery pcks. The charging times given in the  
following table are approximate and vary according to charging condits and initial charge of the battery pack.  
BP-950G  
245 min.  
BP-955  
BP-970G  
350 min.  
BP-975  
200 min.  
in.  
Recording and Playback Times  
Recording and playback times given in the fos arapproximate and were measured under the  
following conditions:  
-
The 3G/HD-SDI terminand MON. tee turned off.  
- The OLED screen and viewfinder e both trned on.  
- Typical recording times measure recding ith repeated operations such as start/stop recording and power  
on/off.  
Actual times will vary according to recording mode and charging, recording or playback conditions. The effective  
usage time of the battery pack may decrease when recording in cold surroundings, when using the brighter  
screen settings, etc.  
     
Optional Accessories  
Movie format  
(bit rate)  
Usage time  
BP-950G  
BP-955  
BP-970G  
BP-975  
MXF (50 Mbps)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical)  
Playback  
270 min.  
160 min.  
375 min.  
280 min.  
165 min.  
365 min.  
260 min.  
150 min.  
360 min.  
265 min.  
155 min.  
350 min.  
380 min.  
220 min.  
520 min.  
390 min.  
225 min.  
510 min.  
380 min.  
235 min.  
520 min.  
390 min.  
240 min.  
515 min.  
234  
MP4 (35 Mbps)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical)  
Playback  
Movie format  
(bit rate)  
Usage time  
BP-950G  
BP-955  
BP-970G  
BP-975  
MXF (50 Mbps)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical)  
Playback  
260 min.  
150 min.  
345 min.  
275 min.  
160 min.  
360 min.  
250 min.  
150 min.  
335 min.  
260 min.  
150 n.  
45 min.  
360 min.  
220 min.  
485 min.  
380 min.  
220 min.  
505 min.  
360 min.  
235 min.  
490 min.  
385 min.  
235 min.  
505 min.  
MP4 (35 Mbps)  
Recording (maximum)  
Recording (typical)  
Playback  
-10 Trir  
he TA-100 au to quickly mount/unmount the  
mcordeon/from a tripod.  
This mark identifies genuine Canon video accessories. When you use Canon video equipment, we  
recommend Canon-brand accessories or products bearing the same mark.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
XF200 / XF205  
System  
235  
• Recording System  
MXF Movies: Video compression: MPEG-2 Long GOP  
Audio compression: Linear PCM, 16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 or 4 channels  
File format: MXF  
MP4 Movies: Video compression: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264  
Audio compression: MPEG-4 AAC-LC, 16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 channels  
File format: MP4  
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system), compatible with Exif Ver. 2.3, JPEG compression  
Photos:  
• Video Configuration (recording/playback)  
MXF Movies:  
50 Mbps (CBR, 4:2:2, 422P@HL)  
1920x1080: 59.94i, 29.97P, 23.98P  
1280x720: 59.94P, 29.97P, 23.98P  
35 Mbps (VBR, 4:2:0, MP@HL)  
1920x1080: 59.94i, 29.97P, 23.98P  
1440x1080: 59.94i  
1280x720: 59.94P, 29.97P, 23.98P  
25 Mbps (CBR, 4:2:0, MP@H14)  
1440x1080: 59.94i, 29.97P, 23.98P  
MP4 Movies (audio bit rate give in brackets [ 
35 Mbps (VBR)  
1920x1080: 59.94P [256 s]  
24 Mbps (VBR)  
1920x1080: 29.97P, 238P [256 kbps]  
17 Mbps (VBR)  
1280x720: 59.94P [128 kb
9 Mbps (VBR)  
1280x720: 29.97P, 23.98P [128 kbps]  
1
3 Mbps (VBR)  
640x360: 29.97P, 23.98P [128 kbps]  
Only when the movie format is set to MXF+MP4.  
1
• Recording Media (not included)  
MXF Movies: CompactFlash (CF) Card Type I (two slots)  
2
MP4 Movies and Photos: SD, SDHC (SD High Capacity) or SDXC (SD eXtended Capacity) memory card  
2
Custom picture files, camera settings and user memo files can be saved on and read from the SD card as well.  
• Maximum Recording Time (approximate, continuous recording)  
MXF Movies:  
16 GB CF Card  
50 Mbps: 40 min., 35 Mbps: 55 min., 25 Mbps: 80 min.  
64 GB CF Card  
50 Mbps: 160 min., 35 Mbps: 225 min., 25 Mbps: 310 min.  
MP4 Movies:  
16 GB SD card  
35 Mbps: 60 min., 24 Mbps: 85 min., 17 Mbps: 125 min., 9 Mbps: 235 min., 3 Mbps: 685 min.  
32 GB SD card  
35 Mbps: 120 min., 24 Mbps: 175 min., 17 Mbps: 255 min., 9 Mbps: 470 min., 3 Mbps: 1375 min.  
   
Specifications  
• Image Sensor: 1/2.84-in. CMOS sensor, approx. 2,910,000 pixels (2136x1362)  
• OLED Screen: 3.5 in. organic LED display, equivalent to approx. 1,230,000 dots, 100% coverage  
• Viewfinder: 0.45 in. color LCD, equivalent to approx. 1,230,000 dots, 99.8% coverage  
236  
• Lens  
f=3.67-73.4 mm, F/1.8-2.8, 20x optical zoom, 8-bladed circular aperture  


35 mm equivalent: 28.8 – 576 mm (26.8 – 576 mm when the angle of view at full wide-angle is set to  
[Wider])  
• Lens Configuration: 12 elements in 10 groups (2 aspheric elements)  
• Filter Diameter: 58 mm  
• Minimum Focusing Distance  
60 cm (2 ft.) throughout the zoom range; 1 cm (0.39 in.) (at full wide angle with [Focus Limit] set to [Off])  
• AF System  
Autofocus (TTL + external distance sensor when the AF [Speed] is set to [High] (Instant AF) or [Medium]  
(Medium AF)), or manual focus  
• Image Stabilization  
Optical-Shift Image Stabilizer + digital compensation (Standard IS, Dynamic IS, Powered IS)  
• Subject Illumination (full auto mode set to OFF, frame rate set to 594i , gain at 33 dB, shutter speed at  
1/4)  
Minimum Illumination: 0.1 lux  
Illumination Range: 0.1 lux to 10,000 lux  
• ND Filter: Graduated ND filter, 3 automatic s/2, 1/8)  
• Iris: Automatic or manual  
• Gain  
-6 dB to 27 dB (3-dB increments)3 dB; 6.0 dB 7.0 dB (fine-tuning in 0.5-dB increments)  
• Shutter  
Automatic, speed (normal increments oe-tuning), angle, clear scan, slow shutter or off  
• Exposure: Full automatic ON/OFF; AE shift; 3 light metering modes (standard, spotlight or backlight)  
• White Balance  
Auto white balance (AWB); two preset settings (daylight, 5,400 K3 and incandescent lamp, 3,200 K3) that can be  
further fine-tuned; color temperature setting (2,000 K to 15,000 K); custom white balance (two sets, A and B)  
3
Color temperatures are approximate and given for reference purposes only.  
• Digital zoom: Digital zoom (120x); digital tele-converter (1.5x, 3.0x, 6.0x)  
• Infrared mode: Available, including built-in infrared light  
• Microphone: Stereo electret condenser microphone  
• Size of Photos  
1920x1080 pixels, 1280x720 pixels (  
mode only)  
Wi-Fi  
• Wireless Standard: IEEE802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band), IEEE802.11a/n (5 GHz band)  
• Connection Methods: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), search for access points, manual, Camera Access Point  
• Supported Channels: See the following sidebar.  
• Authentication Methods: Open, WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK  
• Encryption Methods: WEP-64, WEP-128, TKIP, AES  
Specifications  
• Maximum Data Transfer Rates (theoretical values):  
11 Mbps (IEEE802.11b), 54 Mbps (IEEE802.11a/g), 150 Mbps (IEEE802.11n)  
Available frequencies and channels  
The camcorder’s Wi-Fi functions operate in a predetermined range of frequencies and channels. Note that  
not all channels may be available for a direct Camera Access Point connection with Wi-Fi-enabled devices.  
237  
Available for Camera Access  
Frequency  
Channels  
Point connections  
2412 MHz to 2462 MHz  
5280 MHz to 5320 MHz  
5745 MHz to 5805 MHz  
1 to 11  
56 to 64  
Yes  
No  
149 to 161  
Yes  
Terminals  
•
3G/HD-SDI Terminal  
BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced  
3G-SDI:  
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE ST 425-1  
Video (1080P), embedded audio, time code (VITC/LTC)  
SMPTE 292-1  
HD-SDI:  
Video (1080i or 720P), embedded audio, time ce (VC/LTC)  
•
MON. Terminal  
BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced  
HD-SDI:  
SMPTE 292-1  
Video (1080P, 1080i or 720Ped dio, time code (VITC/LTC)  
SMPTE 259M  
SD-SDI:  
Video (480i), embeded audio(VITC/LTC)  
• HDMI OUT Terminal  
HDMI connector, output only, suprts 10/59.94P output  
• AV OUT Terminal  
∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, output only  
Video: SD composite signal, 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced  
Audio: -10 dBV (47 kΩ load) / 3 kΩ or less, stereo  
• INPUT 1, INPUT 2 Terminals  
XLR jack (pin1: shield, pin2: hot, pin3: cold), 2 sets  
Sensitivity  
MIC setting: -60 dBu (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 600 Ω  
LINE setting: 4 dBu (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 10 kΩ  
Microphone attenuator: 20 dB  
• MIC Terminal  
∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, -72 dBV (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 600 Ω  
Microphone attenuator: 20 dB  
• × (Headphone) Terminal  
∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, -G to -12 dBV (16 Ω load, volume range Min to Max) / 50 Ω or less  
•
•
GENLOCK/SYNC OUT Terminal  
BNC jack, input only (GENLOCK setting)/output only (SYNC OUT setting), 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω  
TIME CODE Terminal  
BNC jack, input/output  
Input: 0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p / 10 kΩ  
Output: 1 Vp-p / 50 Ω  
Specifications  
• LAN Terminal: Ethernet, 1000BASE-T  
• USB Terminal: mini-B receptacle, Hi-Speed USB, output only  
• REMOTE Terminal: ∅ 2.5 mm stereo mini-jack  
238  
Power/Others  
• Power Supply (rated)  
7.4 V DC (battery pack), 8.4 V DC (DC IN)  
• Power Consumption (recording MXF clips at 50 Mbps, using autofocus, viewfinder/OLED screen normal  
brightness, SDI output off)  
8.2 W  
8.4 W  
• Operating Temperature  
0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
• Dimensions (W x H x D)*  
Camcorder only: 144 x 158 x 264 mm (5.7 x 6.2 x 10.4 in.)  
Camcorder with microphone holder unit, lens hood and eye cup: 160 x 201 x 353 mm (6.3 x 7.9 x 13.9 in.)  
* All dimensions are approximate.  
• Weight (camcorder only)**  
1,510 g (3.3 lb.)  
1,560 g (3.4 lb.)  
**All weights are approximate.  
CA-930 Compact Power Adapter  
• Rated input  
100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
As a power adapter: 46 VA (100 V– 62 VA (240 V)  
As a battery charger: 40 VA (100 V) 54 VA 40 V)  
• Rated output  
As a power adapter: 8.4 V DC, 2.4 A  
As a battery charger: 8.4 V DC, 1.5/2.0 A  
• Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 51 x 110 mm (3.3 x 2.0 x 4.3 in.)  
• Weight: 240 g (8.5 oz.)  
BP-955 Battery Pack  
• Battery Type  
Rechargeable lithium ion battery, compatible with Intelligent System  
• Rated Voltage: 7.4 V DC  
• Battery Capacity  
Typical: 5,200 mAh  
Minimum: 37 Wh / 4,900 mAh  
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 38.2 x 43.5 x 70.5 mm (1.5 x 1.7 x 2.8 in.)  
• Weight: 220 g (7.8 oz)  
Specifications  
239  
Weight and dimensions are approximate. Errors and omissions excepted.  
The information in this manual is verified as of June 2014. Subject to change without notice.  
Specifications  
240  
Index  
241  
3G/HD-SDI terminal* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163  
4-channel audio recording . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 100  
Clips  
Adding an $ mark/% mark . . . . 110, 152  
Adding/Deleting shot marks . . . . 110, 157  
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Displaying clip information . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 123  
Saving to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
A
Abroad, using the camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
AE shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
AGC (automatic gain control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
AGC limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Air intake vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Angle of view (wide-angle end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
Assignable buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Audio output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166  
Audio peak limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Audio recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Audio recording level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Audio reference signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AV OUT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
AWB (auto white balance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Connection to an external monitor . . . . . . . . . 162  
Conversion lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Cooling fa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Custdiays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
stom fions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
m pict. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
m pictursettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
D
Data Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
DC IN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Digital tele-converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Direct setting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Double slot recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Drop frame (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
B
Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Remaining battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Bit rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Browser Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Built-in backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230  
E
C
Edge monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Exposure compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Eye cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Camera settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143  
CameraAccess plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
CF card  
Compatible CF cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Inserting/Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Recording method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Recovering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Switching CF card slots . . . . . . . . .41, 146  
F
File numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Flicker reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Focal length guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Face AF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Focus assistance functions . . . . . . . . . . 84  
PUSH AF (momentary autofocus) . . . . . 85  
Check marks (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 152  
Focus limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Frame recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Free-run (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
*
only  
 
242  
FTP transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Full auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199  
Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
MIC terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 101  
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Microphone attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Microphone holder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 100  
Microphone sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 106  
MON. terminal* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163  
Monitoring audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 167  
Movie format (MXF/MP4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
G
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Genlock* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
GENLOCK terminal* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
GPS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Grip belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Grip unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
H
HDMI OUT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
Headphone terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Hour meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
N
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
k functis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
-drop frame (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
I
Image stabilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index screens  
O
Changing clip thumbnail . . . . . . . . .
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Expand clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156  
Shot marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
OK marks ($) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 152  
OLED screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Onscreen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 147  
Onscreen markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Infrared light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Infrared recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Initializing recording media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 103  
Interval recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
Iris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
P
Peaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Phantom power (microphone) . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Photos  
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
J
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Joystick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Playback  
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
K
Playback via Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193  
Power save mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
POWER switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Powered IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Pre-recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
Key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
L
LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Lens hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Light metering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
R
Real-time proxy transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Rec run (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
M
Macro shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
*
only  
243  
Recording  
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Time code synchronization* . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96  
TIME CODE terminal* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96  
Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Turning the camcorder on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Simultaneous MXF+MP4 recording . . . .123  
Relay recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
REMOTE terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Resetting all camcorder settings . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Resolution (frame size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Reviewing a recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
Running mode (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
U
USB terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
User bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
User memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
V
Vectorsco. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Video confuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Video ouconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
nder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
lume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
S
Safe area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Saving clips to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
Scan reverse recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141  
SD card  
Compatible SD cards . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting/Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
Waveform monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
White balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Wide DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 135  
Wireless controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Shooting frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Shot marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11157  
Shoulder strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Shutter speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Slow & fast motion recording mode . . . . . . . . .120  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209  
Synchronization* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
X
XF Utility (download) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Z
T
Zebra pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Soft zoom control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Tally lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Terminal covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
*
only  
USA  
& N  
Z
CANON PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS  
PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES  
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. ('Canon USA') with respect to Canon Professional Digital Video Equipment (the  
'Equipment') packaged with this limited warranty and purchased in the United States. This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill  
of Sale or other proof of purchase. The Equipment is warranted to the original end-user purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original  
container, under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows:  
Parts: Defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase.  
Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon USA's factory service centers or  
designated service facilities located in the United States.  
244  
When returning Equipment under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of  
purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be return-  
shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to  
approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be returned to you at your  
risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Equipment to you at no charge to you to an address within the United States.  
This limited warranty only applies if the Equipment is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as  
to which items Canon USA will have no responsibility. Canon USA shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the  
Equipment in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand peripheral equipment and  
software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Equipment, are sold 'AS IS' without warranty of any kind by Canon USA,  
including any implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such non-  
Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof. If the Equipment contains a hard disk drive, Canon USA recommends  
that data stored on that drive be duplicated or backed up to prevent its loss in the event of failure or other malfunction of such drive.  
In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from om purchased the Equipment or contact the CANON  
INFORMATION CENTER AT 855-CINE-EOS (855-246-3367) or on the Internet at pro.usa.can/support. You will be directed to the nearest  
service facility for your Equipment.  
This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal usEquipdoes not apply in the following cases:  
A. Loss or damage to the Equipment due to abuse, mishandmpropmaintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to follow  
operating, maintenance or environmental inss presUSA's user's manual;  
B. If the Equipment is defective as a result of king batteries, ater damage;  
C. If defects or damages are caused by the usf parts or supplies than those sold by Canon USA) that cause damage to the Equipment or that  
cause abnormally frequent service calls or sce proble;  
D. If defects or damages are caused by service or than anon USA's factory service centers or authorized service facilities;  
E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;  
F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Equipment;  
G. If the Equipment has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.  
This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or  
consumables for the Equipment, which are sold "AS IS", without warranty of any kind by Canon USA. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale  
as a permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or product  
recall under applicable laws or regulations.  
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THIS EQUIPMENT AFTER THE  
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION  
WITH RESPECT TO THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL BIND THE UNDERSIGNED (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON USA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF  
REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE, STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE EQUIPMENT'S HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL  
THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON USA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL  
RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON USA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT SOLD BY CANON USA AND  
CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY  
TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT  
NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON USA (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER  
THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
CANADA  
CANON PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS  
PURCHASED IN CANADA  
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon Canada Inc. ('Canon Canada') with respect to Canon Professional Digital Video Equipment (the  
'Equipment') packaged with this limited warranty and purchased in Canada. This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or  
other proof of purchase. The Equipment is warranted to the original end-user purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original container, under  
normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows:  
Parts: Defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase.  
Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon Canada's factory service center or  
designated service facilities located in Canada.  
245  
When returning Equipment under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of  
purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be return-  
shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to  
approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be returned to you at your  
risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Equipment to you at no charge to you to an address within Canada.  
This limited warranty only applies if the Equipment is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as to  
which items Canon Canada will have no responsibility. Canon Canada shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the  
Equipment in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand peripheral equipment and  
software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Equipment, are sold 'AS IS' without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada,  
including any implied warranty or condition regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such  
non-Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof. If the Equipment contains a hard disk drive, Canon Canada recommends  
that data stored on that drive be duplicated or backed up to prevent its loss in the event of failure or other malfunction of such drive.  
In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom purced the Equipment or contact the CANON PROFESSIONAL  
SERVICE CENTRE 1-800-667-2666 or on the Internet at www.canon.ca/pro. You will be directed tarest service facility for your Equipment.  
This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Eqdoes not ly in the following cases:  
A. Loss or damage to the Equipment due to abuse, mishant, imer maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to follow  
operating, maintenance or environmental instructions pon Cada's user's manual;  
B. If the Equipment is defective as a result of latteriwater amage;  
C. If defects or damages are caused by the e of parts or suan those sold by Canon Canada) that cause damage to the Equipment or  
that cause abnormally frequent service cor service problem
D. If defects or damages are caused by serviother thaanon Canada's factory service centers or authorized service facilities;  
E. Any internal modification to product hardware firmw;  
F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Equipment;  
G. If the Equipment has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.  
This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment purchased outside Canada. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or consumables for  
the Equipment, which are sold "AS IS", without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale as a  
permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or product recall  
under applicable laws or regulations.  
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THIS  
EQUIPMENT AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON,  
FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL BIND THE UNDERSIGNED (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS  
ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON  
CANADA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE, STORAGE  
CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE EQUIPMENT'S  
HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
EQUIPMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON CANADA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON CANADA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF  
THE EQUIPMENT SOLD BY CANON CANADA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK  
AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE,  
MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON CANADA (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT  
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).  
THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM  
IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from province to province.  
CANON CANADA INC.  
Canon Inc. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
ASIA and HONG KONG, S.A.R.  
MÉXICO http://www.canon.com.mx  
CANON MEXICANA, S DE RL DE CV  
52 (55) 5249-4905  
Canon Hongkong Company Ltd  
19/F, The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,  
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
+852 3191 2333,  
+852 2428 3963  
USA  
CANON U.S.A., INC. http://pro.usa.canon.com  
http://pro.usa.canon.com/support  
(855) CINE-EOS (855-246-3367)  
(USA only)  
CANADA http://www.canon.ca/pro  
CANON CANADA INC.  
❖
Professional Product Support /  
Soutien des produits professionnels  
(800) 667-2666  
CENTRO Y SURAMÉRICA http://www.cla.canon.com  
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.  
Visit your local Canon Web site to download the latest version of ttruction Manual.  
Consultez votre site Web Canon local pour téléchargn la pluécente de ce manuel d'instructions.  
Para descargar la última versión de este manual de inss, visite nstro sitio web local de Canon.  
© CANON INC. 2014  
PUB. DIM-1104-000A  

ARC Audio KAR6022 User Manual
Boston Acoustics RX67DIN User Manual
Bryan Boilers Broile System User Manual
Canon DC 40 User Manual
Canon FS20 User Manual
Dual XD1228 User Manual
Dual XDMA6355 User Manual
Farenheit Technologies HRD 9GR User Manual
Hasselblad H4D 60 User Manual
JBL GT5 2402BR User Manual